Home

USER MANUAL E5AR E5ER Digital Controller

1. 3 Press the key to enter the desired sensor value When using a platinum resistance temperature input sensor Pt100 150 00 to 150 00 C set the value to 1 Input types ranqe m Input type o Pt00 1 200 0 to 850 0 300 0 to 1500 0 1 0 0 2 150 00 to 150 00 199 99 to 300 00 200 0 to 1300 0 300 0 to 2300 0 N I 200 to 5000 00 to 9000 l 100 0 to 850 0 100 0 to 1500 0 TC PT NO 5 v 20 w 400 00 i 7500 Ls T f aooe ao aoo e moo _ t v qo 800 9 o 1500 0 U 90 i 400 300 tb 7000 0 200 0 i 13000 3000 to 23000 r R 00 t 17000 00 i 3000 a 1000 0 1800 3000 to 32000 i4 5 Z 4 8 4 4 Setting the input type Input type Input type s Pe 4 to 20 mA One of the following ranges is displayed depending ANALOG 01o 20mA on the scaling 1 to5V m 7 i O P OtoSV 199 99 to 999 99 Oto 10V 19 999 to 99 999 1 9999 to 9 9999 Set the input type switch according to the Input type setting The initial settings are 2 and TC PT When analog input voltage input current input is used scaling according to the type of control is possible Hi Scaling Setting the display to shovv 0 0 for an input value of 5 mA
2. ew tul l l each time the key is pressed Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 PF1 pracH C D ce amp Z 31 531053 c ar r A M key Level after changing After changing channels the level will be that of the currently channels displayed channel When a manual mode channel is selected the display will show the manual operation screen of RUN level 6 Displayed setting Displayed data after changing channels is as follows data after changing DIf the setting data of a displayed channel continues to be effective channels after changing to a different channel the setting data will be displayed 2f the setting data of a displayed channel will not be effective after changing to a different channel due to a different control method or other reason the next effective setting data is displayed The following is an example of changing channels in RUN level Present value PV SP Display 2 Present value PV SP Display 2 LI CUL nn L 412 1242 gt On models with only a single Setting data for selected channel the CH key is disabled channel appears If you continue to hold down the key after
3. 7 8 Reading the variable area 7 10 Writing to the variable area 7 12 Operation commands Communication Modbus 7 14 Setting Area x ab tae iriran in IB S a iSS 7 16 Commands and responses Communication Modbus 7 17 Lem r 923 2 E o Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 1 Communication method E Modbus communication protocol The communication function is used by creating a program on the host computer As such the explanations in this section are from the perspective of the host computer For example Read Write refers to the host computer reading or writing to the EBAR ER This communication method is based on RTU Mode of the Modbus Protocol of Modicon Inc Specifications PI MBUS 300 Rev J Detailed specifications for the Modbus protocol are shown below E Communication specifications Transfer connection Multi point Communication method RS 485 2 wire half duplex Synchronization method Start stop Communication speed 9 6 k 19 2 k 38 4 k bit s Send code RTU Remote Terminal Unit Data length 8 bits Stop bit length Automatically set by vertical parity setting Error detection Vertical parity None Even Odd CRC 16 Cyclical Redundancy Check Flow control None Interface RS 485 Retry function No
4. FIO1 1 Broken line approximation 1 Input 1 212999591999 Input 20 2999591999 001 1 Broken line approximation 1 Output 1 21999591999 FO20 1 Broken line C Control in Output 2 approximation 1 progress deser metus C909 9 909 SI1 2 Straight line approximation 2 Input 1 1 999 9 999 SI2 2 Straight line approximation 2 Input 2 1 999 9 999 SO1 2 Straight line approximation 2 Output 1 1 999 9 999 02 2 Straight line approximation 2 Output 2 1 999 9 999 Straight line approximation Input 1 Set Straight line approximation Input 2 522 Straight line approximation Output 1 Sat Straight line approximation Output2 5662 1 or 2 Straight line approximation is enabled Use these settings to configure straight line approximation 1 and 2 e Set values for straight line approximation Specify two points straight line approximations 1 and 2 Use normalized data for the values e f Input 1 Input 2 the setting will not be effective and will be regarded as straight line approximation with input data output data Output value 2 Output value 1 Input value 1 Input value 2 8 33 I Section 8 Setting data Setting data Setting range Units Default value e Straight line approximation Input 1 1 999 to 9 999 NM 0 000 Setting Straight line approximation Input 2 1 999 to 9 999 NM 1 000 Straight lin
5. 6 Press the cel repeatedly to select 2 52 Cooling coefficient Press the s key to set the SP to 0 50 Cooling coefficient E Adjustment To adjust the PID constants run AT For more information see 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings P 4 19 Section 3 Typical Control Examples M Settings for heating cooling control 6 Dead band 6 Cooling coefficient 3 8 When heating cooling control is selected the Dead band and Cooling coefficient settings can be used The dead band is set centered on the SP The dead band width is set in Dead band in the Adjustment level Setting a negative value changes the dead band to an overlap band Dead band Overlap band Output Dead band width Positive Output Dead band width Negative 00 100 side side Heat side Cool side 0 PV 076 PV Heat side P A Cool side P Heat side P A Cool side P SP SP e The initial setting is 0 00 When the heating characteristics of the object are different from the cooling characteristics and satisfactory control is not possible using the same PID parameters use the cooling coefficient to adjust the proportional band of cooling control output and thereby balance heating a
6. B First order lag operation e First order lag operation serves as a filter for each input For a multi input type the operation is set for each of inputs 1 to 4 in First order lag operation 1 4 To use first order lag operation set First order lag operation enable to ON the initial setting is OFF A time constant must also be set and this is selected so that the result of the operation is 0 63 times the input data Input data N 0 63A Operation result Time constant Default Setting data Setting range H First order lag operation OFF Disabled OFF 1 to 4 enable ON Enabled First order lag operation 0 0 to 999 9 S t 1 to 4 time constants e The move average operation reduces sudden changes in the input due to noise and other factors and can be enabled for each input e To use the move average operation set Move average enable to ON the initial setting is OFF e A count must also be selected in the Move average setting Selec tions are 1 2 4 8 16 and 32 times Input data Operation result 4 Time l Default Move average OFF Disabled OFF 1 to 4 enable ON Enabled Move average 1 to 4 1 2 4 8 16 32 mnes 1 count 5 5 I Section 5 Functions and Operations M Broken line approximation This function is used to correct non linearity in the input Twenty broken line approximation operation
7. 6 9 Writing to the variable area 6 10 Operation commands Communication CompovVVay F 6 11 Seting areas Nd rs balas DIS ic eR ans 6 13 Commands and responses Communication CompovVVay F 6 14 Monitor value read Communication CompoWay F 6 14 Setting data read Communication CompovVVay F 6 15 Monitor value setting data compound read Communication CompoVVay F 6 16 Protect level setting data write 6 17 Setting data write Communication CompoVVay F 6 17 Setting data compound write Communication CompoWay F 6 18 Monitor value setting data compound read store write 6 19 Monitor value setting data compound read store check read 6 20 Monitor value setting data compound store read 6 20 XIII Write via COMMUNICATION 6 21 Control Run Control Stop a a 6 21 BNI CIA NOC uu RR 6 22 AT EXEC UO unan pu 6 23 Noe MU I TM 6 23 ida qe m 6 24 RAM data S
8. 3 Press the key to display the Proportional band used for control Use the AIM keys in this display to set the value to 0 00 4 Press the key repeatedly less than 1 second each time to return to RUN level Setting the hysteresis Setting Hysteresis heat to 2 00 in Adjustment level 1 Press the key less than 1 second to move from RUN level to Adjustment level e Ex gt _ 2 Bank No appears in Adjustment level 3 Press the tel key repeatedly to select Hysteresis heat 4 Use the AI keys to set the value to 2 00 5 Press the key repeatedly less than 1 second each time to return to RUN level 4 18 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings E AT Auto tuning Explanation of AT operation
9. To select and use a PID Set No select 1 to 8 and then specify one of PID Set No 1 to 8 for each bank Normally the initial setting 0 Auto selection is used To use this setting data see PID sets P 5 12 To check the bank number view the leading digit of the setting data e Set alarm values for alarms 1 to 4 according to the alarm type Alarms that have Alarm type set to 0 Alarm function OFF are not displayed e See 4 11 Using auxiliary output P 4 22 for the setting procedure To check the bank number view the leading digit of the setting data The procedures for setting the local SP and PID Set No in Bank No 2 and for running Bank No 2 are explained in the following Local SP PID Set No RUN level PV SP MV 1 Press the key repeatedly to move to Bank setting level Display 3 shows n7 2 Use the AIX keys to set Display bank selection to 2 5 2 Control functions Local SP 3 Press the key to select Local SP K m Ci 4 Use the A keys to set the value to 250 0 w EN y jue cx jue Dur _ da 1 yu U n 5 Press the key to select PID Set No 6 Use
10. key 1 second or more Control stops Input initial setting Control initial setting Control initial setting 5 Alarm setting gt Display adjustment gt m I level level 2 level 5 level R level ENS key Less FE key Less key Less key Less _ key Less level than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second key Less than 1 second LL Control in progress C Control stop Protocol selection CWF MOD U NO Communication unit no 0 99 BRS Communication speed 9 6 19 2 38 4 LEN Communication data length 7 8 SBIT Communication stop bit 1 2 PRTY Communication parity NONE EVEN ODD SDWT Transmission wait time 0 99 8 63 I Section 8 Setting data Communication protocol selection P5EL This setting is used to select the communication protocol Selections I are CompoWay F OMRON s unified protocol for general purpose serial communication or Modbus Modicon Inc s protocol based on RTU Mode of Modbus Protocol Specifications PI MBUS 300 Rev J A EM PYF CompoWay F Setting Communication Unit No Lima e After changing the communication unit No setting execute a software reset or turn the power off and on to make the change effective Setting range
11. Displaying Monitor Setting item To display Monitor Setting item press the function key in Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting Approximation setting or Monitor item level Press the key repeatedly to scroll from Monitor Setting item 1 to Monitor Setting item 5 After Monitor Setting item 5 the display changes to the first parameter in RUN level 7 Bu N d o RO EE Ww fii _ AS 11 Alarm upper limit2 1 Can set 12 Alarm lower limit Cast 8 R et f o REIH 77 1 f any of settings Monitor Setting item 1 through Monitor Setting item 5 are disabled those settings will not appear and the display will show the next enabled setting 5 22 5 4 Display and key adjustment functions f another key is pressed during display of Monitor Setting item the follovving vvill take place f the mode or level key is pressed the first parameter in RUN level will appear e f a function key set as a channel key is pressed the channel will change and the first parameter in RUN level of the new channel will appear e f the other function key is pressed and it is also set to Monitor Setting item the Monitor Setting item of that key will appear f the other function key is pressed and it is set to a function other than the above such as the key that function will activate
12. When a potentiometer is connected to a position proportional type Display 1 shows the PV and Display 2 shows the valve opening When a potentiometer is not connected to a position proportional type Display 2 shows l With potentiometer Without potentiometer Present value H H Present value Vake opening sx Valve opening cow 09 0 04 MANU lights up MANU lights up e n manual mode operation is performed manually and the MANU indicator lights up e Manual output method is used to select the MV that is used when entering manual mode The MV prior to entering manual mode can be held or the manual MV default value can be used e Switching between manual and auto mode is accomplished with the aw key or with Auto Manual in Operation level If either PF1 setting or PF2 setting is set to A M key Auto Manual will not appear in operation mode and only the key is used for switching e Switching between Auto and Manual with the w key To switch modes hold down the l key for at least one second in Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting Approximation setting Monitor item or Protect level e Switching between Auto and Manual with
13. AT runs and the displays show the following Display 1 Blinking display indi cating AT is running Display 2 Shows selected PID e When AT is run the most suitable PID constants for the current SP are automatically set This is accomplished by varying the MV to obtain the characteristics of the object of control limit cycle method e AT cannot be run during STOP or in manual mode e When running AT select to run AT for the PID set currently being used for control or select 1 to 8 as appropriate to run AT for a specific PID set The results of AT will be reflected in PID setting level in the Proportional band P Integral time 1 and Derivative time D of the PID Set No specified at the time AT was run AT begins when AT Execute Cancel is changed from OFF to 0 While AT is running AT Execute Cancel blinks in Display 1 Display 2 shows the PID Set No currently being used for control When AT ends AT Execute Cancel goes off and the display stops blinking To stop AT select 622 AT stop I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control AT run in progress r Present value PV SP Display 2 Limit cycle 4 20 If you attempt to move to RUN level and show PV SP while AT is runni
14. A 10 Setting list sbBumes uonisod julod euuroep pue d 1ndui Ag peuiuuejeq Q094 u ee slllul dS JEU HWI Jjeddn qS ejouJei o 11011 dS jui q ddn Guns dS o ium funes dS A 11 1 ui Be SWI dS 181 NON 7 t Z 010 ON yueg 01011 01 O OL JeuonJodoud uonisog 0 S0L 010 009 1e9U p epueis AIN Bupyoeu Ad enjeA 1ue6sejg Buunq dS 91ouJeiJ l dS 8907 Ul dS indui 40sues jo eDuei peyioedg Ad Se uoeo JO sen eA 1011uouJ um s eu ON ueg dS Ad 9nreA 1ueseJd e Aejdsiq Jo43u09 j euonjuodoud uonisod Guunp eA e AW dS Ad enjeA 1ueseaJg z e dsiq ON ueg dS Ad enieA 1ueseJg Aejdsiq uonoojes 4 Kej dsip dS Ad enjeA 1uesaJg Duisn poej qeue 51 ejdsip INH eui pue s ejdsip e v seu dS Ad enjeA 1uesaug INH Wo lqissod Ajuo si eGueuo o4juoo 6 uonisod uj z sBunes urod Ad MoJeq ejdsiq pue d 1ndui peuiuueieq L jenuelw olnv gt 2 d x do s unu o Joyuouu Buiuedo A BA P 2 1002 1031u0uJ AN 1 x Yar fq J LU al x px veu 1olluouu AN dS dwey JO UOW dS 91ouleH x dS 1 4 62 d m 3t uu V 0901 01 0
15. pee 2 Press the A key to switch to Fau Manual The MANU indicator lights up and the mode changes to manual To resume control follow the same procedure to switch back to Alita Auto The MANU indicator goes off and the mode changes to auto Switching between auto and manual is also possible by event input or communication For event input switching see 5 7 Using event input P 5 29 For communication switching see 5 9 Using com munication functions P 5 34 4 29 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 14 Changing channels E Changing channels e On multi point input type the channel number increases by 1 each time the key is pressed and the displayed channel changes Present value PV SP Display 2 accordingly e Only channels that are enabled with the Number of enabled CH E ua B channels setting can be displayed lt m m 00 lt w f the Number of enabled channels setting is set to 2 on a 4 point input type the display will switch through the channels as follows w m wy f
16. 4 Aemoduiog I A 1ueunsn pe ej dsiq A 24 Setting list S Jaye eujooeq sBun s 1ejeurejed uoreolunululo u seBueu 66 010 9000000 H 01 00000000 4 5 0110 eum pem uoissiusueJ 0011 9000 2 400 PPO 20000000 H 1 N3A3 U8 3 10000000 0 INON 90 00000000 Aed uomeoiunuuo 1 22 0000000 0 00000000 ae 114 0015 uopeojunwwog ms 1 8 L0000000 H 0 2 00000000 H ulBu l eyep uoneolunululoo I z v 8 20000000 H L 261 10000000 a p ds suorneolunululo2 NM 0 96 00000000 H uolo ON lun uogeoiunuu02 POLL 2000 66 01 0 9000000 H 01 00000000 H o 200 1000 L GOW Shnqpo L0000000 H 4IMO 0 AMO 00000000 UOUJUJO uonoejes jooojoud 0011 0000 q 1031u0uJ uoeolunululo Aq as senj eA senjeA JojuouJ sen eA 195 ui po1eolpul I A Dunes uoneolunuluo2 A 25 Appendix uoneJnBijuoo y JO WNWIXeW y si pue JepouJ y uo Buipuedep salen sjeuueuo pe qeue jo Jequunu eui JO Bumes jeu Ly 6666 0 6661 I A uoneJqi eo O AOIN 1 INVH epoui l WY 0 4 dnyoeg poul SIUM INVH p 0 1 Y0000000 H 91 L0000000 H SI UUBUO pejqeue jo JequinN ELE um s Jolluouu qq SE S Dum s JoWUOW ZJdH 9121 8000 um s Jolluouu Jd Se owes y Wea Bumes ZJd VECL 000 Buas
17. Press the kel key repeatedly to select ad Control mode Press the to select 5 Cascade standard control at least 1 second to return to RUN level PV SP MV key to set the SP to 180 0 Hold down the will appear Press the A Run AT in the secondary loop to obtain suitable PID values When the primary loop achieves stable control close to the SP set the secondary local SP to the secondary PV Set the SP mode of channel 2 to local SP mode cascade open and with the secondary loop in the independent control state run AT When AT finishes obtain the secondary PID values Set the control mode to cascade control and run AT on the primary loop to obtain the primary PID values Set the primary SP to local SP Set the SP mode of channel 2 to remote SP mode cascade control switch to cascade control and run AT When finished check the primary and secondary control states PVs and manually adjust the PID values Use the same adjustment method as 1 regular PID control After the power is turned on PV SP MV of the primary loop appears ch 1 Here we assume that cascade control is in progress using near SP of 180 0 C Press the cH key to select the secondary ch 2 PV SP MV The RSP operation indicator lights on to indicate that the system is in the cascade control cascade closed state Here we assume that the secondary PV is 230 0 C The secondary l
18. Local SP mode Remote SP mode SUB1 SUB2 SUB3 SUB4 Present value SUB1 SUB2 SUB3 SUB4 Present value Q r ri Z ev Yi 23nmm ev Eich Lt Li SP ich LL Monitor only cer cer 4 1214 MV monitor 4 h LLL MV monitor mcn ocr 4 Eu pul 24 GUT GUT OUTS OUT4 STOP ASP RSP goes off OOP OUT2 OUTS OUT STOP RP RSP lights up PF 2 CO Se A PFI PF2 CH CO CO SA A OVO oO ooo Ca m el ma A M A M ESAR EBAR When using a bank in local SP mode a link is created to the local SP of the selected bank For example if Bank 3 is selected the local SP of Bank 3 appears in Display 2 and vvhen the value is changed the value of Bank 3 local SP Bank setting level also changes 8 7 I Section 8 Setting data CH Remote SP monitor 8 8 e Setting 7 Monitor The decimal point position is determined by the selected sensor in the case of temperature input and by scaling in the case of analog input If Display digits after PV decimal point is set to OFF for temperature input digits following the decimal point are not shown Monitor range PV Appendix Sensor input setting ranges Indicator control ranges P A 4 ES Setting or monitor range Local SP SP lower limit to SP upper limit PV Remote SP Remote SP lower limit to remote SP upper limit Note that the SP limits are in effect At D
19. Present value PV SP MV Iu I zn vi al 3 20 The following explains how to configure the control mode straight line approximation 1 and 2 settings and the ratio setting It is assumed that the input 1 and input 2 type settings and the scaling setting have already been configured Ratio control is achieved by multiplying input 2 which serves as a reference by the proportion and using the result as remote SP Set the SP mode to remote SP Straight line approximation 1 First to make the units of input 2 match the units of input 1 input 2 is converted from normalized data to an industrial quantity using straight line approximation 1 Convert 0 000 1 000 to 5 000 Straight line approximation 1 input 1 0 000 Straight line approximation 1 input 2 1 000 Straight line approximation 1 output 1 0 000 Straight line approximation 1 output 2 5 000 This result is multiplied by the proportion Ratio setting AP1 0 05 Straight line approximation 2 is then used to convert this result from an industrial quantity to normalized data Straight line approximation 2 input 1 0 000 Straight line approximation 2 input 1 0 250 Straight line approximation 2 input 1 0 000 Straight line approximation 2 input 1 1 000 When the ratio setting AP1 is 0 05 and the measured value of input 2 is 240 0 kg s control of the dye takes place using an
20. 9 12 Output state at error 10 3 QUIDUL rto 4 14 8 42 Overlap band 3 8 8 15 Panel cutout dimensions 2 2 Part Names and Functions 1 4 PE XEev DOLECt a nni 5 25 Er SOUmINGS z E 5 21 PF1 monitor setting item 8 69 ET selind a aaa bai 8 68 PF2 monitor setting item 8 69 KEZ Selin aa Badi 8 68 PID set automatic selection data 8 74 PID set automatic selection hysteresis 8 74 PID set automatic selection 5 13 P D Se M ab aaa 5 10 8 27 PID Set No Automatic selection range upper limit 8 32 P ID StS Rm 1 2 5 12 PID setting level 8 30 A 15 Position proportional control 3 9 Position proportional dead band 3 12 8 17 Potentiometer input error 10 3 Potentiometer inputs terminals 2 14 Power supply terminals 2 11 Precautions when wiring 2 11 Proportional band 8 31 Pol beo Dota aunt dco bero 5 24 Protect KOV qe qa 1 6 Protect Vebo 8 3 A 10 Pulling the unit out 2 3 PV dead band 3 12 8 74 PV decimal p
21. unu Changing numeric values The numeric data and selections in each screen can be changed with the Y keys me t Ep D r PU ae Typical example quem object Temperature sensor Pt100 E5AR Q4B Input type O Pt100 200 0 to 850 0 C Control method PID control Control output Pulse voltage output Alarm 1 type 2 upper limit Alarm value 1 5 0 C a deviation is set Alarm 2 type 8 absolute value upper limit Alarm value 2 200 0 C PID Obtained by AT auto tuning Voltage output 12 V DC SP 150 0 C 4 5 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 1 Power on 2 Input specification setting 3 Control mode settin 4 Alarm type setting 4 6 Power on RUN level zu rn Control stops Lau input initial setting level Hold down for at least 3 seconds Display 3 will show Input initial setting level Input 1 type Z K 1 200 0 to 1300 0 C Input type is displayed I Input initial setting level Input 1 type amp 4 Pt100 1 200 0 to 850 0 C Change the input type with the AT key mp 1 Refer to in
22. 4 11 Selecting the control mode a a 4 12 Setting output parameters 4 13 COMUPO DETOG e rr 4 13 Direct operation cool Reverse operation heat 4 13 OUMU YPE dee 4 14 Quiput assighniignio rres A ober E 4 14 Setting and changing the SP 4 16 Setting and changing the SP 4 16 Performing ON OFF control aa Eo Gera aaa oan Rowan d 4 17 ON OFE Copire uuu un u r ai 4 17 SENGS ca ab aaa 4 18 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings 4 19 ATANMA 4 19 Manual Seting Suresi a 4 21 USING auxiliary OULDUL masini uwa Durus AD ada vaste 4 22 Auxiliary output assignment 5 4 22 hice RP 4 23 lara ER 4 24 Sehid r aa a aaa A uu 4 24 Starting and stopping control 4 26 Control run Control SIOD ses iioi a egeret een eu 4 26 SENGS e E as 4 27 Pertorming manual Conhlrol eigo u u aa be bea a elut 4 28 a a o s ERE EE EE n 4 28 Changing Channels D DT 4 30 Changing channels uuu 4 30 Operational considerations a 4 31 Section5 Functions and Operatio
23. 1 7 Run Rud L s 7 Auto Manual MV 1 sg Standard type Auxiliary output assignments Control mode Standard control Control Transfer output assignments OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 SUB1 SUB2 SUBS3 SUBA PV 1 Channel 1 PV LRSP 1 Channel 1 Channel 1 Alarm 1 RSP 1 Channel 1 Remote SP Local Remote SP mode Channel 1 Alarm 2 MVH 1 Channel 1 MV heating side BNKO 1 Channel 1 bank bit O Channel 1 Alarm 3 MVL 1 Channel 1 MV cooling side BNK1 1 Channel 1 bank bit 1 Channel 1 Alarm 4 VLVO 1 Channel 1 MV open side BNK2 1 Channel 1 bank bit 2 Channel 1 Input error VLVC 1 Channel 1 MV closed side RNRS 1 Channel 1 RUN STOP Channel 1 Remote SP input error MNAT 1 Channel 1 manual auto Multi point input types have the same setting data for channels 2 to 4 depending on the number of input points Cascade standard control Cascade heating cooling control position proportional control and ratio control are also available See Section 3 Typical Control Examples page 3 1 I Section 1 Overview B Main functions 1 8 Input 6 Event input assignment After selecting the temperature input TC thermocouple or PT resis tance temperature input sensor or analog input current input or voltage input vvith the input type svvitch select the input type in parameter setting If the input type SW is set to temperature input resistance temper ature input sensor or thermocou
24. C Control in progress C Control stop To move to Advanced function setting level set Initial setting level protect in Protect level to 0 and then enter the password 169 in Move to Advanced function setting level Input initial setting level Advanced function setting level INIT Parameter initialization FF OFF ON PF1 PF1 setting OFF RUN STOP R S ALLR 57 JALLS AT BANK A M PFDP E w w M a 4 4 PF2 PF2 setting OFF RUN STOP R S ALLR ALLS AT BANK A M PFDP KI co PF1 1 PF1 monitor Setting item 1 0 19 PF1 2 PF1 monitor Setting item 2 PF1 5 PF1 monitor Setting item 5 10 19 PF2 1 PF2 monitor Setting item 1 0 19 PF2 2 PF2 monitor Setting item 2 PF2 5 PF2 monitor Setting item 5 CH N Number of enabled channels AMM RAM write mode KUP RAM CMOV Move to calibration level 1999 9999 8 67 I Section 8 Setting data Setting initialization Operation PF1 setting PF2 setting 8 68 Tr uu Use this setting to return all settings to their default values N Initialize all settings OFF aFF Setting initialization reverts to OFF after the settings are initialized AR NE ea K t w e This setting is used to ass
25. al gt 4 4 a l ul mil als px px HO SA I 66 66 01 1070 40220000HH 01 L0000000 H HO siseJejs u wey 1 NO 10000000 H E 0 440 00000000 H HO Uoje wey L 1 eouenbes qpue s uy yiuij iewoj anjen synjosqy 80000000 01 eouenbes qpuejs uM ju ieddn anjer ainjosqy v0000000 H 6 Wee ywj 19m0 en eA einjosqy 60000000 8 were iuull d ddn enjeA einjosqv 80000000 H 2 eouenbes qpuejs uy uere 1 1 0000000 H 9 eouenbes qpuejs uy uere iuui reddr 90000000 H c eouenbes qpueis uy were juui Iewo pue Ieddf 50000000 H p ureje aue 11UU MO pue iaddN p0000000 H g were 1uull H MO7 0000000 H z were ywuj iaddN 20000000 1 were ywuj iomo pue 1eddf L0000000 H uueje oN 00000000H 31H HO adh wely 0040 0000 JO uonisod en eA sseuppy sseippv adh ejqeueA s sun fima meo mo s 5 Lsmapom GOluoul uoneoiunuuuJ09 q 195 senj eA eJe senjeA JOWUOW senj eA 195 ui pajeoipul Ha ULE V A 23 spuooeg b lqes p ueos Aejdsiq 0 66 0 0 9000000 H 01 00000000 H 1 NO 10000000 H 0 440 00000000 8 2X31 18 e um s 1409 uorsuedx3 80000000 H 2 Jav 1 1e e Dues uonounj peoueApy 0000000 9 7 Jang Bumes uomeoiunuuuo 90000000H S 4 1e e 1ueunsn pe ejdsiq 20000000 v 1 19 e Bue
26. juawuBisse y jndyno 101000 juawuBisse jndyno 101000 jueuiufiisse z jndyno JejsueJ 101000 jueuiufiisse jndyno JejsueJ 1010002 p solo 2 5 o g D D amp o m amp H dS yui Jeddn qS H 01009 euoiyodoid 0190 e 2 epou fonuoo UOWWOD OOO e gt gt LH adu 25252 ss Sopp lt lt lt lt eie 9 S 9 C C 005595 N N indui Doj euy e jueujuBisse ON e p yun einjejeduuo yun ejnjejeduuo c uun lun eunjejeduue 01 SL juawuBbisse ON yp edA 1ndu ad 1ndu z edA 1nduJ edA 1ndu 2011 senjeA indul Buijeog z 0 senjeA e dsip Buijeog Uonpuoo uni jou Jejeujejed payu uongeze eyep Dunes pexul Jo 1p lqo eyep Buas A 28 Setting list 1 T2 4 T9 6 T 8 9 10 Ti I2 13 14 When the set value of Control transfer output assignment is SP or ramp SP the set values are initialized to the SP upper and lower limits When the control mode is changed initialization takes place of added channels in the same way as the initialization of related parameters of Input type A on previous page Based on
27. 1101 ed 1ndui se 1ndu edi e 1ndu 1 4 10000000 H 0 2 00000000 syun z 1ndu adj 1ndui se 1ndu ed z 1ndu 1 4 1 0000000 0 Do 00000000 syun Indu en eA 19 syu 7 Jojoeje ss un julod jewiseq qnejeq qo 103100uJ uoneoiunuuuJoo Aq 195 sen eA senjeA Jolluouu sen eA 195 ui pajeorpul H 61 AOL 010 L000000 H 81 A S 01 0 2LO00000 H LE AS Ol L ELO00000H 91 vui OZ 01 0 01000000 H SL vu OZ Ol v 40000000 H 71 M 30000000 H L 4 40000000 H 21 3 00000000 LL H 80000000 H 0L N V0000000 H 6 N 60000000 H 8 1 80000000 H 4 3 0000000 9 1 90000000 S 80000000 H iz 0000000 H M 0000000 H 2 M 20000000 H 1 00 Hd L0000000 H 0 00114 00000000 1011u0u1J Bues ed A 1ndu a EZ sainquny eyep Dunes A ssesppy sseJppv adh e qeueA snqpoyy bum s jeu 1ndul A 17 jeddn 2 JBMO en eA ejdsip Suleos indui JOSUAS JO syw pue Jeddn 1eg indui SMOJ OJ Se pezi eniui aie s um s peDueuo si en eA ejdsip Buipeos 10 siiun eunjejeduue adA 3ndui v USUM L 1 38019 8so O Buneol i 0 1VO1 BuneojJ 10000000
28. onuo2 A 22 Setting list alt EA al T oc 1 a gt pue r alt 22 f Li rer 1 O N wueye u uedo uomgejoxe uoN 10000000 H Hel 0 O N ui 00000000 Dunioxe uou y jndino Aseyixny 1 O N uueje l uedo UO e I0X8 UON 10000000 H Hel 0 O N ui 9S0 9 00000000 Dunioxe uou jndino Aseyixny 1 O N uueje u uedo uomejoxe uoN 10000000 H nal 0 O N wege Ul asojo uoneioX3 00000000 Dunioxe uou z 1ndino Aieixny 1 O N Uuueje u uedo uonejoxe uoN 10000000 H Hel 0 O N wieyje Ul S0 9 UONHEN X 00000000 Dunioxe uou L jndino 1 g 10000000 0 v 00000000 eouenbes Aqpuels 66 66 01 1070 440270000 H 091 L0000000 H siseJejs u y uuelv 1 NO 10000000 H 0 440 00000000 yoye ULE V odA uueje se uies ed A r uue v 66 66 01 1070 40270000 H 01 L0000000 H siseJejs u e uuelv 1 NO 10000000 H 0 440 00000000 U9je Wel odA uueje se aures ed A e uue v U 66 66 01 L0 0 402Z0000 H 01 L0000000 H siseJejs u z uuelv 1 NO 10000000 H 0 440 00000000 yoye Z wey odA uueje se ed A Z uue v rm L E a y r at 2 2704 Li Lt 1 gt pue X Dx
29. 5 17 MV change rate limit cooling 8 19 MV change rate limit heating 8 19 MV change rate limit mode 8 78 MV display selection 8 60 NIV limit 5 16 8 31 MV monitor cooling 8 10 MV monitor heating 8 9 Non volatile memory error 10 3 Number of enabled channels 8 70 Obtaining input shift values 5 9 4 17 Open Close hysterisis 3 12 8 17 Operation adjustment protect 5 24 Operation at potentiometer error 8 79 Operation at potentiometer input error 3 12 Operation at povver ON 4 26 8 73 Operation at startup SP ramp 5 8 Operation commands Communication CompovVVay F 6 11 Operation commands Communication Modbus 7 14 Operation indicators 1 5 Operation level 8 5 A 11 Operational considerations 4 31 OUT operation indicator 1 5 OUT operation indicator 1 5 OUTS operation indicator 1 5 OUTA operation indicator 1 5 Output calibration
30. 8 5 Adjustment 2 level L Aide yum 42 yu Proportional control Analog parameter 1 This sets the proportion used for proportional control f Setting range Units Default value 1 1 999 10 9 999 1000 Setting 6 Related information Reference 9 5 Ratio control of dyeing machines P 3 18 6 Related setting data Control mode Control initial setting level P 8 43 8 25 I Section 8 Setting data 8 6 Bank setting level This level includes SP PID set and alarm settings for each bank To move to a bank use Display bank selection which appears at the beginning of Bank setting level Power on Bank setting level Operation level key less than 1 sec setting Adjustment _ key less eve than 1 second Approximation PID setting Adjustment 2 level pm key less L ac than 1 second key less than 1 second Bank setting level _ key less level key less level than 1 second L EEC than 1 second q m om m om m um m Gm Gm Gm wu m m um cm C Control in progress LSP Bank 7 LSP P lower limit SP upper limit 7 PID Bank 7 PID set number 10 8 7 AL 1 Ba
31. SP ramp rise value SP ramp time units SP before change Change point The rate of change during SP ramp is set in SP ramp rise value SP ramp fall value and SP ramp time unit The initial settings for SP ramp rise value and SP ramp fall value are 0 which means that SP ramp is disabled EU sec EU min or EU hour can be selected for SP ramp time unit The initial setting is EU min The ramp SP can be viewed using Set point during SP ramp When the power is turned on including operation startup the PV is regarded as the pre change SP SP ramp operation at startup depends on the relation between the PV and SP as follows When PV SP When PV SP SP gor famp sing SP PV Time Power on Power on 5 2 Control functions Limitations during AT starts at the SP during ramp SP ramp e The ramp SP at AT startup is held during AT e SP ramp is disabled when operation is stopped e The SP ramp control begins with SP start after recovery from a sensor error Control begins about 1 second after recovery from a Sensor error e When a sensor error occurs the goal SP takes effect and the alarm function operates with respect to the goal SP Default value 1 EU min 1 EU sec EU min or EU hour depending on the SP ramp time unit setting 2 The decimal point position depends on the input type Setting data Monitor and setting range SP ramp SP value monitor
32. c n RAMM RAM write mode up BKUP RAM co CMOV Move to calibration level 1999 9999 OUT 1 Control Transfer output 1 allocation Control Transfer output 4 allocation 0 32 EV 1 Event input 1 allocation EV 6 Event input 6 allocation r 2021 sl feet 1 Auxiliary output 1 allocation 0 36 Ewer a Auxiliary output 4 allocation 0 36 TRH 1 Transfer output 1 upper limit TRL1 Transfer output 1 lower limit 4 2 Transter output 2 upper limit TRL 2 Transfer output 2 lower limit TRH 3 Transfer output 3 upper limit TRL 3 Transfer output 3 lower limit less than 1 second p P ON Operation at power On 2 CONT STOP MANU Cant SPTR SP tracking OFF ON PIDI PID set automatic selection data PV DV ce IH PIDH PID set automatic n5n selection hysteresis 0 10 99 99 P DB PV dead band CJC 1 Input 1 Cold junction compensation OFF ON CJC 4 Input 4 Cold junction compensation OFF ON ALFA o 0 00 1 00 PVTR PV tracking OFF ON Manual output method HOLD INIT 1 Heating cooling control an MANI Manual MV initial value V Vs 5 0 105 0 standard type 1 ICH Jie CHT ORLM m n MV change rate limit
33. Press the key less than 1 second to move from RUN level to Adjustment level Press the ce key to select the secondary ch 2 BE AT Execute Cancel Press the A to change the set value to H and run AT During AT the automatically selected PID Set No is displayed and display 1 AE blinks Display 2 shows aFF when AT finishes and display 1 R stops blinking Press the e key to select the secondary ch 2 524 SP mode Press the Al key to select 5 Remote SP The RSP operation indicator will light up in remote SP mode to indicate cascade control cascade closed 3 4 Cascade control of reflow ovens 9 Press the cH key and then press the cel repeatedly to select At AT AT Execute Cancel Execute Cancel of the primary loop ch 1 Press the IA key to change the set value to and run primary AT During AT the automatically selected PID Set No is displayed and display 1 Fir blinks cu m When AT finishes display 2 changes to 622 and display 1 HE stops blinking jue EA 2 This completes PID adjustment for the primary and secondary loops Operation when a primary loop input error occurs When an input error occurs in the primary loop MV at error is output for the primary ch 1 MV and the secondary loop cont
34. poued 041402 590 010 En 2 m gt K Dx 1 66766 01 1070 40 20000 01 L0000000 H lt J 22 1002 siseJei1s H 476 0110 QU x Pu RC Du gt 1 1 gt gt mai ao kija 66 66 01 1070 H0420000 H 01 L0000000 H um kq LQ q X lt lt H 1eou sise1e1s H o 003 K K 07001 01 070 83600000 01 00000000 u Lt HO en eA 1 enue N SA 0070 i1 i x E o 2 cr LL K q Dx Dx 6666 01 66 61 40ZZ0000 H 01 LE844444 H al V HO pueq pesq NINI IN CON rey 0011 Du m ch mn Lk s i my Erin EN EIS m al 4 al r E L2 6666 91 1070 H0420000 H 01 L0000000 H i Ci t La mnt P mal Lu t HO yu l M o Huljoog 4S7 dS 90 gt 2 Lh al L dSH 0 dS 49 12907 al v gt Li R ui HO L Je001 e10Ueu epoui ds AAO Lt 0 NO 0 440 EX b c dn of 01110 UoneoliunuluJOO BIA 8 01 Appendix 1 4 0 HO eoueo einoex3 IV d 1ejoereuo senquy eyep umes Sseuppy sseuppy adi ajqeuen snapow J
35. EA p EA af S36 a Vd Ue w 2 Use the 1 4182 keys to set the SP to 150 0 SEED 9x m A Li 4 9 Performing ON OFF control l 4 9 Performing ON OFF control ON OFF control consists of setting an SP and then having the control output turn off when the temper ature reaches the SP during control When the control output turns off the temperature begins to fall and once it falls to a certain point the control output turns on again This action is repeated around a certain position ON OFF control requires setting Hysteresis heat to the temperature drop from the SP at which it is desired that the control output turn on The Direct reverse operation setting is used to determine whether the MV is increased or decreased with respect to an increase or decrease of the PV B ON OFF Control e On the E5AR ER switching between advanced PID control and ON OFF control is accomplished using the proportional band setting When the proportional band is set to 0 00 ON OFF control is performed and when it is set to any value except 0 00 advanced PID control is performed The initial setting is 10 00 Hysteresis In ON OFF control hysteresis is added when switching between ON and OFF to stabilize operation The width of hysteresis is called the Hysteresis The hyste
36. P iQ ru 4 ni al w v E 2er ur ty D XJ _ al 7 AOQE se AOQE se oues 2995 UoUIUO uoneooje e indino Ayeixny e40 eL00 1 NO 10000000 H p lqeu 0 440 00000000H y uonejedo jsul4 1 NO 10000000 H p lqeu JJO 0 440 00000000H 2 uone1edo 1s414 L NO 10000000 H p lqeu 34 dd 0 440 00000000H Z c uolle1 do 1sJl4 1 NO 10000000 H p lqeu 34 UD 449 0 4 40 00000000 uoneJedo JepJo 1s4tJ 1890 029 H ye Se owes 19 P S eueg yo ye Se eules Lx h HUI JOMO 1ndino J9JsueJ 1898 919 Ya je Se owes 9 1299 owes 43 1e se oues lh HAJ H ur r ddn p indino 19JsueJ aswam weneseoueg 146 124 fomo wun emol indo ssuen yae seawes jo e Se 19 PS auc H ye se oues Le DHF Huu r ddn e indino 19JsueJ yoyeseawes yale Se y se aues yo ye se owes Vs g indino JejsueJ yojeseeues ye SE owes yep seeues yo ye se ulES ls Huu r ddn z indino 19JsueJ ya se 909 Wa ye se owes yep seeues H l 1e se ulES ls HUUI JOMO 1ndino J9JsueJ yss h l ye Se owes ygseeu yaje se owes E 1 yndyno 1ejsuej v AOQE SE ulES AOQE SE R UOHTESO IE T jndino Kaeixn
37. gu Li X 3 4 Adjustment J At least 1 second Level CMVVT Write via communication OFF ON SPMD SP mode LSP RSP C SC Cooling coefficient 0 01 99 99 C DB Dead band 199 99 999 99 OF R Manual reset value 0 0 100 0 HYS Hysteresis heating 0 01 99 99 CHYS Hysteresis cooling 0 01 99 99 1 CP Control period heating 0 2 99 0 r C CP Control period cooling 0 2 99 0 DB Position proportional dead band 0 1 10 0 OC H Open close hysteresis 0 1 20 0 H SPRU SP ramp time unit EU sec S EU min M EU hour H 2 ath L jen x nm mn Li less than 1 second 421 SPRH SP ramp rise value 0 99999 0 Disable SP ramp function SPRL SP ramp fall value 0 99999 0 Disable SP ramp function MV S MV at stop 5 0 105 0 standard type 1 ir MV E MV at PV error 5 0 105 0 standard type 1 ORL MV change rate limit heating 0 0 100 0 CORL MV change rate limit cooling 0 00 100 0 ISI 1 Input value 1 for input correction 19999 99999 ISS 1 Input correction 1 199 99 999 99 ISI 2 Input value 2 for input correction 19999 99999 DOGN Disturbance gain 1 00 1 00 DOTC Disturbance time constant 0 01 99 99 DO B Disturbance rectification band 0 000
38. 1 5 SUBS operation indicator 1 5 SUBA operation indicator 1 5 Temperature units 4 11 8 37 Temporary A T execution judgement deviation 4 20 8 78 Thermocouple input calibration 9 5 Transfer output allocation 8 46 Transfer output lower limit 8 49 Transfer output upper limit 8 49 Transfer protocol Communication CompoWay F 6 2 Transfer protocol Communication Modbus 7 2 Transmission wait time 8 66 Travel time 3 12 8 52 Troubleshooting 10 1 Typical Control Examples 3 1 Unit performance specifications A 3 CJR FAUNOS umutu MUN ays A 2 LD M 1 6 User calibration 9 1 9 4 User calibration completion information 9 3 Using auxiliary output 4 22 Using transfer output 5 32 Valve opening monitor 8 10 Variable areas 6 7 Write mode 6 24 7 24 VVrite setting data Communication Modbus 7 19 VVrite via communication SER 5 35 6 21 7
39. B LT C Pt V Thermocouple Temperature Voltage Current resistance input sensor E5AR IN2 n TC Pt Thermocouple Temperature resistance input sensor To prevent the appearance of error displays due to unused inputs set the Number of enabled channels 6 Control outputs On the E5AR control output 1 OUT1 outputs to terminals F5 to F6 Transfer outputs and control output 2 OUT2 outputs to terminals F3 to F4 terminals e On the E5ER control output 1 OUT1 outputs to terminals C5 to C6 and control output 2 OUT2 outputs to terminals C3 to C4 e On a multi point input type output takes place from control output 3 OUT3 and control output 4 OUT4 E5AR Pulse voltage output Linear current output o bd V e Ko 57 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 oum oura ee Lo 16 n mn LIN BU ar s GND E5ER Pulse nl output Linear current output V 25 57 on 57 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 4 Sir e f terminals and are used for pulse voltage output approxi mately 2 V are output when the power is turned on Load resis tance 10 kQ max for 10 msec e n the case of linear current output approximately 2 mA are output for 1 second when the power is turned on 2 2 How to Use the Terminals e Control outputs that are not used for control can be used for transfer output with the control output transfer output assignment setting e Specifications for ea
40. Note When the input type of remote SP input is set to temperature input be sure to set the input type of the main input to the same setting as the input type of remote SP input If the input type of remote SP input is set to temperature input and the upper and lower limits of remote SP are not the same as the upper and lower limits of the sensor setting range of the input type of remote SP input it will not be possible to obtain a correct remote SP value cH PV decimal point display Poudre Temperature input This setting can be used to not show the digits of the PV after the decimal point e When PV decimal point display is turned OFF the digits of the PV after the decimal point are not shown When turned ON the digits after the decimal point are shown according to the input type setting Related data M Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 8 39 I Section 8 Setting data Sensor induction noise reduction Dal This function reduces induction noise from the power source in the input e This reduces induction noise in the input according to the frequency of the power source e Select 50 Hz or 60 Hz as appropriate for the power source used for the controller Setting 6 Related data ES Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 Move to advanced function setting level A Adu Initial setting protect is set to O This function is used to move to
41. gt E53 ARQC E5AR A4W 500 mx NO OUTA P pike 2 Voltage output nput23 0 e 12V 40 mA 2d ty PT TC OUT3 bi 27 0 Voltage output 12 V CE m 40 mA or uM i 5 Current output nput 1 4 4 20 mA DC 500 max CMM PT K 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Curent opo ean Switch using output type setting Resistance thermometer V 4 2 6 2 2 How to Use the Terminals E5AR CC43DWW FLK 4 loop Control E5AR QQ43DVVVV FLK 4 loop Control N N f ESAR A4W 500 ESAR A4WW 500 EBAR A4VVVV 500 E5AR A4WW 500 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC Auxiliary outputs 100 240 VAC Auxiliary outputs o Relay outputs Relay outputs x e COM N A BICI Input power supply depends SUB1 m 1272 SUB1 on the model 100 to 240 VAC x SUB2 2r SUB2 or 24 VAC DC no polarity COM 3 COM 4 oe SUB3 E53 ARQC3 D E SUB3 E53 ARCC3 lt G B o o Yo SUB4 B 6 s SUB4 RS 485 E REIS mre ouT2 E53 ARB4 E UT2 SOE 1 A E53 ARB4 Current output Event inputs G Event inputs 420 mA DC 500 0 TO D otage
42. o o c c 1 o 02 10 7 i Section 10 Troubleshooting 10 6 Inferring causes from conditions communication problems 6 Cannot communicate No response The communications speed differs from the host Make sure that the communications speeds are system the same The communication conditions are different from Make sure that the communication conditions are the host system the same Communication conditions The number of parallel connections exceeds the Do not exceed the rating rating For RS 485 a maximum of 31 units can be connected The length of the communication path exceeds the 1 Do not exceed the rating rating For RS 485 the total maximum length is 500 m Another unit has the same unit number Make sure there are no duplicate unit numbers Noise is corrupting the communication data Separate the communication cable from the noise source Use shielded communication cable e Use an optical interface Have the program resend the command when a problem is detected in the response Connections Incorrect use of communication devices Verify the method of use in the literature for each Optical interface device e 232C 485 converter Incorrect installation of RS 485 terminators Install terminators only on the devices on the ends of the communication path Communication begins as soon as the power of the Wait at least 2 seconds before beginning E5AR ER is turned on c
43. output allocation For the multi point input type assignment data can be set for channels 2 and higher as needed for the number of channels Control transfer output allocation Channel 1 Channel 1 control output heat Channel 1 control output cool heat Channel 1 SP Channel 1 ramp SP Channel 1 present value Channel 1 control output heat Channel 1 control output cool Channel 1 valve opening Channel 2 control output heat Channel 2 control output cool Channel 3 control output heat Channel 4 control output heat When used for control output assignments are made automatically based on the control mode setting as explained on the previous page No changes are necessary 1 3 Input output Configuration and Main Functions When used for transfer output type assign the data to be transferred to an unused output For outputs supporting multi output specify pulse voltage output or linear current output according to the multi output output type For linear current output O to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA can be selected Pulse voltage output is 12 V DC 40 mA Multi output output type tput t Pulse voltage output Linear output output type Linear current output 0 20m 4 20 mA 6 Auxiliary output Use this setting to assign what type of data is output from each assignments auxiliary output For the multi point input type assignment data can be set for channels 2 and higher as needed fo
44. Display scan only applies to channels that are enabled using Number of enabled channels Display scan can be started automatically after the power is turned on or by pressing the key To have display scan start automatically after the power is turned on set Start display scan after power on to ON e The display scan period is set with Display scan period When the period is set to O display scan is disabled n Setting data Setting period Units Default value m 0 to 99 0 Disable display scan Setting Start display scan Disable after power on n Enable 8 62 8 14 Communication setting level 5 5 8 14 Communication setting level 5 5 This level contains initial settings for communication such as protocol selection communication unit No and communication speed Operation level Adjustment Adjustment 21 Bank setting gt PID setting u 7 J key Less level key Less level key Less level key Less level key Less level L LET than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second key Less than 1 second m m m im m om om om ou im om onu m om om m om om im im om om im om om im im om im om im m m om mu m om om mu m mu im m m om m om om mu mu om m om om im m om im om om mu im om mu im mu om mu mu im om
45. Heating Cooling 105 0 to 105 0 00 A negative value is set for the cooling MV for heating cooling control e Position proportional control type Control method Setting range Units Default value Position 1 Completely closed 0 0 Hold proportional Hold 1 Completely open ma 8 4 Adjustment level L Ad Related information 4 12 Starting and stopping control P 4 26 CH BRE EN MV change rate limit heating amp rL MV change rate limit cooling bark Advanced PID control Proportional band z 0 00 e The MV change rate limit sets the maximum allowed change in the MV or the opening on a position proportional control type per second If a change occurs in the MV that exceeds this limit the MV will be changed at the set rate limit until the required change is attained When set to 0 0 the function is disabled e For standard control use MV change rate limit heating MV change rate limit cooling cannot be used e For heating cooling control the MV change rate limit can be set separately for heating and cooling Use MV change rate limit heat for heating and MV change rate limit cooling for cooling The MV change rate limit cannot be used in the following situations e Manual mode e AT is running e During ON OFF control
46. J f heating 0 2 99 0 C CP Control period cooling 0 2 99 0 DB Position proportional dead band Open close hysteresis 0 1 20 0 SPRU SP ramp time unit EU s ec S EU min M EU hour H SPRH SP ramp rise value 0 99999 0 Disable SP ramp function SPRL SP ramp fall value 0 99999 0 Disable SP ramp function MV S MV at stop 5 0 105 0 standard type 1 MV E MV at PV error 5 0 105 0 standard type 1 ORL MV change rate limit heating 0 0 100 0 CORL MV change rate limit cooling 0 0 100 0 ISI 1 Input value 1 for input correction 19999 99999 ISS 1 Input correction 1 199 99 999 99 ISI 2 Input value 2 for input correction 19999 99999 ISS 2 Input correction 2 199 99 999 99 DOGN Disturbance gain 1 00 1 00 DOTC Disturbance time constant 0 01 99 99 DO B Disturbance rectification band 0 000 9 999 DOJW Disturbance judgement width 575775 1 Position proportional type Completely open Hold Completely closed 1 0 1 CH Bank No Operation D CH AT Execute Cancel ma 8 4 Adjustment level L Ad r ww e This setting is used to specify a bank one of Bank N
47. Manual for Manual mode When Manual mode is selected the MANU indicator lights up This setting does not appear if either PF1 setting or PF2 setting is set to Auto Manual PF1 setting is initially set to Auto Manual to enable use of the w key and thus the setting does not appear Related information 4 13 Performing manual control P 4 28 6 Related setting data PF1 setting PF2 setting Advanced setting level P 8 68 Section 8 Setting data 8 4 Adjustment level 21 22 This level contains settings for the purpose of adjusting control such as change bank No AT Auto tuning enable disable write via communication hysteresis adjustment input shift settings and SP ramp settings Power on key less than 1 sec q m m m m m m m m Gm Gm Gm Gm mom Om than 1 second key less Adjustment _ key less key less than 1 second ws m um cm m m m 8 12 CJ Control in progress Adjustment level ST BAIA enne Bank No 0 7 SC Cooling coefficient 01 99 99 C DB Dead band 199 99 999 99 OF R Manual reset value 0 0 100 0 HYS Hysteresis heating 0 01 99 99 cooling 0 01 99 99 z CP Control period
48. This level includes setting initialization PF key and number of enabled channels settings Povver on Operation level key less than 1 second key key 1 second 3 seconds ormore ormore Control stops m m m m m m m m m om level level us 1 second or more Advanced function L of key Less Password input set value 65 169 Expansion control setting key Less level than 1 second setting level nd L key Less EN than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second 2 level key Less level key Less level key less than 1 second Adjustment 21 i Bank setting PID setting key Less evel key Less level keyLess level Prg than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second Input initial setting Control initial setting gt Control initial setting gt Alarm setting gt Display adjustment key Less Approximation setting key Less level 1 EET eee eee eee eee eee mom om mmm mm mm mm mm mmm mmm mm mmm m mmm mm mmm m mm m m m m mm mm m im im m m m m m m m m m im m mom om mm m m A 5 Communication setting level 5
49. dodge 9 5 Connections 2 4 Constant at disturbance 5 14 8 21 Control Transfer output allOCaltlODi uide ttm Pte ires ies 1 10 8 46 Control initial setting level 8 41 A 18 Control initial setting 2 level 8 45 A 19 Control mode 4 12 8 43 Control outputs Transfer outputs adat 2 12 Control period 4 13 Control period cooling 8 16 Control period heating 8 16 Cooling coefficient 3 8 8 15 Dead band 3 8 8 15 Decimal point position 8 37 Derivative time 8 31 DIMENSIONS ss AA 2 2 Direct operation 4 13 Direct operation cooling 1 9 Bie au b n 1 5 BIO A aya olasan 1 5 D SD Q e 1 5 4 3 Display adjustment level 8 59 A 24 Display auto return time 8 61 Display PID selection 8 30 Display refresh period 8 61 DISDIAY SCAN pete T 5 19 Display scan period 8 62 Disturbance gain 5 14 8 21 Disturbance judgment width 8 2
50. ri CMW MANU LN A cH 2 seconds or more Present value PV SP Display 2 Present value PV SP Display 2 Display scan Operation I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I j gt HEHHEHEEHEHEHHEEH m EM EM EN a 1 I I 1 1 I R 1 l n Display automatically changes to next channel 1 l when the period in Display scan period elapses p l m mx m m mmm mmm m m m m ma mat m um nim m m w w w f s m OO OO o m mar a mam w l 2 s cH Stop using key Stop display scan 1 second or more Present value PV SP Display 1 Normal operation Channel indication is not updated when display scan stops in above example display remains at channel 2 5 20 5 4 Display and key adjustment functions M PF settings function keys PF1 setting The and serve as function keys and the functions of these keys can be selected ww lt ww 14 Note that on a multi point input type the key functions as a key and thus it cannot be used as a f
51. 0 0 i Temperature is low Temperature is high Temperature is low Temperature is high Set value in general Set value in general Direct action Reverse action For example when the present value PV is less than the set point SP during heating control the manipulated valuable MV is increased in proportion to the difference between the PV and SP As such heating control is reverse operation Cooling control which does the opposite is direct operation Set Direct reverse operation to a 7 Reverse operation or ar d Direct operation The initial setting is Reverse operation heat e When each channel is used independently for control set the direct reverse operation separately for each channel I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control E Output type Output Output type M Output assignment Multi output is available on the E5AR ER which allows selection of pulse voltage output or linear current output Select the output type in Output Output type The E5AR QLIL ILL output 1 of the EBER QL IL IL and outputs 1 and 3 of the EBAR QQ 11 are multi outputs Linear current output can be set to 4 to 20 mA or O to 20 mA in Linear current output Output type
52. 00000000 Suneol p solo 9200 1 q HO uonoe 0010 0 H HO uonoe esjo eH 10000000 00000000 H uoneiedo ZG0 Buiooo Buneay epeose5 S pyepueis epeose2 y Buiooo Duneeu dS eioueH c pyepueis qS 0 1 Iooone H 0 p1epueis L 10094299H prepueis ed A 1ndur p 90000000 H 60000000 p0000000 H 0000000 H 60000000 H 10000000 00000000 edi 1ndur z 10000000 00000000 d i 1ndur L Bojeue 14 Jjeddn gS 0 enjeA Jamo Indu jo 1lu pAinb ed Indu enjeA ejdsip pue 66661 3184444 iH 10 196127 o Buipio55v yo ye se ywli JAMO qS 0 1ndul Jo 1 li 1900 MUU dS Boyeue r ddn indul jo jusjeainbs anjena e dsip 10 66666 10 Jesse 4698 L000 H 01 Y ll Jamo Dues dS d 1ndui o Buipio55v i H ye se oues yw j Jeddn eBueij indui o ywi samoj BUAS qS juu Jjeddn qS L vui Oz 0 L0000000 H o vu oz 010 00000000 ed p 1ndino 1 jeaur 1 vu oc 01 t o vw 010 10000000 00000000 H ad 1ndino jue uno Je ur 1 vu oc 10000000 Appendix o 0 vw OZ 01 0 00000000 H ed z 1ndino jueuno Jeau L vui Oz 0 L0000000
53. Display 3 operates as follows during Monitor Setting item e f PV SP Bank No is displayed Display 3 shows the bank number e f PV SP MV is displayed Display 3 becomes a monitor that shows the MV n cases other than the above the display goes off Other display and key adjustment functions Other display and key adjustment functions are available These functions are explained in Section 8 Setting data PV SP display screen selection Display adjustment level e Bar graph display item E5AR only Display adjustment level Display auto reset Display adjustment level Display refresh period Display adjustment level e Monitor item level setting Display adjustment level Display digits after PV decimal point Initial setting level 5 23 I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 5 Protecting settings M Protect Operation adjustment protect RUN adjustment protect 20 mr u Initial setting protect Initial setting protect 5 24 The protect function is used to restrict access to settings in order to prevent accidental changes to the settings Protect functions include Operation adjustment protect Initial setting protect Setting change protect and PF key protect This function restricts key operation in Operation Adjustment Adj
54. IN1 IN2 Remote SP IN1 IN2 Remote SP Heating cooling control with remote SP Cascade standard control IN1 Primary loop IN2 Secondary loop OUT1 Channel 2 control output heating side OUT1 Channel 2 control output heating side OUT2 Channel 2 control output cooling side Channel 1 control output open OUT1 Cannot be changed OUT2 Channel 1 control output close Cannot be changed Cascade heating cooling control IN1 Primary loop IN2 Secondary loop Position proportional control IN1 Ratio control IN2 Ratio setting OUT1 1 Channel 1 control output heating side VA 4 15 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 8 Setting and changing the SP ll Setting and changing the SP e When Operation adjustment protect is set to 4 and Setting change protect is set to ON the SP cannot be changed For more information see 5 5 Protecting settings P 5 24 To change the SP press the keys in PV SP RUN level to select the desired value The new setting becomes effective 2 seconds after the change e The bank function can be used to switch through as many as eight SPs For more information see 5 2 Control functions Bl Banks P 5 9 Changing the SP from a temperature of 0 0 C to 150 0 C um m lt a 1 The display normally shows PV SP The SP is 0 0 C NES r Ep r
55. If you wish to use a position proportional control type to monitor the amount of valve opening or perform closed control connect a poten tiometer PMTR as shown in the following E5AR E5ER For information on the potentiometer see the manual for the valve you are connecting Terminal number meanings are as follows O OPEN W WIPE C CLOSE The input range is 100 Q to 2 5 kQ Between C to O 2 2 How to Use the Terminals Event inputs To use event input on the E5AR connect event inputs 1 and 2 EV1 terminals and EV2 to terminals K1 to K3 and event inputs 3 to 6 EV3 to EV6 to terminals numbers E2 to E6 The number of event input points varies depending on the model E5AR 9 D LE 1 To use event input on the E5ER connect event inputs 1 and 2 EV1 and EV2 to terminals E2 to E3 and event inputs 3 to 6 EV3 to EV6 to terminals numbers B2 to B6 The number of event input points varies depending on the model I Section 2 Preparations e The number of input points of each model is as follows E5AR ILILIB EBER LILIL IB 2 points EV1 and EV2 E5AR ILIDL EBER L IL ID 4 points EV3 to EV6 E5AR LILIDB 6 points EV1 to EV6 E5AR Using contact Using non contact input input Using contact input Using non contact input Using contact input Using contact input e Input ratings of each input are as follows EV3 EV4 EV4 EV5 EV5 EV6 EV6 Using non co
56. JOWUOW dd se eures uiey D m s JoWUOW ZJd cici 6000 Bunjes Jolluouu qq Se c wey Jo3uou 2 4 0121 8000 L Dumes Jd SE ulES Well Pues AOWUOW 2 4 Pues 301UOUl Jd SE ulES G UJ9l Pues AOWUOW Jd L Dumes AOWUOW Jd SE BWeS p ual Hues JOJUOUJ Jd L Dumes Jd S Well Dunes AOWUOW Jd L Dunes Jd S ulES g Well Dumes AOWUOW Jd 61 lq ssod s um s syueq L000000 H 81 lq ssod si Dunes yu jeddn uue v z L000000 H 4 1 lq ssod 51 Dum s y uui jeddn wely L000000H 91 eiqissod si Bunjes uure v 0L000000H G4 lq ssod si Bumes yw jeddn ullely 40000000 H P1 eiqissod si m s uui jeddn uue v 30000000 H 1 eiqissod si Dum s uue v q0000000 H c1 lqissod si m s z uui jeddn uue v 20000000 H 11 lq ssod si Dunes z yuu jeddn uure v go000000 H 01 eiqissod si um s z uue v v0000000 H 6 lqissod si um s pwu jeddn uue v 60000000 H 8 lqissod si um s 110 jeddn uue v 80000000 H 2 lq ssod si um s uue v 0000000H 9 eiqissod s Bumes q eum jenuejejiq 90000000 H g eiqissod s Bumes eum je46e1u 50000000 H r lqissod si um s q pueq jeuoni0doJd 70000000 H g Ajuo 1O 1UOVN uollelASq Ad 80000000 H z as lq ssod si Bullies AW dS Ad 20000000 H 1 dS lq ssod s um s xueg dS Ad L0000000 H B 91 B peigesia 000
57. The control output heating type and or control output cooling type is off when the corresponding output is pulse voltage output A 9 Appendix 1 NO 10000000 H JJO 0 440 00000000 yoa oid y Jd 1 NO 10000000 H 440 0 440 00000000 yoajoid aBueyo Bues 0 z 0 0 20000000 01 00000000 o old Dumes jelu 0 t 0 0 v0000000 H 01 00000000 19e104d 1ueunsn py uonejedo uonisod en eA sseJppy sseJppy edA ejqeueA aolluouu uoneorunuuuJO9 Aq as senjeA ae sen eA JojuouJ sen eA 195 Ul pa1eorpul H 19910Jd sBunes uonisod 1uiod euui59p pue ed 1ndui Ag peuiuuejeq bulyoe Ad BUNG OOO ui 911011 dS 181 SION Wu jeddn YS e1ouJai ywl dS 910UleH epoui YS U yu jJeddn Bumes dS 01 ywl Dues dS epoui ds e901U Z c 1 40 2LOOO00 Lx uonoes snolA 1d o snjeis 8 01 1 80000000 H 01 L0000000 H JOWUOW ON 195 Aid Z 01 0 0000000 01 00000000 H JOWUOW ON yueg ed indul o Bulpsoo0V7 dS ed indui o eDuei indui p o ds o Sulpioooy Ad enj eA 1uesaJg 344 01 000 ed A p lpoly vo d 7 du uoluoul Bues Jayoereyy seinquiv eyep puas LE pu r urod euiroeq jnejeq snqpoN 4 Kemodwoy JOHUOW uoneoiunuuuJO0o Aq 195 SEN eA senjeA JOWUOW senj eA 195 Ul pajeoipul Ha v JOMUUOW 21
58. key to change the value to 10 0 4 25 i Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 12 Starting and stopping control E Control run Control stop To start control set Run Stop to Run To stop control set Run Stop to Stop MV at sto f you wish to output during stop in standard control set an MV of p 5 0 to 105 0 in MV at stop The initial setting is 0 0 In heating cooling control set to 105 0 to 105 0 e n position proportional control Open Closed or Hold state can be selected in MV at stop In the Open state only the open output is ON in the Closed state only the closed output is ON and in the Hold state both open and closed outputs are OFF The initial setting is Hold 6 Operation at power This selects the operation state when the power of the E5AR ER is ON turned on The following 3 selections are available Resumes the state of the system before the power Continue was turned off Control is stopped when the power is turned on Enters manual mode when the power is turned on e Setting values for operation at power ON and additional items are shown below Operation after Additional items power ON Continue Run Stop Hold Auto Manual Hold MV From initial MV in auto mode Hold in manual mode Stop Run Stop Stop Auto Manual Hold MV Hold if in manual mode before power off MV at stop if in auto mode before power off Manual mode Run Stop Hold Auto Ma
59. lb si F 3 5 xn that can be selected vary depending on the number Control Transfer output assignment 1 Channel 1 control output heating side OUT2 Channel 2 control output heating side ERA Channel 3 control output heating side IN OUT4 Channel 4 control output heating side a Channel 1 control output heating side Channel 1 control output cooling side E Channel 2 control output 4 input type 1 es S s o heating side cooling side Standard control IN1 eee IN2 Remote SP E OUT1 1 Channel 1 control output heating side IN1 IN2 Remote SP Heating cooling control with remote SP Ratio control Cascade standard control Channel 1 control output heating side OUT1 2 Channel 1 control output cooling side b OUT1 Channel 1 control output heating side IN2 Ratio setting P 9 IN1 Primary loop IN2 Secondary loop 1 Channel 2 control output heating side Cascade heating IN1 Primary loop OUT1 cooling control IN2 Secondary loop OUT2 Direct Reverse operation Direct operation cooling Heverse operation heating Channel 1 control output heating side Channel 1 control output cooling side Description Control whereby the MV is increased as the present value increases When the present value PV is higher than the set point SP the MV is
60. o o o oI o of o o El Z Z ol lt o o 3 D o l 5 S ol S eli 2 Ol o sl l s 2 s 9 s 5 x gt s fis gt 5 olo 21 ol o oO T c C 2 alo 9 SI of o ol S h l O Oo x 2 olo mr n ujj SIA OIO lt I I I I vrac A 8 Setting list A 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 17 15 Bit position m e m fe ll m a Dwwem os T 25 m L T heat side type output output Control output Pulse voltage inear current a m a o i i J i ap i mi x i i i ox mm q i o m a s Kas rrr As follows when read in setting area 1 e RSP input error Clear e Potentiometer error Clear e Display range exceeded Clear e Input error Clear e Control output heating control output cooling Clear e Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Clear Clear Run Stop ON stop e Auto Manual Hold previous value e SP mode MV tracking Update e Control output heating control output cooling Update Control output heating and control output cooling are respectively open output and close output during position proportional control Control output heating and control output cooling are normally OFF during linear output
61. 0 0 to 900 0 100 0 to 1500 0 0 0 to 750 0 300 0 to 700 0 7 0 0 to 1100 0 100 0 to 1500 0 300 0 to 700 0 10 300 0 to 2300 0 11 0 0 to 3000 0 180 00 to 180 00 249 99 to 350 00 350 0 to 1450 0 2 0 to 552 0 195 0 to 945 0 62 0 to 442 0 260 0 to 460 0 60 0 to 660 0 195 0 to 945 0 260 0 to 460 0 350 0 to 1450 0 170 0 to 1870 0 170 0 to 1870 0 560 0 to 2560 0 90 0 to 990 0 260 0 to 1660 0 5 0 to 825 0 400 0 to 800 0 110 0 to 1210 0 260 0 to 1660 0 400 0 to 800 0 560 0 to 2560 0 300 0 to 3300 0 300 0 to 3300 0 0 0 to 1700 0 0 0 to 3000 0 3 100 0 to 1800 0 300 0 to 3200 0 70 0 to 1970 0 10 0 to 3490 0 14 0 0 to 2300 0 0 0 to 4100 0 230 0 to 2530 0 410 0 to 4510 0 4 to 20 mA One of following ranges depending on 10 to 110 of setting range 0 to 20 mA scaling Maximum range 19999 to 99999 Analog 1to5V 19999 to 99999 input 0to5V 1999 9 to 9999 9 Oto 10 V 199 99 to 999 99 19 999 to 99 999 1 9999 to 9 9999 e Applicable input type standards are as follows K J T E N R S B JIS C1602 1995 Thermocou ple O1 N cO L Fe CuNi DIN43710 1985 U Cu CuNi DIN43710 1985 W W5Re W26Re ASTM E988 1990 Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 ICE751 A 4 ASCII Codes ASCII Codes ae i sls e ajej e s e emisi o e s elm vir v r elmi ir sisli e Kua X k EM 07 ir ir n K BBel li 1 isel l 1 BBeiliei 1 isvl
62. 10 2 10 2 Error mes Sade cord cr b pleine ba dus EP abut ubi EU UE 10 3 10 3 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal measured values 10 4 10 4 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal control 10 5 10 5 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal output 10 7 10 6 Inferring causes from conditions communication problems r 10 8 Appendix DECilicalion quc io D uuu aus a eR op aa Lu A 2 li MEN PT MM cr cer E A 2 Unit performance specifications A 3 Sensor input setting ranges Indicator control ranges A 4 PCOS tha ii r A 5 SENOS E ue a a a aa nala a A 6 Initialization due to setting changes A 28 wiegen A 30 Index XV Section 1 Overview 1 1 Main Features of the E5AHZ ER 1 2 1 2 Part Names and Functions 1 4 1 3 Input output Configuration and Main Functions 1 7 i Section 1 Overview 1 1 Main Features of the EBAR ER The E5AR ER is an advanced controller that features high speed and high precision control The E5AR ER has the following features B inputs High speed sampling High accuracy hi
63. 2 10 Thermocouple E5ER CT3DVV FLK 2 loop Control E5ER AW 500 9219 Input power supply depends on the model 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC E53 ARCC3 OUT2 Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 O max 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Suvitch using output pe setting OUT1 Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max E53 ART2 Switch using output type setting Auxiliary outputs Transistor outputs dir R E53 ARB4 ul Event inputs EV3 i EV4 i EV5 EV6 COM ee eJeelo ESER AVV 500 T 1 pt o Input 2 L qae 1 l fV PT i o vV I Current Voltage r 1 Resistance thermometer Thermocouple E5ER PRQ43F FLK E5ER PAF 500 SM t SM uo Input power supply depends on the model 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity E53 ARQC OUT4 Voltage output 12V 40mA OUT3 Voltage output 12V 40 mA or Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch using output type setting E5ER PAF 500 Potentiometer
64. 5 24 geile ce EE HN 5 24 Alarm adjustment functions 5 26 SIR ISI D I UE 5 26 Standby sequence M 5 26 Alarm ac s m Sousa 5 27 Close in alarm Open in alarm 5 27 GE TUR 5 29 Eventbinpubalocalon uuuus ul 5 29 USING transie OUIDUE 23552 uuu u um uu 5 32 Transfer output settings 5 32 Using communication functions 5 34 Setting communication parameters 5 34 Write via communication 5 35 Section6 Communication CompoWay F 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 COMMUNICATION MEINGA 5 2 m o x 6 2 CompoWay F communication protocol 6 2 Communication specifications 6 2 Transfer protocol Communication CompoWay F 6 2 Frames Communication CompovVVay F 6 4 Command Tane dl 6 4 Response fame NO Tapasqa a OST 6 5 gi sr intl xy PEE 6 6 Variable S P S 6 7 Reading the variable area
65. 66666 01 66661 4698L000 H 1318 4 DIO C ET ILE Z t i e d HUI ULE V 0 ueg ed indul o Duipioooy 66666 01 6666 I 16981000 H 01 13 94444 H d o ulpio2oy 66666 01 6666 1 16981000 H 01 L3I82JJJ H 66666 01 6666 1 16981000 H 01 131 8 1 Jeddn Bumes dS oi 141 12m0 Hues qS L uuu 1eddn uuv 0 yueg ULE V 0 yueg 8010 v000 LU 4 EZ 01501 01 070 VLPOO000 H 00000000 H 4 0 901 01 070 VLEOOO00 H 00000000 1000 6 01901 01 0 S VLEOO000 H 01 39444444 H pJepuels 2 am anl Jeddn Bumes dS oi jui 12m0 Humes qS uonoes O JOJOY E ed indul o Buipioooy eDuui indui 45 o Sulpioooy uonisod en eA 1031u0uJ uoneorunuJuidoo Aq 195 senj eA senjeA JojuouJ SONJA 195 Ul pa1eolpul H smeis 2000 1000 1 0000 0000 02 snqpow j ewoduioo LD 01 02 mme Jopuow uomneoiunuJuJo2 Lx dS 1002 JOWUOW AN E u 1olluouu AN dS A 7 Appendix Status E5L R Communication CompoWay F Free Error Output 0 Bit position olo o o siri ri 2 2 2 225 olololo O O olololo OlOT OTO olo o o D M M M 5 5 5 5L li ulula 818 8 NEM x u uiu LL olo o o o
66. Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting level level level L level Less key Less key Less key Less L Prd key Less than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second key Less than 1 second Communication setting level key Less than 1 second ke t second Password input Control in progress or more 8 72 set value in general 65 169 Expansion control setting key Less than 1 second level Expansion Control Setting Level P ON Operation at power ON CONT STOP MANU SPTR SP tracking OFF ON PIDI PID set automatic selection data PV DV PIDH PID set automatic selection hysteresis 0 10 99 99 P DB PV dead band 0 99999 CJC 1 Input 1 Cold junction compensation OFF ON CJC 4 Input 4 4 1 Cold junction compensation OFF ON PVTR PV tracking OFF ON C Control stop MANT Manual output mothod HOLD INIT MANI Manual MV initial value 5 0 105 0 standard control 1 ORLM MV change rate limit mode Mode 0 0 Mode 1 1 AT G AT calculated gain 0 1 10 0 AT H AT hysteresis 051519 9 LCMA Limit cycle MV amplitude 5 0 50 0 TATE
67. Appendix Setting list Status P A 8 Slave Function Byte Read data address mode count Data 1 Data 1 Response Most significant Least significant 1 1 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes mm Data n Datan Most significant Least significant EBEN 2 The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 5 Reading the variable area P 7 10 Section 7 Communication Modbus M Read setting data Communication Modbus Slave Function Read start Number of Command address mode address elements CRC 16 m 1 1 2 2 2 Explanation m o Mae ou Setting data of setting area H 0600 to 060E RUN level H 0700 to 0744 H 0800 to 0818 H 0900 to 09DE H OAO0 to H OBOO to OBGE H OCOO to 20 H 1100 to 110C 1 H 4000 added to above 2 Same setting data as channel 1 addresses H 8000 added to above 3 Same setting data as channel 1 addresses H C000 added to above 4 Same setting data as channel 1 addresses This command is used to read setting data The number of elements can be set from H 0004 to 006A 4 to 106 to allow successive reading of 2 to 53 items of setting data in contiguous addresses To specify the variable type or address see Appendix Setting list P A 6 The upper limit of an address will vary depending on the variable type This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 When used in setting
68. Command frame Slave Function Write start address mode address Write data CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Data name Explanation Specify the Unit No of the E5AR ER Set in hexa decimal from H 01 to H 63 1 to 99 Client address Function mode The function code for an operation command is H 06 Beginning Specify H 0000 for the operation command address address of write Enter the command code of the operation command and related information see table below This is a check code calculated from the client address to the data end For the calculation method see 7 2 Frames Command frame Example of CRC 16 calculation P 7 4 Data written Operation commands for the EBAR ER are shown in the following Operation 3 Related information Description code Upper Byte Lovver Byte Te H O OFF Disabled Run Stop H O to 3 F H O Run H 1 Stop Bank change HO to 3 F H 0 to 7 Bank 0 to 7 H O Currently selected PID Set No l H 0 Backup mode RAM dala save woa Move to setting area 1 Move to protect level F 2 Fe H 09 Auto Manual H O to 3 F 2 OPAO MORG H 1 Manual mode pre wee O 54 I 5 Ho I x n 0 1 niialize settings 1 Operates for all channels 2 Specify for each channel 0 CH1 1 CH2 2 CH3 3 CH4 F All channels There is no response to a software reset When all channels are specified only enabled channels will respond and processing will begin
69. I 1 NEXT BCC CHR BCC SDATA CHR 2 SEND BCC PRINT 1 RDATA TIMEOUT 0 RCVLOOP No response detection TIMEOUT TIMEOUT 1 IF TIMEOUT gt 2000 THEN RESP No Response GOTO RCVEND IF LOCH THEN RCVLOOP Check for end character if no end character continue reading RDATA RDATA INPUT LOC 1 1 IF LEN RDATA 2 THEN RCVLOOP IF MID RDATA LEN RDATA 1 1 lt gt CHR 3 THEN RCVLOOP RESP MID RDATA 2 LEN RDATA 2 RCVEND Display received data PRINT RESPONSE RESP GOTO SENDDATA EXITSEND 6 10 Program example 6 Operation example Reading the present value of Unit No 01 RUNI SEND DATA 010000101C00000000001 RESPONSE 010000010100000000014F SEND DATA STX 01 00 0 0101 C0 0000 00 0001 ETX BCC Number of elements Bit position Read start address Variable type MRC SRC SID Sub address Node No RESPONSE STX 01 00 00 0101 0000 0000014F ETX BCC Data to be read Hesponse code MRC SRC End code Sub address Node No 6 33 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 34 Section 7 Communication 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 9 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 Modbus Communication methodq 7 2 Fales REPE 7 4 LISTE OT TUNCUONS c MT 7 7 Variable area
70. If the bit shifted from the LSB is repeat step 3 If the bit shifted from the LSB is 1 perform XOR on the CRC register and H A001 and return the result to the CBC register 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the contents of the register have been shifted 8 bits to the right 7 2 Frames 6 If the end of the message has not been reached perform XOR on the next byte of the CRC register and the message return the result to the CRC register and repeat the procedure from step 3 7 Append the result the value in the CRC register to the lower byte of the message Example of appending the result If the calculated CRC value is H 1234 this is appended as follows to the command frame Slave Function address mode Data CRC 16 ST Low High OPE Ea m 1 1 2 bytes CRC 16 calculation range E Response frame Normal response frame Slave Function address mode Data CRC 16 1 1 2 bytes CRC 16 calculation range Error response frame Slave Function Er rror address mode code CRC 16 1 1 1 2 bytes CRC 16 calculation range The number that was specified in the command frame Client address appears here This is the unit number of the responding E5AR ER The function code that was received In an error response frame H 80 is added to the value Function code to indicate that this is an error response Example Received function code H 03 Function code in error response frame H
71. Pulse voltage output is 12 V DC 40 mA Multi output Output type P 5 7 Linear current output Output type Pulse voltage output Linear current output 010 20 mA 4 to 20 mA This is used to assign what type of data is output from each output On multi point input types the data assignment can be set for channels 2 and higher as appropriate for the number of channels Control Transfer output assignment ChmelSP 0080 M ChanelirampSP Channelipresenvaue PV EN ea 00 Channel 2 MV cool side Wa When used for control output the assignments are made automati cally based on the control mode setting as shown on the following page There is no need to change the assignments To use an output for transfer output assign the data you wish to transfer to an unused output Note that if transfer output is assigned to a pulse voltage output the output will turn OFF 4 7 Setting output parameters E npa im ERE RR OUTA Channel 4 control output heating side OUT1 Channel 1 control output heating side Heating OUT2 Channel 1 control output cooling side cooling control OUT3 Channel 2 control output heating side OUTA Channel 2 control output cooling side OUT1 Channel 1 control output heating side OUT1 Channel 1 control output heating side 2 Channel 1 control output cooling side Standard control with remote SP
72. SP ramp fall value 0 to 99999 2 S EU sec SP ramp time unit M EU min H EU hour SP ramp rise value 0 to 99999 2 M Banks e Up to eight banks can be created Each bank is used to store an SP local SP alarm value and a PID Set No Local SP 2000 5000 6 Local SP The Local SP is the SP that is used during operation The SP Local SP value that appears and can be set in the PV SP setting screen in m ri RUN level is the local SP value of the currently executing bank LEAL ZU number a a 1124 e bank number appears as the leading digit of the setting data d _ D p gt One Uo E 5 9 I Section 5 Functions and Operations PID Set No PID Set No Alarm values Alarm value 1 n x LJ Operation procedure RUN level EP qmm Lx d ju r Qum EA Que EA jue J On zb jue E bo LI I Lt L0 0
73. SUB4 or 24 VAC DC no polarity 5 e VS C no polarity 41 5 6 x G H I J K C N E53 ARQC E5AR A4B 500 E53 ARCC MA Event inputs EV pu D E 1 OUT2 D Current output TA EV2 PES OUT2 2 2 4 20 mA 500 0 max 2 Q Voltage output 12 V COM 3 0 20 mA 500 Q max COM G 40 mA 2 i Svvitch using _ X OUT1 output type setting 4 QM Voltage output 12 V _ Lic OUT1 x iki a AO mA or L A 5 Current output T lt Current output T es 6 4 20 mA DC 500 max 6 an 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max T Br i 8 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max m v PT TC BH 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Current Voltage Switch using output Current Voltage Thermocouple Switch using output type setting Resistance thermometer type setting Resistance thermometer V J E5AR Q43B FLK E5AR C43B FLK E5AR A4B 500 ESAR A4B 500 nae 200 am 100 240 VAC Auxiliary outputs 100 240 VAC Relay outputs B C ID E B Relay outputs M PS COM 7 mi ire 3 3 9 suB2 4 4 H SUB3 Es3 ARQC3 6 e gt SuB4 B 3 RS 485 11 OUT2 5 mn Voltage output A
74. level Input initial setting level Display refresh period OFF 0 5 1 2 4 MONL Monitor item level setting 1 SC M Start display scan at power ON OFF ON SC T Display scan period 0 99 1 Disabled OR nput initial setting level 1 0 Control initial setting level 461 Control initial setting 2 level E2 Alarm setting level al Display adjustment level L 4 Communication setting level L 5 Advanced function setting level L ADF Expansion control setting level L EXC Adjustment 2 level Setting Level co CWF MOD m U NO P r 478 Communication unit No c l 0 99 Fu BPS 95 Communication speed 9 6 19 2 38 4 LEN Communication data length 7 8 Communication stop bit 1 2 RRID Communication parity NONE EVEN ODD Approximation setting level Am m m m m m m m mom om Amo m m m m m m m A 33 2 lt Appendix xipu ddv A 34 Index 3 position control 4 17 PM TEENS 8 76 Pal WA i a Ae 1 6 Address Communication Modbus 7 8 A 6 Addresses Communication CompoWay F 6 7 A 6 Adjustment level 8 12 A 12 Adjustment 2 level 8 22 A 13 Advanced function setting level 8 67 A 26 AAR pec n 8 28 Alana Aaa SAD Dans 8 28 A
75. setting range PID set selection data 0 PV 1 DV 5 set selection hystere 0 10 to 99 99 FS 050 Analog type 10 to 110 of scaling display value range Maximum range is 19999 to 99999 e FS 5 13 I Section 5 Functions and Operations M Disturbance overshoot adjustment Disturbance overshoot adjustment functionenabled R ati al KILI a DX ID n LLL 6 Disturbance gain Disturbance gain 1 E i m m X w lt ri L hoa Lt rm Ue n C Constant at disturbance Constant at disturbance E El e The disturbance overshoot adjustment function adjusts the control waveform when a disturbance occurs To use this function set Disturbance overshoot adjustment function to ON the initial setting is OFF e The disturbance response waveform can be adjusted using the Disturbance gain and Constant at disturbance settings e The Disturbance gain setting can be increased to reduce overshoot when a disturbance occurs e The Disturbance gain setting can be decreased to increase overshoot when a disturbance occurs e When Disturbance gain is set to O the disturbance overshoot adjustment function does not operate When
76. standard 233 1 position proportional closed control 2 8 D PID8 Derivative time 8 OL L PID8 MV lovver limit uit 5 0 MV upper limit 0 1 8 AUT PID8 Automatic selection range upper limit 10 to 110 temperature of sensor setting range 3 Position proportional type 0 01 999 99 Position proportional floating control type 0 1 3999 9 Analog type 10 to 110 of scaling display range with a maximum of 19999 to 99999 4 027 t Display PID selection c un Use this setting to select the PID set that you wish to display Set the number of the PID set that you wish to display Up to 8 PID sets PID Set Nos 1 to 8 can be used PID values MV upper and lower limits and automatic selection range upper limit are stored in each PID set n Setting data Setting range Units Default value E selection Setting Selected PID set 6 Related setting data Reference Bank No Adjustment level P 8 13 8 30 8 7 PID setting level L P d CH m MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM PID Proportional band P PID Integral time K o PID Derivative time gg 1 to 8 Advanced PID control These settings are used to store PID values in each PID set If AT is run the values are set automatically ps P action Control action using an MV proportional to the deviation action Control action using output that is proportional to the time integral of the deviation P action causes an offset and
77. value for Scaling input value 2 is set in Scaling display value 2 Decimal point position is used to specify the decimal point position of setting data SP etc for which the units are EU e Scaling settings for inputs 2 to 4 of multi point input types are set in channels 2 to 4 Press the en key to change to the desired analog input channel and then set the scaling Setting data Setting range Units Default value 1 Scaling input value 1 pu DT B 2 input upper limit Setting 19999 to Scaling display value 1 Scaling upper limit 1 peu o 77777 input upper Imit input upper limit Scaling lower limit 1 to The units depend on the input type settings Reference amp Related setting data Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 8 37 I Section 8 Setting data Remote SP upper limit Remote SP lower limit 8 38 f x I L Control vvith remote SP e This sets the upper and lovver limit of remote SP The remote SP upper limit is set vvith respect to the upper input range limit of input 2 and the remote SP lower limit is set with respect to the lower input range limit of input 2 For example if the input 2 type is 4 to 20 mA the remote SP upper limit is set with respect to 20 mA and the remote SP lower limit is set with respect to 4 mA e f the input type temperature units and scaling of input 1 are changed the settings are changed to the uppe
78. 03 Function code in error response frame H 83 Byte count Number of bytes of data that were read Read data The setting data that was read This is a check code calculated from the client address CRC 16 to the data end For the calculation method see 7 2 Frames W Command frame 6 Example of CRC 16 cal culation P 7 4 7 10 7 5 Reading the variable area Response codes Function Error Cause code code Variable address error Error in leading address of read H 03 Variable data error The number of elements exceeds the speci H 83 fied range Operation error Unit error unit change display unit error EEP H 04 error does not occur when number of ele ments is 0 s Normal end No error Reading non display data Setting data can be read even if it is set to non display or is not displayed due to the model Command response example Reading the PV of channel 1 Client address H O1 PV of channel 1 set as read only data Address H 0404 Data read H 000003E8 100 0 C Command 0404 100 02 CRC 16 Response 000003 E81 CR O 16 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 6 Writing to the variable area Write to the variable area by setting the required data in the following command frame Command frame Slave Function Write start Number of Byte Write data address mode address elements count Data 1 Data 1 E 1 2 2 1 mu Number of elements x 2 bytes a Data n Data n CRC 16 Most s
79. 1 second Communication Alarm Setting Level co P 2 L u 2 L n a f n aco Operation Level ALT1 Alarm 1 type 0 11 ATLT Alarm 1 latch OFF ON 0 01 99 99 ALT2 Alarm 2 type 0 11 A2LT Alarm 2 latch OFF ON less than 1 second Display Adjustment Level 4 SPP py SP display screen selection 0 3 ODSL MV display selection MV neating O MV cooing C O BART Bar graph display item OFF Deviation 1 EU 10 EU 20 EU 100 EU MV heating Valve opening O MV cooling C O RET Display auto return time 0 99 0 Display auto return disabled D REF ALH2 Alarm 2 hysteresis 0 01 99 99 ALT3 Alarm 3 type ASLT Alarm 3 latch OFF ON ALH3 Alarm 3 hysteresis 0 01 99 99 ALT4 Alarm 4 type 0 11 AALT Alarm 4 latch OFF ON ALH4 Alarm 4 hysteresis 0 01 99 99 REST Standby sequence restart Condition A Condition B SB1N Auxiliary output 1 non exciting Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C SB2N Auxiliary output 2 non exciting Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C SB3N Auxiliary output 3 non exciting Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C SBAN Auxiliary output 4 non exciting Close in alarm N O Open in alarm N C Adjustment
80. 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity E53 ARQC3 A B 2 4 Event inputs ar Ed EVA HE EV5 e c HEI EV6 i a COM B Rs 485 9 7 CD A O OUT2 M Voltage output 3 12 V 40mA OUT1 D Voltage output qv 1 Current output s 4 20 mA DC 500 0 max 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max C Switch using output type setting x o O1 GO S l o 01 AI NI E53 ART2 Auxiliary outputs Transistor outputs SUB1 SUB2 E5ER AW 500 1 77 nput 2 5 S Input 1 Le a pp gt V Current Voltage Thermocouple Resistance thermometer E5ER PRTDF E5ER PAF 500 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC 5 Input power supply depends on the model 100 to 240 VAC E53 ARRR Relay output 250 VAC 1A OUT2 1 2 3 or 24 VAC DC no polarity 4 5 6 JW E53 ARB4 Event inputs B WE NE EV3 ma y 2 EVA Fox o 3 EV5 4 EV6 a 5 COM 6 olu OUT1 Open Bi E53 ART2 Auxiliary outputs Transistor outputs m IL LGB E5ER PAF 500 Potentiometer VV C oe 577 a n s E v TC m 6 6 6 Current Voltage Resistance thermometer
81. 12V 40 mA or 16 is EVANS 3 OUT1 0 2 ii EV4 Current output La o Current output iud Ev5 4 20 mA DC 500 0 max LE 5 4 20 mA DC PO FIGIHII IJ 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max EV6 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max EV6 5 Switch usi tput Switch using output type setting COM 7 outpu l a V 2 E5AR A4W 500 E5AR A4W 500 zo O ius x O LL 2 10 L4 L2 Input 2 incl lt Input 2 lt L 1 1 52274 bi p v PT 19 L i I E i Q U ii O Tip 20 Inputt T Op m boz I v PT Tc K V PT T K Current Voltage Thermocouple Current Voltage Thermocouple Resistance thermometer Resistance thermometer Z A E5AR QQ43DVV FLK 2 loop Control E5AR A4W 500 E5AR A4W 500 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC Auxiliary outputs Relay outputs eite COM Input power supply depend S SUB1 on the model 100 to 240 VAC So SUB2 or 24 VAC DC no polarity COM E53 ARQC3 SUB3 T RS 485 55 SMS A 40 I OUT2 El E oltage output 3 4 Event inputs 4 12V 40mA 4 5 OUTI R 1 2 Voltage output 12V 40 mA or 6 i i Eume Current output PNE El 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max F S 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max EV6 Switch using output type setting g output type setting COM 6 w 2
82. 12V 40mA BH OUT1 Voltage output d T 12V 40 mA or 5 Current output 4 20 mA 500 Q max E 6 Jt 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max d reum Switch using output type setting xx eR a 000000 5 7 4 500 E53 ARCC3 el Event inputs B gt r EV1 RS 485 PC _ EV C OUT2 A o2 EV2 M 2 EVE Current output yd 3 4 20 mA DC 500 max COM COM 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max r e Ioe Switch using output d TEE D i ing ge 51 i mew xi ee s OUT1 m HZ m d Current output T 6 T 6 b 420 mA DC 500 0 max FE 5707 V PT 0 20 mA DC 500 max F 1 V PT TIK Current Voltage Thermocouple Switch using output Current Voltage Thermocouple Resistance thermometer type setting Resistance thermometer k 2 J 2 4 E5AR Q43DB FLK 2 2 How to Use the Terminals E5AR C43DB FLK 4 500 7 md EM is 100 240 VAC Bl Relay outputs 100 240 VAC Relay outputs s um 2 3 N J E53 ARQC3 B B 6 RS 485 SS E E53 ARB4 m E53 ARB4 FE Event input i Voltage output D 2 Event inputs D 12V 40 mA 2 EV3 3 EV3 9 2 Voltage output 4 a 12V 4
83. 2 bytes Related Description information Operation mode H 00 Auto H 01 Manual 1 2 H 20 3 Auto H 21 Manual H 30 4 Auto H 31 Manual H FO All Auto H F 1 Manual Use this command to select auto or manual operation This command is used in setting area O If used in setting area 1 an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command When the control mode is set to cascade control perform the Auto Manual operation command of CH2 H 10 Auto H 11 Manual Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information 16 H00 H00 HOB H00 1 1 2 2 2 bytes This returns all settings to the initial settings This command is used in setting area 1 If used in setting area 0 an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 Hoe Ho woj o 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation comman
84. 21 8 14 Write via communication OFF ON 5 29 OMRON OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC Commerce Drive Schaumburg IL 60173 847 843 7900 For US technical support or other inquiries 800 556 6766 OMRON CANADA INC 885 Milner Avenue Toronto Ontario MIB 5V8 416 286 6465 OMRON ON LINE Global http www omron com USA http www omron com oei Canada http www omron ca UNITED STATES To locate a Regional Sales Office local Distributor or to obtain product information call 847 843 7900 CANADA REGIONAL SALES OFFICES Ontario Toronto 416 286 6465 Kitchener 519 896 1144 Kingston 613 376 3968 Quebec Montreal 514 636 6676 British Columbia Vancouver 604 522 8855 Alberta Edmonton 403 440 0818 Calgary 403 257 3095 Sao Paulo 55 11 5564 6488 Cono Sur 54 114 787 1129 Florida 954 227 2121 Ciudad Juarez 656 623 7083 Mexico D F 555 534 1195 Monterrey N L 818 377 4281 Z182 E1 02 2005 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in the U S A
85. 53 4 Auxiliary outputs Relay outputs b ti TOGO OOES Z E 5 V Current Voltage Resistance thermometer Thermocouple 2 2 How to Use the Terminals M Precautions when wiring To avoid the effects of noise wire the signal wires and the power line separately e Use crimp terminals to connect to the terminals e Tighten screws to a torque of 0 40 to 0 56 Nem e The crimp terminals should be type M3 and either of the following shapes 5 8 mm or less EE S A O s mmor iess B Wiring The inside of the frame around terminal numbers in the schematics indicates the interior of the unit and the outside of the frame indicates the exterior Power supply Connect terminals A1 to A2 as follows terminals The input power supply varies ESAR depending on the model 100 240 V AC or 24 V AC DC no polarity Le f 3 6 1 2 2 3 is att ft ta Input voltage 100 240 V AC 50 60Hz 22 VA 17 VA 24 V AC 50 60Hz 15 VA 11 VA 24 V DC no polarity I Section 2 Preparations 6 Inputs terminals For Input 1 IN1 connect terminals K4 to K6 on the E5AR or E4 to E6 on the E5ER as follows according to the input type For a multi point input type connect inputs 2 to 4 IN2 to IN4 in the same way according to the number of input points A B
86. 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus 7 17 Monitor value read Communication Modbus 7 17 Read setting data Communication Modbus 7 18 Write setting data to protect level 7 19 Write setting data Communication Modbus 7 19 Write via communication 7 21 Control Run Control Stop 7 21 Bank hande xa C 7 22 BE YOCUlE ess du dune RED UN CPI CRI au uu 7 23 Qana o nant el i SAS 7 23 WV PING INO Cle b r 7 24 RAN Gala SIOC RP ad Rz 7 25 a Kupu ksaq u docu o a 7 25 Move to setting area 1 7 26 Move to protect level 7 26 A 67 LEM 7 27 I itiali2zessalliymgau uuu uu uy au a tas 7 27 Gancellalc r 7 28 5PhOd e bis OR tri cR UE 7 28 Echo back esi 7 29 XIV Section8 Setting data 8 1 How to use this section 8 2 8 2 Protect level UN uua En 8 3 8 3 Operation level ance 8 5 8 4 Adjustment level NEL M Om 8 12 8 5 Adjustment 2 level 5060 Da li 8 22 8 6
87. Approximation setting or Monitor item level The blinking display to indicate the move does not appear e Setting change protect Prevents use of the AI keys Setting Change settings by key Remarks exceptions value All setting data on Protect level Move to special function level ON No e Move to calibration level Display bank selection Display PID selection e Setting change protect is initially set to OFF e PF key protect Prevents use of the PF1 PF2 keys Setting Change settings by key operation PF1 PF2 keys are enabled PF1 PF2 keys are disabled operation as a function key and ON channel key is disabled e PF key protect is initially set to OFF 8 3 Operation level 8 3 Operationlevel Display this level to operate the control system The SP can be set and the PV monitored in this level Power on m om m m um mm um um um um um im um um m Gm oum Gm Emo Gm OG mom mom mom eee GG Operation level gt Adjustment Adjustment 2 ey less 55 key less L Raz 1 Ady than 1 second than 1 second key less key less than 1 sec than 1 second l 777 lt PID setting 4 Bank setting i I level level R rE Orey iess 2Y p Pig key ess L than 1 second than 1 second C Control in progre
88. Auto Manual To switch modes change the setting of Auto Manual in Operation level During cascade control if the primary loop is switched to manual control when the secondary loop is in any of the following conditions the manual MV is disabled eThe SP mode of the secondary loop is local cascade open secondary loop is in manual mode e Operation at error is taking place in the secondary loop 8 6 CH PV SP Display 1 PV SP Display 2 PV SP Display 3 e Setting ay 8 3 Operation level e Standard type Control method Setting range Units Default value Heating cooling 105 0 to 105 0 1 Manual output method Expansion control setting level selects the MV that is used when manual mode is entered The MV prior to entering manual mode can be held or the manual MV default value can be used Position proportional type us 77 proportional Related setting data Auto Manual Operation level P 8 11 PF1 setting PF2 setting Advanced function setting level P 8 68 Manual output method Manual MV default value Expansion control setting level P 8 77 lt Display 1 shows the PV and Display 2 shows the SP The SP can be set Either the local SP or the remote SP is shown depending on the selected SP mode In the case of remote SP the value can only be monitored
89. Bank Display only PV SP MV CH MV display selection ndi Heating cooling control e This setting is used to select vvhich MV is displayed in PV SP MV Operation level during heating cooling control Heating MV or Cooling MV can be selected n Setting range Units Default value ab Setting Heating MV m Cooling MV 8 60 8 13 Display adjustment level i H mu Yad n nm E5AR Bar graph display item Use this setting to select the contents of the bar graph display of the E5AR e The bar graph of the E5AR is 10 segments Setting range Units Default value m No bar graph display Deviation 1 EU segment Setting Deviation 10 EU segment Deviation 20 EU segment Deviation 100 EU segment Standard type Heating MV Position proportional type Valve opening Standard type Cooling MV Display auto return time 26 This setting is used to select the amount of time without key operation that must elapse for the display to revert to the PV SP screen when in Operation level Adjustment level Adjustment level 2 Bank setting level PID setting level Approximation setting level or Monitor item level e When 0 is selected the function is disabled no auto reset Setting range Units Default value Setting Display refresh period acer This setting is used to lengthen the refresh period of the m
90. CompoWay F communication protocol E5AR ER applied commands are explained below E Monitor value read Communication CompoWay F Variable Command MRC SRC type Address Bit position Number of elements Vari able Address Address PV Data name 0000 PV 0200 rm val PV 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 2 MV monitor cooling 0305 ntemal SP Status Status Bank 0 Alarm value 1 lower limit 0206 Bank 0 Alarm value 2 0207 1 Local SP of Bank No that is selected and running 0106 0107 0108 0109 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 V 0104 Bank 0 Alarm value 1 0304 Bank 0 Alarm value 1 0204 Bank 0 Alarm value 1 3 6 14 Hesponse 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F This command is used to read the PV status and other monitor values The number of elements can be set from 0002 to 0019 to allow reading of monitor values in contiguous addresses When used in setting area 1 the response for the PV and internal SP is 0 and the response for the status is as indicated in the notes in Appendix Setting list Status P A 8 MRC SRC Response code Data Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 5 Reading the variable area P 6 9 E Setti
91. DeviceNet Communications User s Manual H124 Section 2 Preparations o lt Ke p o 2 1 nstaliaLonuuaa D b n UD do 2 2 2 2 How to Use the Terminals 2 4 I Section 2 Preparations 2 1 Installation B Dimensions EBAR Em x li lin E 5 88888 panan B5555 BBBEH B installation Panel cutout dimensions E5AR E5ER 92 9 U 110 or higher 0 8 0 120 or higher 120 or higher F 2 2 2 1 Installation Installation procedure E5AR E5ER D If the front of the unit needs to be watertight attach the provided watertight packing If the front of the unit does not need to be watertight the watertight packing does not need to be attached 2 Insert the unit into the cutout in the panel 3 Insert the accompanying fittings into the grooves on the top and bottom of the r
92. G01 V Lp00000 H 01 93844444H 1009 429H 0901 01 0 G V LP00000 H 01 00000000 pJepueis LA LE Z NIN Enue indui Josuas Jo paijioeds 1 ANYIN 0 OLAV L dOLS 0 07011 01 0701 01 064 1 0501 01 070 VLEOOO00 H 01 00000000 H i 0 S0L 01 070 VLEOOO00 H 01 00000000 edi dui o Buipioooy 9 YE SE WL p uui gq ddn Huas YS 01 Jum 12m0 Dunes ds ad Idul o Buipioooy 9 ye se euieg yu Jeddn YS O ywl J9MO dS ed dul o Buipioooy 1 YE SE ju YS oi l 12M0 6umes qS 0011 01 0 01 27700000H 01 96443444iH Jeuonjodojd uonisog uonisod SCIGH OUP uomneoiunuduJO9 Aq 195 senjeA ase sen eA JOWUOW senj eA 195 ui pajeoipul H HO Ad a E di Jejoereuo s nqiny erep Sum sseuppw ed egere snapo 3 uoneJedo pejqesip Jeyuur 070 0 00L 01 070 94600000 H 01 00000000 H 1002 ywi ayer eBueuo AW pejgqesip Jeyuur 070 0 00L 01 070 946000001H 01 00000000 H eeu yw ayer eBueuo AN uedo l l ldulo2 LO000000 H plou 0 00000000 H uedo Aje1ejduuoo 1 1 1 14 14 1 1 H Jeuonuodoud uonisod 10419 Ad 1 AW 0401 01 0 SOL Y LYO00000 H 01 948 1 1 1 1 1 H 1009 YE H 0 901 0 0 S VLEO0000 H 01 39444444 H pJepueis uedo L0000000
93. H o 0 vui OZ 0 00000000 H 1 1ndino din seaun L0000000 H 0 1ndino esind 00000000 H ed 1ndino 1 1ndino 1u amp uno seaun L0000000 H 0 nd no beqloA sind 00000000 H ed ndino di Jejoeeu seinquuv erep Dumeg sseuppw sseuppw adh agere snqpoyy a femodwoo I A Dunes jelu jolluoo ed 1ndino jua uno enj eA uoluoul Bunes uonisod en eA ETT uomneoiunuduJO9 q 1es senjeA ae senjeA JOWUOW senj eA 195 ui pejeoipul Ha A 18 Setting list AOQE SE AOQE SE ulES 4011800 6 9 1101 ju9 3 AOQE SE AOQE SE ulES 4011800 1101 ju9 3 AOQE SE AOQE SE ulES uoieooj e indui jue 3 AOQE SE AOQE SE AOQE SE ulES AOQE SE ulES uoneoo e e yndul jue 3 40100 6 z indui ju9 3 GZ 01 02 PHO 61000000 H O 7 L000000 H 6L 01 vL EHO 1000000 H 01 30000000 H EL 01 8 ZHO 40000000H 01 80000000 H Ayre uuis 4 jeooj eyouueJ BPOW dS LHO 40000000H 9 jrenueuy oiny LHO 90000000 H s dois undH LHO 80000000 H v z iq 4ueg LHO v0000000 H 1 14 4ueg LHO 0000000 H c 14 4ueg LHO 20000000 H 1 NO 33O Uoneorunuuuuoo BIA SIM L0000000H 0 p lqesid 00000000 H 4 Uuoreoojp 1101 ju9 3 v AOQE SE AOQE SE ulES uorneooj 1ndjn
94. Heating cooling control o 100 0 0 0 to 105 0 M MV change rate limit The MV change rate limit is used to set a maximum allowed change per second in the MV or in the opening of a valve in the case of a position proportional controll type If a change occurs in the MV that exceeds this setting the MV is changed by the set limit each second until the required change is attained When the limit is set to O the function is disabled MV change rate limit heating For standard control use MV change rate limit heat MV change rate limit cool cannot be used For heating cooling control separate limits can be set for heating and cooling MV change rate limit heat is used for heating and MV change rate limit cool is used for cooling The MV change rate limit cannot be used in the following conditions e Manual mode During AT e During ON OFF control P 0 00 e When control is stopped MV output at Stop e During MV output at PV error If you only wish to limit the rate of increase in the MV set the MV change rate limit mode to 1 l Default MV change rate limit 0 0 to 100 0 sec heat MIV CANJE TAEAE 6 0 16 700 0 sec cool MV change rate limit 0 Increase Decrease mode 1
95. Increase only 5 17 Section 5 Functions and Operations M MV at Stop MV at stop M MV at PV error MV at error This specifies the MV when control is stopped In heating cooling control a negative value is used for the cooling MV thus when MV at Stop is positive the MV will be sent to the heating output and when negative the MV will be sent to the cooling output The initial setting is 0 0 which means there is no output at stop for either standard or heating cooling control l Default 5 0 to 105 0 Standard control MV at Stop 105 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling control Note The order of priority of the MV settings is Manual MV default gt at Stop gt MV at PV error This setting is used to output a fixed MV when an input error PV error or remote SP input error occurs When position proportional control is selected MV at PV error also functions when a potentiometer input error occurs when Operation at potentiometer input error Stop or Closed When control is stopped at Stop takes precedence In manual mode the manual MV default takes precedence 5 0 to 105 0 MV at PV error Standard control Standard type 105 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling control Closed output ON Valve completely open No output valve opening h
96. J T E L U N R S B W Platinum resistance temperature input sensors Pt100 Sensor input o Current input 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA DC including remote SP input Voltage input 1 to 5 V DC O to 5 V DC 0 to 10 V DC including remote SP input Input impedance 150 Q using current input approx 1 MQ using voltage input 1 Voltage pulse output Control 0 to 20 mA DC 4 to 20 mA DC 500 Q load max including transfer output output Resolution Approx 54000 at O to 20 mA DC approx 43000 at 4 to 20 mA DC 27 e output Maximum load voltage 30 V DC maximum load current 50 mA output Residual voltage 1 5 V max leakage current 0 4 mA max See Control output Control method Advanced PID or ON OFF Setting method Digital setting by front panel keys setting by communication 7 segment digital display and LED indicators Indicator method E5AR Character height PV 12 8 mm SV 7 7 mm MV 7 7 mm E5ER Character height PV 9 5 mm SV 7 2 mm MV 7 2 mm Other functions Varies by model Ambient operating 10 to 55 C no condensation or ice formation 3 year warranty 10 to 50 C temperature Ambient operating humidity Relative humidity 25 to 85 25 to 65 C no condensation or icing 1 100 to 240V AC and 24 V AC DC are on different models Please specify when ordering 2 V DC 40 mA max 3 with short circuit protection circuit 2 Multi input Switch between temperature and analog input by input type switch Basic
97. Mondo maaan nade 3 7 Settings for heating cooling control 3 8 3 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln 3 9 SEPD ES 0 cx ab s 3 9 La litigio meet mr pH 3 10 DO MING ceo cic b b yi 3 10 AGUSTO isa depo toties eon eoe uada 3 11 Settings for position proportional control 3 12 XI 3 4 3 5 Cascade control of reflow ovens 3 13 APPIICAUON Aaaa yab aaa nail 3 13 LA e S CR 3 14 SO IIS aysakuy m n n 3 14 AGIUSITIODIE sa a eee eae 3 15 Ratio control of dyeing machines 3 18 PADDING AMON iE 3 18 WITING e er 3 19 SEMINO ma HC 3 19 Agus uuu pu uu u a a a M s 3 21 Seclion4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 Setting levels and key operation 4 2 DOU VAISS MMC Terr 4 4 Initial setting examples s ss nnn nenne 4 5 seting1hednpubtyDO z a 4 8 sje mier x ccr 4 8 vlerif oro MM EE E 4 9 Selecting the temperature units
98. NO 0 440 L NO 0 440 10000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 p lqeu c 1001 auenbs jo uonoeJx3 p lqeu 1004 e1enbs jo uoloeux 9200 Vy40 9200 L NO 0 440 10000000 00000000 pe qeue t Leine jueuJeA o A 1 NO 0 4 0 10000000 00000000 p lqeu e eBejeAe jueuleAo A 1 NO 0 4 0 10000000 00000000 p jqeu z jueuJe o A 1 NO 10000000 I 0 440 00000000H p lqeu eDejene jueue o N 1414 ms ssol SS9J ed ejqeue Jajoereyy sainquyy ejep uies 57 enj eA uoluoul Huas uonisod enjeA Appendix Indu JoJ1uoo jeuonJodoud uonisog sindul sindul z indui sindul sindul z Indu s ndul 7 sindul z indui 01 U09 Dui ooo Duneoeu epeosey JoJuoo paepueijs epeose o 041009 sindul sindul Z yndul dS 910u8J uM I0nuo2 Bur ooo 6uneeH sindul sindul z yndul dS lOuu 1 Ulu 01 U00 pyepuels s ndul s ndul z yndul Ionuo Bur ooo 6uneeH sindui sindul z jueuuuBisse 1ndino 1 101002 jueuuufisse 1ndino J0J1u02 jueuuufisse z 1ndino 1 JSUE1 0 1400 Wo eq UMOUS BPOW oJ1uoo YORE ul sBumies JEU Z jueuuuBisse 1ndino 1 101002 indui ed A indu 01 U00 pyepuels
99. Position proportional 6 29 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F E Controller status read Communication CompoWay F Hesponse 6 Operation state Related information 6 30 This command reads the operation status of the EBAR ER The command can be used in any state of the EBAR ER Operation Response code state Related information cele lw ll Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit position Bit position Operation state Operating Error MV at PV error output Stopped Including setting area 1 Manual mode The operation state of each channel is indicated using a 2 bit code 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit position Bit position Status 17 577777 0 Ba i eg 1 iBlank mE 2 CT input error Notoccured Occurred 3 RSPinputerror Occurred MAE 4 Potentiometer error Not occurred Occurred EN 5 Exceeds display range Not occurred Occurred NE 6 inptero X Notoccured Occurred ZEE 7 Bank i I 3 b m a E EE EE REESE ERE MERE M a ES s R ee m E E m RM ma MIN M MEA S RE m R C RM E MR RN M E R mE RE a R E E M RU M ME RUNG EI m ee Sa IO MG EUR Mu E RR RR R R ee mcm m n OR of channels set in Number of enabled channels When the channel does not ex
100. Related setting data Reference Straight line approximation input 1 Straight line approximation input 2 Straight line approximation output 1 Straight line approximation output 2 Approximation setting level P 8 33 P Broken line approximation 1 enable Pro r Use this setting to enable or disable broken line approximation for input 1 n Setting range Units Default value e FF Disable Enable Setting 8 51 I Section 8 Setting data CH Motor calibration CH Travel time 8 52 f Operation pe n Setting ERU 6 Related setting data Broken line approximation 1 Input 1 to Broken line approximation 1 Input 20 Broken line approximation 1 Output 1 to Broken line approximation 1 Output 20 Approximation setting level P 8 34 Position proportional type EN pes n Use this setting to run motor calibration If you are going to monitor the valve opening be sure to execute this setting During execution the display cannot be changed e Executing this setting also resets Travel time e When this setting is accessed the set value is amp F F Select a to run motor calibration e When motor calibration ends the setting automatically reverts to Hu Related information 3 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln ll Settings for position proportional control P 3 12 6 Related
101. Setting data Auxiliary output 1 allocation 5ba Auxiliary output 3 allocation 5520 3 Auxiliary output 2 allocation 2 Auxiliary output 4 allocation haa Use these settings to assign output content to auxiliary outputs f Setting range Units Default value 1 Disable 0 CH1 Alarm 1 1 Setting CH1 Alarm 2 2 CH1 Alarm 3 3 CH1 Alarm 4 4 CH1 Input error 5 CH1RSP Input error 6 Disabled 7 U ALM 8 Alarm 1 OR output of all channels 9 Alarm 2 OR output of all channels 10 Alarm 3 OR output of all channels 11 Alarm 4 OR output of all channels 12 d Input error OR output of all channels 13 RSP Input error OR output of all channels 14 Disable 15 CH2 Alarm 1 16 CH2 Alarm 2 17 CH2 Alarm 3 18 CH2 Alarm 4 19 CH2 Input error 20 CH2RSP Input error 21 Disable 22 Similarly CH3 23 to 29 CHA 30 to 36 On a multi point input type assignment data can be set for channels 2 and higher as appropriate for the number of channels U ALM output will be OR output of alarm functions 1 to 4 of all channels Related information 4 11 Using auxiliary output P 4 22 8 48 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level L Transfer output upper limit ki Transfer output lovver limit eee 1 to 4 Transfer output using output assignment e These settings can only be used for outputs selected for transfer output using output assignment Default value Cont
102. Settings Required for Basic Explains the basic functions of the Control E5AR ER Section 8 Setting Data Basic operation of the Explains how to use the customized functions scaling SP ramp etc to get the most out of the E5AR ER Advanced functions Section 5 Functions and Operations of the EBAR ER Section 8 Setting Data Section 6 Communication CompoWay Explains how to use communication F based functions Section 7 Communication Modbus Communication functions User calibration Section 9 User Calibration can be performed by the user Troubleshooting Section 10 Troubleshooting 2 encounter a problem Product specifications List of set tings Can be used to make a of your settings For details on using DeviceNet communications functions refer to the E5AR E5ER Digital Controller DeviceNet Communications User s Manual H124 VIII Special markings 1 Important This appears in cases where incorrect settings or operation will prevent a function from achieving the expected result Set the input type before setting the scaling value If the input type is changed after setting the scaling value the scal ing value will be automatically initialized 2 Hint This gives useful hints advice and other supplemental information The rise and fall values of the SP ramp of the E5AR ER can be set separately 3 Marks used to indicate Function Settin
103. Stop all AT Execute Cancel toggle 7 5 Run Bank scroll Stop toggle A M key Monitor setting item d al L L aa r r 1 Li 4 PF2 setting CH PF1 monitor setting item 1 to ux 2 m i to w m ee yum Lt PF1 monitor setting item 5 m M to na PF2 monitor setting item 1 to 4 ue Lt AR Vx PF key set to monitor setting item w PF2 monitor setting item 5 e When one or both PF keys are set to monitor setting item Monitor setting item 1 through Monitor setting item 5 of each key must be set to the desired values among 0 to 19 below e Each time a PF key is pressed the display scrolls to the next monitor setting item in order from Monitor setting item 1 to Monitor setting item 5 Default Ao me eme PF1 Monitor Disable Setting setting item 1 PV SP Bank PF1 Monitor Configurable SP onfigurable PV DV Monitor only Proportional band P Configurable Integral time 1 Configurable setting item 4 6 Derivative time D Configurable PF1 Monitor Alarm 1 Configurable Alarm upper limit 1 Configurable PF2 Monitor Alarm lower limit 1 Configurable Alarm 2 Configurable PF Monitor Alarm upper limit 2 Configurable Alarm lower limit 2 Configurable Alarm 3 Configurable Alarm upper limit 3 Configurable
104. UO 10000000 H 0 440 HO 00000000 H 2 NNVW epow jenue w 20000000 1 4019 d01S 10000000 H 0 LNOO nunuo2 00000000 GOluoul uoneoiunuuuJO09 Aq 195 senj eA sen eA JOWUOW senj eA 195 ui pajeoipul H HO pueq pe p Ad H siseJejs u uonoojes ewone 195 Aid H gep uonoejes oreujojne 195 did HO Durpoen dS el uo je uonejedo OOEL 0000 HO sssi Suy Spi sseJppy sseJppy ed ejgeueA snqpolN J AeModuo5 Bumes uoisuedx3 A 27 Appendix B Initialization due to setting changes Related settings that are in Settings that are initialized when related settings are changed are shown initialized euin e46e1u lenueyy omny dojg ung 8 o 1 alid ui 160 AN 8 0 did pwj saddn AN uoroejes ejdsip AN wa ejdsip jeg 1009 yeay prepuejs ynejep ejgeueA payeindiuew jenuey 003 ay piepuejs anjen ynejapynejap aiqeven perejndiueu jenueyy o 1002 yeay prepugys 10498 Ad 1 AW 1002 1894 prepuejs dois ye ejqeue payeindiueyy uonisod juiod euroeq x 6501 158658h 4 7 6 2798154255 8 O c 0 senjeA jueunsn pe jndu pueq Ad 201 senjeA jueunsn pe ndu O pueq pe q enjeA Ile dureJ qS O NJeA SL due dS 01 0 syueg p 0 llulll 19M0 uue v Z 01 0 syueg p o 1 ywj zaddn uu
105. VI Precautions for Correct Use VII About this Manual VIII Overview 1 1 Main Features of the 1 2 E RES 1 2 Gone EE 1 2 eT c EIN 1 3 1 2 PartNames and FUNCIONS 5 ec A l 1 4 gio rM 1 4 How to read the display 1 5 Ex lahation o ihe keys ab 1 6 1 3 Input output Configuration and Main Functions 1 7 Input output configuration 1 7 Main unun TOURS ERR 1 8 Explanation of Model Numbers 1 12 zo MEE ie E oe 0 0 D 2 2 Dimens ONS T 2 2 ilisia alih c b ba 2 2 2 2 Howto Use the Terminals 2 4 cil 2 4 Eb m b d S Un 2 8 Precautions when wiring 2 11 WIO oann X 2 11 Section 3 Typical Control Examples S L Slaridardeonir6 uyu o ee b be 0 sb 3 2 ADDIIG31IOlI 22 o ubapa aa a baa DL date 3 2 Adige MP TC 3 2 SENNO ua om NER 3 3 ZAQJUSINISRNNU uuu ul P PM 3 4 3 2 Heating cooling control of a chemical reaction device 3 5 BDp CAaTOR ster HR 3 5 VALS r ZY R L 3 6 Elida n PRAET 3 6 AGIUSIDTODE cr sun kat a m a
106. a sand weight scale is connected to IN2 and a pump drive inverter is connected to OUT1 When using the ESAR QQ43W FLK wire as shown below Sand weight meter Sensor 2 The scale of sensor 1 which measures the flow of dye is 0 0 to 25 0 kg s and the scale of sensor 2 which measures the weight of sand is 0 0 to 500 0 kg s The ratio value is set to 0 05 so that the proportion of sand to dye will be 110 5 Helated setting data and settings are as follows Input 1 type switch ANALOG Input 2 type switch ANALOG Input 1 type 15 4 to 20 mA Ch 1 scaling input value 1 4 Ch 1 scaling display value 1 0 Ch 1 scaling input value 2 20 Ch 1 scaling display value 2 250 Ch 1 decimal point position 1 Input 2 input type 15 4 to 20 mA Output type of output 1 1 Current output initial setting Output type of linear current output 1 1 4 to 20 mA initial setting Control mode 4 Ratio control Straight line approximation 1 an Enable Straight line approximation 2 a Enable Straight line approximation 1 Straight line approximation 2 See the setting examples on the next page Analog parameter 1 0 05 SP mode 52 Remote SP 3 19 Section 3 Typical Control Examples N2 Straight ine approximation 1 Straightline approximation 2 Straight line approximation 1 Straight line approximation 2 RUN level
107. against normal handling and extra charges apply to special conditions Claims Any claim by Buyer against Seller for shortage or damage to the Goods occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to Seller within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transporta tion bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Goods from Seller in the condition claimed 12 13 14 15 16 Warranties a Exclusive Warranty Sellers exclusive warranty is that the Goods will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Seller or such other period expressed in writing by Seller Seller disclaims all other warranties express or implied b Limitations SELLER MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ABOUT NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABIL ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE GOODS BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE GOODS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE Seller further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Goods or other wise of any intellectual property right c Buyer Remedy Seller s sole obliga tion hereunder shall be to replace in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof the non complying Good or
108. and 100 0 for 20 mA when the input 1 type is set to 4 to 20 mA 1 Hold the key down for at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to nput initial setting level dam m Lt gt Mia Ex z x E K m m d L 1 1 2 Make sure that Input 1 input type is 15 4 to 20 mA Z I ri ERI 3 Press the key repeatedly to select i AP i Scaling input value 1 Set to 5 with the AIX keys a 4 Press the kel key to select 257 i Scaling display value 1 Set to O with the AI keys t bm n 4 ju EA m 5 Press the kel key to select aF Scaling input value 2 Set to 20 with the AIX keys 6 Press the cel key to select 25 2 Scaling display value 2 Set to 1000 with the AIX keys ju EA nC E 4 9 I Sec
109. are set in the following and the initial settings are used for all other parameters Input initial setting level 1 Turn on the power and then hold down the key for at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Input initial setting level 2 Press the key less than 1 second to move from Input initial setting level to Control initial setting level a k Output 1 output type will appear Press the key to set to 1 Linear current output Output 1 Output type 3 4 Cascade control of reflow ovens Control mode al Dr Lut ju w c ju w a m pem JE jue Present value PV SP MV 2 RUN level e Em ea e NEED 7t t Ct UN m Mos x A LP j ju m y g X a m Z g E Present value PV SP MV Present value PV SP MV 4 1
110. area Write to the data area by setting the required data in the following FINS mini command text format Command FINS mini command text Variable Starting address Number of MRC SRC type of write Bit positon elements Write data po fot a aaa l y aa 2 2 2 4 2 0001 to 0018 4 Data name Explanation MRC SRC Specifies the FINS mini monitor value setting data write command Variable type Specify a variable type First address of write Specify the address for the beginning of the write Not used on the E5AR ER Specify 00 Specifies the number of variables to be written Number of elements max of 25 H 19 Not needed for a compound write Write data Enter data to be written FINS mini response text Response code MRC SRC MRES SRES 2 2 4 MRC SRC FINS mini command text appears here Result of execution of the command Response codes code i Command length 1 The command is too short 1002 too short 1101 Area type error Incorrect variable type The specified number of elements does 1003 ments Data num 1 not agree vvith the actual number of data ber do not agree elements i Bit position specification other than 00 1100 Parameter error l U Written data was outside of setting range Write via communication is disabled Write to setting area 1 was attempted Number of ele from setting area O Write to setting data of protect level was attempted from other than protect level A
111. as shown in the following example Channel 1 Sensor Heater The control period can be set from 0 2 sec to 99 0 sec onds on the E5AR ER The shortest setting on our previ ous models was 1 sec For high precision control applications that previously required the combined use of our cycle control unit G32A EA and an SSR the G32A EA is now no longer needed E Wiring The platinum resistance temperature input sensor Pt100 is connected to the IN1 terminal and the OUT1 terminal is connected to the SSR Wiring for the E5AR Q4B is shown in the following schematic E5AR Sensor 3 2 3 1 Standard control ll Settings Input 1 type switch I I Output 1 Output type Input 1 type Control mode Present value PV SP Set the control period to 0 2 sec for high precision temperature control with the SSR Helated setting data and settings are as follows Input 1 type switch TC PT initial setting Input 1 input type 1 Pt100 150 00 to 150 00 C Output 1 output type 0 Pulse voltage output initial setting Control mode 0 Control mode initial
112. at Seller s election to repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the Good provided that in no event shall Seller be responsible for warranty repair indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Goods unless Seller s analysis confirms that the Goods were properly handled stored installed and maintained and not subject to contami nation abuse misuse or inappropriate modification Return of any goods by Buyer must be approved in writing by Seller before shipment Seller shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Goods in combination with any electrical or electronic components circuits system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments Any advice recommendations or information given orally or in writing are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty Damage Limits Etc SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL INDI RECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUC TION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE GOODS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT WARRANT Y NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY Further in no event shall liability of Seller exceed the individual price of the Good on which liability is asserted Indemnities Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller its affiliates and its employees from and against all liabilities losses claims costs and expenses including attorney s fees and
113. calibration Press the key to obtain the display at left and begin 4 mA calibration While viewing the output on the DMM use the AIX keys to set the output to 4mA n the example at left 4 mA appears at a value 2 digits smaller than before calibration Press the cel key to obtain the display at left Note that this display will not appear if not all of the required data has been tentatively saved or if the data has not been changed Press the A key Display 2 will show SE5 Two seconds after the key is released or when the c is pressed the tentatively saved calibration data is stored in non volatile memory If you do not wish to save the data in non volatile memory press the c key instead of the Al key e f there is another output connect the output as explained in step 2 and repeat steps 3 to 7 8 Turn off the power to quit calibration mode 9 7 Inspecting indicator accuracy 9 7 Inspecting indicator accuracy e After calibrating input be sure to inspect the indicator accuracy to verify that the input was calibrated correctly e Run the E5AR ER in the PV SP state e Check the upper limit lower limit and mid range limit of the indicator range 3 values Thermocouple Preparations Connect as follows to the required devices Be sure to connect the E5AR ER to the cold junction compensator using the comp
114. fewoduioo I A JUOLUISNIDY am Lt K Lu 450 uonisod ENEA Jojoeje ynejoq juiod jeuiroeg oluoul um s qolluoul uoreorunuuuJoo Aq 195 sen eA ale S n EA JojuouJ senjeA 95 u pejeolpul H nene sn A 12 Setting list 00071 01 00070 9n EA pezi euJou 0 jue eAinbe si 2407006 L 0 0 002 O 0700 L 01 0 00Z ed 1ndui jo eDejs Indu y u p pnioul si uoneuurxo4dde eur juDrens e ueuM Uonouny uoneJedo eui JO indui eui uo peseg senjeA pezi euuou jeg suomounj uonejedo eui jo uoee JO senjeA JOS Oe eseu ky 666 6 01 666 L H0220000 H 01 1 8 14444 H 177 jojuo jejeurered Bojeuy 9180 2000 I 666 6 01 070 40 20000 01 00000000H Julod jnd mo 100 asenbs jo uonoex3 9180 8000 666 6 01 0 0 40 20000 01 00000000H juod jnd Mo 1001 asenbs jo PLEO WOOO j julod 1n9 M0 Z 1001 eyenbs jo uonoenxg zL90 6000 EE juiod m Mo 1001 ejenbs jo 0180 8000 junoo eDejene A0N y eDejeve e o 3090 2000 S r E 2 L 0 a12 uoneoiunuuuioo Hulsn senjeA Dunes 9000 89 En x en Og q QU Og Dx gt Dx gt K Dx Dx DX EK ux al EK P m P 2 at Pa LZ I DXX Du pui Sal Lr cn L 5n On zn P m gt Li gt
115. from Channel 1 If an error is detected on any one channel an Operation error will result If all channels end normally Normal end results 7 14 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus Response frame Slave Function Write start address mode address Write data CRC 16 2 1 1 2 2 bytes Client address The value from the command frame appears here This is the received function code In an error response frame H 80 is added to the received function code to indicate that it is an error Function code response Example Received function code H 06 Function code in error response frame H 86 Beginning Beginning address of write that was received address of write Written data Received operation command data This is a check code calculated from the client address to the data end For the calculation method see 7 2 Frames ll Command frame 6 Example of CRC 16 cal culation P 7 4 CRC 16 Response codes Function Error Cause code code 86 06 Variable address error The variable address is not H 0000 Error in written data H 03 Variable data error Incorrect command code or related informa tion The operation state does not permit writing e Write via communication is OFF disabled H Note that the command is received regardless of write via communication ON OFF i Cannot process H 04 Operation error P See explanation of commands in 7 9 Com mands and responses Communicatio
116. gt 1 1 2 2 2 The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 6 Writing to the variable area P 7 12 M Write setting data Communication Modbus Slave Function Write start Number of Byte Write data address mode address elements count Data Data 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes Datan Data n CRC 16 Most significant Least significant 2 Section 7 Communication Modbus Explanation mum Explanatio ou H 0600 to 060E H 0700 to 0744 H 0800 to 0818 H 0900 to 09DE H OAO0 to H OBOO to OB6E H OCOO to 0C20 H ODOO to 0D26 H OEO0 to OE60 H OFOO to OF20 H 1000 to 100E H 1100 to 110C Setting data of setting area 0 RUN level Adjustment level Adjustment level 2 Bank setting level PID setting level Approximation setting level Setting data of setting area 1 Input initial setting level Control initial setting level Control initial setting 2 level Alarm setting level Display adjustment level Communications setting level H 1200 to 1218 Special function setting level H 1300 to 1332 Expansion control setting level H 4000 added to above Same setting data as channel 1 addresses H 8000 added to above Same setting data as channel 1 addresses H C000 added to above 4 Same setting data as channel 1 addresses This command is used to write setting data The number of elements can be set from H 0004 to 0068 4 to 104 to allow succes
117. insulation between power supply input terminals power supply output terminals 3 The voltage output for I IWW L IL IL is 21 mA max A 2 Specifications E Unit performance specifications Thermocouple input Larger of 0 1 PV and 1 C 1 digit max Not using internal cold contact compensation Smaller of 0 196 FS and 1 C 1 digit max Indication accuracy Analog input 0 1 FS 1 digit max Platinum resistance temperature sensor input Larger of 0 1 PV and 0 5 C 1 digit max Position proportional potentiometer input 5 FS 1 digit max Standard control heating control or cooling control heating cooling control Standard control with remote SP 2 input type only Heating cooling control with remote SP 2 input type only Control mode Cascade standard control 2 input type only Cascade heating cooling control 2 input type only Ratio control 2 input type only Position proportional control control valve control type only Control period 0 2 to 99 0 seconds units of 0 1 seconds During time divided proportional control output Proportional band P D 0 00 to 999 99 FS units of 0 01 FS 3 Alarm setting range 1510055 Decimal point position depends on input type and decimal point position setting 20 MO or higher using 500 V DC insulation resistance tester 2000 V AC 50 60 Hz 1 min different pole charging terminals ME Vibration frequency 10 to
118. is explained below After a receiving a response from the controller have the host computer wait at least 5 ms before sending the next command 6 2 6 1 Communication method When writing multiple sets of setting data in a row such as when writing to the variable area or performing a compound write controlla bility may be affected Pay attention to the following points Maximum of 3 sets of setting data can be written Response 50 ms or higher 6 3 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 2 Frames Communication CompoWay F Based on CompoWay F protocol commands from the host computer and responses from the EBAR ER take the form of frames The data comprising command frames and response frames are explained below In the following explanation an H following a numeric value for example 02H indicates that the value is a hexadecimal number A number or letters enclosed in quotation marks for example 00 is an ASCII character E Command frame FINS mini STX Node No Sub address SID command text ETX BCC nl w v m 1 2 2 1 1 Tbyte BCC calculation range Code that indicates the beginning of the communi cation frame 02H Be sure to set this code in the leading byte This number specifies the destination Specify the Unit No of the E5AR ER When broadcasting to all units specify XX Hesponses are not sent to a broadcast Sub address Not used on the E5AR ER Be sure t
119. is selected 1 Connect the power supply 2 Connect the DC reference current voltage generator STV in the following precision digital meter DMM in the following and cold junction compen sator a ZERO CON is used as an example in the following to the input terminals of the thermocouple as shown below Leave open ZERO CON OUTPUT INPUT wire of selected thermocouple However for thermocouples E R S W and B compensating wire of thermocouple K is used 3 Turn on the power 4 Move to calibration level A 30 minute aging time begins Perform aging using this time as a guideline When 30 minutes elapses Display 2 will show O Note that you can proceed to the next stop before the display shows O Input types 2 4 7 8 10 14 5 Press the key to obtain the display at left The count value that was input will appear in Display 2 in hexadecimal Set the STV as follows NC Lt a For input types 2 4 7 8 10 and 14 53 mV P e For input types 3 5 6 11 12 and 13 22 mV Wait until the count in Display 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the s key This tentatively saves the calibration data at this point 6 Press the
120. key cel to obtain the display at left Set the STV to 6 mV Wait until the count in Display 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the s key This tentatively saves the calibration data at this point 9 3 Thermocouple input calibration D Li 2 2 m 7 Press the key to obtain the display at left 8 Change the wiring as shown below Open without connecting Short circuit x ZERO CON Compensating wire of selected thermocouple OUTPUT INPUT However for thermocouple E R S W and B compensating wire of thermocouple K is used Disconnect the STV and enable the thermocouple in the cold junction compensator Make sure that the STV is disconnected at this time 9 Wait until the count in Display 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the key This tentatively saves the calibration data at this point 10 Press the key to obtain the display at left Note that this display will not appear if not all of the required data has been tentatively saved Press the key Display 2 will show 555 Two seconds after the key is released or when the is pressed the tentatively saved calibration data is stored in n
121. l 1 i Appendix Setting list The setting list shows addresses for CompoWay F communication and Modbus communication Refer to the addresses of the protocol that you are using The hexadecimal values in the Setting monitor value column are the setting ranges in CompoWay F and Modbus and the values in parentheses are the actual setting ranges The monitor and setting values can be specified for each channel and addresses include a channel identifier The addresses in the variable area map are for channel 1 To specify addresses of other channels on a multi point input type refer to the table below Address Channel Address in setting list in Appendix Address in setting list in Appendix Address in setting list in Appendix 0100 Address in setting list in Appendix 4000 Address in setting list in Appendix 0200 Address in setting list in Appendix 8000 Address in setting list in Appendix 0300 Address in setting list in Appendix C000 A 6 Setting list ed 1ndul o ulpioooy 66666 01 66661 4698L000 H 0 1318 Uonnoexe 10 Jequunu xueq Jo dS 2001 L Ond e g c HUI ULHE V 0 yueg a ed indui o ulpioooy 66666 01 66661 3698L000 H 0 1318 4 X e 4 Z uu 1eddn wely 0 yueg LA T E e g Z njea uue y 0 yueg d 1ndui o ulpioooy
122. limit for PID control 1 1 Main Features of the EBAR ER Ample control modes and control functions M Outputs e Multi output High resolution 6 Control period Selection of a PID is possible not only by direct specification of the PID Set No in a bank but also by PID set automatic selection according to the present value and deviation Supports typical control modes standard control heating cooling control proportional control cascade control Note that proportional control and cascade control are only possible on 2 input types Floating control or closed control can be selected for position proportional types Floating control allows position proportional control without a potentiometer Remote SP Tvvo input types can use an external input for the set point SP ramp function This limits the amount of change of the set point based on the rate of change SP ramp value This function is useful for control applica tions such as firing ceramics where sudden changes in temperature are not desirable The E5AR ER allows an SP ramp rise value and fall value to be set separately Multi output supporting current output and voltage output pulse is available Hesolution of current output 0 to 20 mA Approx 54 000 resolution 4 to 20 mA Approx 43 000 resolution The control period can be set as short as 0 2 seconds allowing precise time sharing proportional control I Section 1 Overview 1 2 Part Names an
123. mA DC 500 0 max a Svvitch using output type setting ek OUT1 Current output 6 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max C 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max E5ER AB 500 Event inputs EV1 Current Voltage Switch using output type setting EV2 COM F e or o amp amp e eJelo TC Thermocouple Resistance thermocouple 2 2 How to Use the Terminals E5ER QT3DB FLK E5ER CT3DB FLK f 500 E53 ARB4 f 500 Event inputs E53 ARB4 100 240 VAC 100 240 VAC A Event inputs elof EV3 EV4 EV5 mae EV6 COM EVA sume EV5 EF o EV6 T Oo COM E53 ARQC3 E53 ARCC3 JOAO Voltage output 12 V 40 mA OUT1 14 Voltage output 12V40mAor TO Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max C Switch using output type setting J 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max _ 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max 1 4 Switch using output at 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch using output type setting SUB2 E53 ART2 ESER AB 500 E53 ART2 E5ER AB 500 2 Event inputs Event i
124. noise can also be reduced by using separate wiring ducts or shield lines Install surge absorbers or noise filters in devices near the product that generate noise in particular devices with an inductance component such as motors trans formers solenoids and magnetic coils If a noise filter is used for the power supply check the voltage and current and install the noise filter as close as possible to the product Separate the product as far as possible from devices generating strong high frequency noise e g high frequency welders and high frequency sewing machines or surges e Measurement Accuracy When extending the thermocouple lead wire be sure to use a compensating wire that matches the thermocouple type When extending the lead wire of the platinum resistance thermometer be sure to use wires that have low resistance and make sure that the resistances of the three lead wires are the same If the measurement accuracy is low check whether the input shift is set correctly Waterproofing The degree of protection is as shown below Front panel 166 P20 Terminas IPO VII About this Manual How to use the manual General explana Esen ana Explains the features part names tion of the EBAR ER and main functions of the EBAR ER Section 2 Preparations 7077 55 ine FARER Setup for operation mounting wiring initial Section 3 Typical Control Examples settings Section 4
125. not correct A temperature sensor that cannot be used with the Change to a temperature sensor that can be used with The temperature sensor has a broken wire a short circuit Replace the temperature sensor A temperature sensor is not connected Connect a temperature sensor A compensation wire compatible with the thermocouple is Directly connect a thermocouple with a long lead not being used Use a compatible compensation wire A metal device other than the thermocouple or Connect with a device that is designed for use with compensation wire is connected between the terminals of thermocouples the EBAR ER and thermocouple The terminal connection screws are loose resulting in a 1 Tighten the screws securely bad connection The lead or compensation wire of the thermocouple is too Use a thick compensation wire long and gives rise to resistance effects The 3 wires between the terminals of the EBAR ER and Use wires of the same resistance for terminals A B and B the platinum resistance temperature input sensor have different resistances The is receiving noise from peripheral devices Separate the E5AR ER from noise emitting devices nstall a surge absorber or noise filter in noise emitting devices The lead and power line of the temperature sensor are too Separate the lead from the power line close and induction noise is received from the power line Run the lead and power lin
126. of use 10 6 10 5 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal output 10 5 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal output 6 No control output No alarm output Possible cause Abnormal temperature measurement See 10 3 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal measured values P 10 4 Incorrect load polarity or incorrect terminal Wire correctly connections The connected load exceeds the output rating Do not exceed the rating Repair in the event of a failure A load power supply is not connected to a transistor Use a power supply suitable for the output rating output and load The polarity of the load power supply connected to Wire correctly the transistor output is incorrect Operation is stopped after the power is turned on e Send the control start run command after turning on the power Set operation to continue at power on When bank No specification is by event input input Hold the contact ON or OFF during specification ON or OFF is not held When bank No specification is by event input The latest specification takes priority regardless of specification by communication was attempted the bank No specification method The alarm mode is set to 0 No alarm Set the correct alarm mode Alarm with wait sequence is specified Specify an alarm without a wait sequence Deviation alarm is mistakenly set for absolute value Set the correct alarm mode alarm or vice versa 1 c
127. or open For control output 1 CH1 control output cooling or close For control output 2 CH1 SP 3 CH1 ramp SP 4 CH1 PV 5 CH1 control output ya Use this setting to assign output content to outputs heating or open For transfer output 6 CH1 control output cooling or close For transfer output 7 CH1 valve opening 8 CH2 control output heating For control output 9 CH2 control output cooling For control output 10 CH2 SP 11 CH2 ramp SP 12 CH2 PV 13 CH2 control output heating For transfer output 14 CH2 control output cooling For transfer output 15 Similarly CH3 17 to 23 CHA 25 to 31 The default value is set according to the control mode setting If transfer output is assigned to a bank output 3 to 8 in the case of CH1 the output will be OFF Control Transfer Control Transfer Control Transfer Control Transfer Control mode Input type output 1 output 2 output 3 output 4 2 assignment assignment assignment assignment Standard control Heating cooling control Hemote SP standard inputs 77 4mus 777 4inpus 17 Tiu Proportional control Cascade standard 2 inputs inputs control Cascade heating colling control l Position proportional 1 input control 10 8 46 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level lt Related setting data Reference Linear current output type Control initial sett
128. ouput Lii 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max 12V 21mA4 4 z Switch using output 4 EV3 ma o 2 OUT1 G 4 j EV3 type setting EV4 o o 3 Voltage output B H j EV4 OUTI 0 ON 12V 21 MA or sm 2 Current output T 6 EV5 a o 4 Current output 2 NE Evsa o 4 20 mA DC 500 max TET 4 20 mA DC 500 max E F G H 1 0 20 mA DC 500 O max EV6 e gt 5 0 20 mA DC 500 0 max EV6 Witch using outpu Switch usi tput t tting type setting COM 6 Suvitch using output type setting COM E53 ARCC E53 ARQC OUT4 D C D T IU t9 n 20 mA DU max Voltage output K 3 0 20 mA DC 500 Q 3 3 12V pi m k 7v7 output a 6 4 OUT3 4 type setting EE MN 6 Voltage output 12 V 5 OUT3 9 Input 1 a T 21 mA or Current output 6 Input 3 J gt Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max G V PT TC 4 20 mA DC 500 Q o 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max G Curent eg emosi 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max ub PT TC Switch using output type setting Fesslancethemanete NK Switch using output type setting Resistance K N 5 E5AR PRADF E5AR PRQ43DF FLK ESAR PA4F 500 f N E5AR PA4F 500 E5AR PA4E
129. per unit of time is set as the SP ramp rise value and SP ramp fall value When these are set to 0 the SP ramp function is disabled e The decimal point position of the SP ramp rise and fall values is determined by the selected sensor during temperature input and by the scaling during analog input Setting data Setting range Default value m I 5 EU sec EU min Setti 7751 ettin g SP ramp rise value 0 to 99999 0 OFF SP ramp fall value 0 to 99999 0 OFF 1 Depends on the SP ramp time unit setting The initial setting is EU min Related setting data Reference Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 Scaling input value 1 Scaling display value 1 Scaling input value 2 Scaling display value 2 Decimal point position Input initial setting level P 8 37 CH m MV at stop nu 5 MV at PV error nu t e On a standard type Manipulated variable at stop is set to the MV when operation is stopped On a position proportional controll type MV at stop is set to the position when operation is stopped Completely open Hold Completely closed On a standard type MV at PV error is set to the MV when an error occurs On a position proportional control type MV at stop is set to the position when an error occurs Completely open Hold Completely closed e Standard type a Control method Setting range Units Default value Setting Standard 5 0 to 105 0 00
130. period heat and then s press the key to select 0 2 Le MN Adjustment To adjust the PID constants run AT For more information see 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings P 4 19 If the overshoot of temperature control disturbance response is too large after placing the wafer the over shoot can be adjusted using the disturbance overshoot adjustment function For information on the disturbance overshoot adjustment function Refer to 5 2 Control functions P 5 8 3 4 3 2 Heating cooling control of a chemical reaction device 3 2 Heating cooling control of a chemical reaction device In temperature control of chemical processes where heat is naturally generated by chemical reactions heating output and natural cooling are not a sufficient means of control and thus heating cooling control is used whereby heating output and cooling output are simultaneously manipulated Heating cooling control is also used for high precision control of constant temperature tanks where the temperature is held at a constant level and for extraction molding where the molding material generates heat Heating cooling control can also be applied to pH control using acids and alkali in liquid mixture systems and to pressure control where pressure reduction is carried out E Application When the E5AR is used to control a chemical reaction device the control mode i
131. points are available for input 1 To use broken line approximation set Broken line approximation enable to ON the initial setting is OFF Broken line approximation includes the settings Broken line approxi mation 1 Inputs 1 to 20 and Broken line approximation 1 Outputs 1 to 20 Normalized data is used to set the values such that the lower limit of the input setting range for input 1 is 0 0000 and the upper limit is 1 000 6 Relation to input e Normalized data is used to set the values for broken line approxi types mation such that the lower limit of the input setting range for input 1 Broken ine is 0 0000 and the upper limit is 1 000 For example if the input type approximation 1 enabled of input 1 is J 2 20 0 to 400 0 C and the broken line approximation is to be applied to one point 210 0 C the values are set as follows Operation result Display value 400 0 C lt 1 000 Broken line approximation 1 Input 1 295 0 C lt 0 750 Broken line approximation 1 Output 1 20 0 C lt _0 000 0 000 0 500 1 000 20 0 C 210 0 C 400 0 C Broken line approximation 1 Input 1 0 000 Broken line approximation 1 Output 1 0 000 Broken line approximation 1 Input 2 0 500 Broken line approximation 1 Output 2 0
132. problems 10 8 o o o K o x Te E 10 1 i Section 10 Troubleshooting 10 1 Troubleshooting checklist If you encounter difficulty with the controller use the following checklist to solve the problem Check the display Check switches and wiring Check setting data Infer from conditions 10 2 Check the operating state of the E5AR ER as indicated by the display Error messages and indicators are explained in 10 2 Error messages P 10 3 If an error message appears refer to this section to solve the problem Check switch settings and wiring 6 Power supply e Is the power turned on Are the terminal voltages within the permitted ranges 6 Input type switch s the switch set to the correct setting for the sensor you are using e Wiring Are the terminal connections correct Are the polarities correct Are any wires loose Are any wires or cables broken or not making contact 6 Communication conditions Do the communication conditions match those of the host system If you are unable to identify the problem from the above or cannot solve the problem investigate in more detail Are the setting data correct e Check for restrictions on the function you are using See if the cause of the problem lies in your settings If you were not able to identify the cause of the problem by checking the above refer to the tabl
133. than 1 second less than 1 second Input Initial Setting Level Control Initial Setting Level Control Initial Setting 2 Level L I2 T Input 2 type g 0 19 I2DU Input 2 Temperature units G F o c o lt A 32 I3 T Input 3 type 0 19 SDU Input 3 Temperature units CEE 14 T Input 4 type 0 19 14DU Input 4 Temperature units 67 INP 1 Scaling input value 1 DSP 1 Scaling display value 1 19999 scaling display value 2 1 D Lt Z INP2 en Scaling input value 2 imn Scaling display value 1 DSP 2 Scaling display value 2 1599999 RSPH Lower limit of sensor setting range to upper limit of sensor setting range RSPL Lower limit of sensor setting range to upper limit of sensor setting range PV decimal point display OFF 0 ON 1 SNC z Sensor induction noise reduction n ce 50Hz 60Hz BA AMOV mat Move to advanced A less than 1 second function setting level 1999 9999 Password 169 3 1 4 input INIT Parameter initialization F OFF ON V ce O1 T Output 1 type Pulse voltage output 0 Linear current output 1 O3 T Output 3 type Pulse voltage output 0 Linear current output 1 C
134. the PID set selection data this is setting upper limit setting range x0 1 in the case of PV and setting range x1 1 in the case of DV The default value is normally 0 however on occasion the default value may also be the value clamped by the SP upper and lower limit This becomes the clamp value only when clamped by the SP upper and lower limit The default value is O This is remote SP in the case of the secondary loop of cascade control and local SP in all other cases Upper lower limit of sensor setting range and scaling display values 1 and 2 are initialized If Closed Floating is Float in position proportional control or if Operation at potentiometer input error is Continue this is initialized if the integral time is O This is the upper and lower limit of the sensor setting range For temperature input this is the range 4 20 mA Initialized only if the control mode is changed to ratio control Temperature Initializes to upper and lower limits of sensor setting range Analog Initializes to scaling display values 1 and 2 If the applicable channel is used for heating cooling control this is 100 otherwise it is 0 Therefore in cascade heating cooling control the primary loop is 0 and the secondary loop is 100 The corresponding alarm type numbers in all banks are initialized to O When the input type or control mode is changed and there are added channels scaling display values 1 and 2 and
135. the i Y SZ keys to set the value to 3 To use a bank specify it by event input key operation or communi cation Bank specification by key input 7 Press the key repeatediy to move to Adiustment level Display 3 Bank No shows Ad 8 Use the AI keys to select 2 to execute Bank No 2 Mi 2 9 Press the key repeatedly to move to RUN level and then press the ce key to move to PV SP Bank No I Section 5 Functions and Operations B SP limits SP setting upper limit B PID sets The SP setting upper and lower limits can be set within the input setting range If SP limits are set and the SP local SP falls outside the limits the SP will be changed to either the upper or lower SP limit Example Initially the SP is 200 C the SP setting upper limit is 300 C and the SP setting lower limit is 100 C If the SP setting upper limit is changed to 150 C the SP will fall outside of the SP limit range of 100 to 150 C and thus will be changed to 150 C If Input type Temperature units or scaling is c
136. uA 4 4 First order lag operation 1 Time constant adi em ux ju w m ww 4 t First order lag operation 2 Time constant L 2 ju r w Du Lt y First order lag operation 3 Time constant p w 4 ju w m w w 4 Pa mg First order lag operation 4 Time constant First order lag operation function is enabled These settings are used to set the time constant of the first order filter of each input Data after the first order lag filter elapses is shown below f e The filter is used to filter out noise elements in the input 8 22 8 5 Adjustment 2 level L Ade PV before filter N PV after filter Time constant Setting range Units Default value Setting 6 Related information M 5 1 Input adjustment functions Bl First order lag operation P 5 5 6 Related setting data First order lag operation Enable Control initial setting 2 level P 8 50 al w M d lt w 4 Move average 1 Move average count pum um VI Move average 2 Move average count al adi t 4 4 2 ju lt Lt Move average 3 Move average count Ya 4 AC ya ks Move average 4 Move average count 3 X j X Move average fun
137. upper limit SP lower limit a Setting Control mode 8 10 Control initial setting level N 71 e Use this setting to set upper and limits for the SP setting The SP can only be set between these limits Note that if the limits are changed and a previously set SP falls outside of the limits due to the change the SP will automatically change to the upper or lower limit f the input type and temperature units are changed the settings will change to the upper and lower limits of the sensor e he decimal point position depends on the selected sensor In the case of analog input the decimal point position is determined by the Decimal point position setting Default value Setting data Setting range Temperature SP lower limit 1 to upper limit of input range SP upper limit Analog SP lower limit 1 EU 1300 0 to smaller of 99999 and display value equivalent of input upper limit Temperature Lower limit of input range to SP upper limit 1 SP lower limit Analog Larger of 19999 and display value equivalent of input lower limit to SP upper limit 1 Related setting data Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 Input temperature units Input initial setting level P 8 37 P LE LOL Use this setting to select the control mode f e On single input or 4 input types select standard control or heating cooling control e On two inpu
138. used to select the type of alarms 1 through 4 Setting data Setting range Units Default value No alarm function Upper and lower limit alarm Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Upper and lower limit range alarm Upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence Upper limit alarm with standby sequence Lower limit alarm with standby sequence Absolute value upper limit alarm Absolute value lower limit alarm 10 Absolute value upper limit alarm with standby sequence 11 Absolute value lower limit alarm with standby sequence Related setting data Bank alarm value Bank setting level P 8 28 Bank alarm upper limit Bank alarm lower limit Bank setting level P 8 29 Auxiliary output assignment Control initial setting 2 level P 8 48 Alarm latch Alarm setting level P 8 55 Alarm hysteresis Alarm setting level P 8 56 Standby sequence restart Alarm setting level P 8 57 CH Alarm 1 latch Alarm 2 latch Alarm 3 latch Alarm 4 latch e Setting ME ux M Puy 4 4 Z J P bee Mee aa Yee md HE dm m 8 12 Alarm setting level 5 3 Alarm is assigned to auxiliary output and P nnm nm p nnm alarm type is set to other than No alarm When this setting is set to ON a latch function is added to the alarm function Once an alarm goes
139. using heating cooling control Input 1 is for the primary loop ch1 and input 2 is for the secondary loop ch2 4 7 Setting output parameters 4 7 Setting output parameters E Control period e The output period control period must be set A shorter control period improves controllability however when a relay is used to control a heater a control period of at least 20 seconds is recom mended to preserve product life After setting the control period in the initial settings readjust it as necessary using trial runs uj p Du e Set the values in 7 Control period heat and 2 22 Control period cool The default value is 20 0 sec e Control period cool can only be used in heating cooling control e When each channel is used independently for control set the control period separately for each channel E Direct operation cool Reverse operation heat e Control that increases the MV as the PV increases is called direct operation cool and control that increases the MV as the PV decreases is called reverse operation heat unm Lx jue cx Dur ju w J E ju w cx MV MV 100 100
140. 00000 H9 uei Bunjes Joyuou dd zl AOQE SE ulES Dunes Jd se ewes uowwog Z4d 2021 6 dd4d 60000000 H 8 IN V 80000000 H 4 8 0000000 9 1v 90000000 H s ST1V S0000000 H iz Y11V 70000000 H S H 0000000 H z dOLS 20000000H 1 NQH L0000000 H 0 440 00000000 H uou Dumes Lad 0021 0 NO 0 440 uou uonezi ennur Jojeure reg c a adh ejqeue enj pAjesS spun ipes S WoyUOW Bumes seinquny eyep Sum s ss ippv PH julod jeuuroeq ynejeq snqpoW Jj AeM oduio53 Goluoul uoreolunululoo Aq as sen eA ase sen eA senjeA 199 Ul pejeolpul H A Dunes uonounj peoueApy nl a 2 sola n q D c 7 P rr ut ww he r Lu mal mol r 2 41 be 2 4 px m D r at LL LC LC LUC Kal u Lb Ka UR n Li A 26 Setting list L NO p lqEu4 L0000000 H 0 440 pelgesiq 00000000 H n Lu YN uonounj 1ueuujsn pe 100 9 eoueginisiq L NO p lqeud L0000000 H 0 440 D lqEsiQ 00000000 H Lt Cg 10119 indui J 1 uuolu 1lod je uonejedo dn of 1 NO p lqEU4 L0000000 H 0 440 p lqesiq 00000000 H d a al UN m UN D NH 1e sse d
141. 0mAor adi t 3 m ag Current output EV5 a c 4 5 EV5 o 4 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 6 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max EV 5 j EV6 ma 5 Switch using output type setting COM 6 V 22 E53 ARCC3 vent inputs d Event inputs EV1 RS 485 BO 7 M Z EVI ra e 1 OUT2 A 2 Current output Er S EVA re m 2 4 20 mA 500 max I 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max s SOM Switch using output 4 4 type setting ioi A OUT r Current output T d i lt i 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max Te f V PT TC 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max v PT TK Current Voltage Thermocouple Switch using output Current Voltage Thermocouple Resistance thermometer type setting Resistance thermometer b A E5AR QC43DB FLK E5AR A4B 500 ESAR A4B 500 24 VACIDC 1100 240 VAC BB ois deci ette Qr 2 gt SUB Input power supply depends on the model SUB2 100 to 240 VAG M or 24 VAC DC no polarity do gt S SUB3 E53 ARQC3 O SUB4 2 B bu t E53 ARB4 OUT2 Event inputs Voltage output D 12V 40mA OUTI ENS 2 Voltage output EVA 9 12V 40 mA or Current output EV5 9 4 4 20 mA DC 500 O max F 0 20 MA DC 500 Q max EVO 5 Switch using output type se
142. 1 Eri n mn cn FI P seu z6 91 8 7 C 1 50000000 01 00000000 junoo abesene A0N esane e o 2080 0 2 1 a12 uoneorunuuuioo Buisn senjeA Huas 5 SOI z6 91 8 7 C 1 50000000 01 00000000 junoo es ne A0N z Geane AON 6 2 1 eye uoneoiunuuuoo Buisn senjeA Dunes mE seu z6 91 8 7 C 1 50000000 01 00000000 junoo eno Geane AON er 0 0 I 6 666 01 070 40 20000 01 00000000H juejsuoo uogejedo 1S4 9080 spuooeg ES 6666 01 070 40220000HH 01 00000000H juejsuoo uome1edo 15 13 E Spuooeg 0 0 6666 01 0 0 40 20000 01 00000000H juejsuoo eui z uogejedo 1S4 2080 spuodeg 6 666 01 070 40 20000 01 00000000H uowwog juejsuoo uull uogeJedo l pio sul Ls adh ejqeue en eA 19S s un en eA 103uouJ Bunjes Jojoejeu2 seinquny eyep Sum s ss ippv Sseippv ve juod jeuroeq nea snqpoN AENxOdulo2 4031u0UuJ uoPolunulu0 Aq 195 senj eA de senjeA JOWUOW SONJA 195 ui D TP LPUL H Z jueuusn py spuooeg gt Li mal QU i Lr En cn n zn n Dx gt Li I c DN Sal mel PM P Er c zn zn 4 g en eA Aejdsip Buipeog indui Bojeuy indui JO
143. 1 Disturbance overshoot adiustment 5 14 Disturbance overshoot adjustment function 5 14 8 80 Disturbance rectification band 8 21 Bod cr 1 6 ECNODACK TEST ea 7 29 End codes Communication CompoWay F 6 5 Error messages 10 3 EVOPEIDDHE n n 5 29 Event input allocation 5 29 8 47 Event inputs terminals 2 11 Expansion control setting level 8 72 A 27 Explanation of the keys 1 6 Extraction of square root operations 5 7 Extraction of square root low cut point 8 24 First order lag operation 5 5 First order lag operation enable 8 50 First order lag operation time constant 8 22 Forward reverse operation 8 44 Frames Communication CompoWay F 6 4 memos e er TREE 1 4 Function codes Communication Modbus 7 7 F nc on Key AAA 1 6 Function key 2 channel key 1 6 Heating cooling control 1 9 3 5 4 12 Heating cooling control with remote SP 1 9 4 12 pica 4 17 Hysteresis cooling 8 16 Hysteresis heating 8 16 Indicator control ranges A 4
144. 2 Control functions il Banks P 5 9 6 Related setting data PV SP Operation level P 8 7 CH Bank PID Set No 222 O to 7 Use this setting to store a PID Set No in each bank e The PID Set No of banks 0 to 7 can be stored e When the PID Set No is set to O the PID set auto select function automatically selects a PID set based on the PV or DV deviation If you wish to specify a PID set set the number of the PID set 1 to 8 Setting data Setting range Units Default value PID Set No 0 to 8 Setting 6 Related information 5 2 Control functions W Banks P 5 9 5 2 Control functions ll PID sets P 5 12 6 Related setting data PID proportional band PID Integral time PID derivative time PID setting level P 8 31 PID Automatic selection range upper limit PID setting level P 8 32 PID set automatic selection data Expansion control setting level P 8 74 8 27 I Section 8 Setting data CH Bank alarm 1 Bank alarm 2 Bank alarm 3 Bank alarm 4 O to 7 seo we we s 42 eae ju Li eS hos d 2 For pe pe Ls Alarm function is enabled Use this setting to store alarm values for alarms 1 to 4 in each bank 8 28 n Setting any e Set the values of alarms 1 to 4 in each of banks O to 7 Setting range Units Default value
145. 5 4 11 Using auxiliary 4 22 4 12 Starting and stopping controll 4 26 4 13 Performing manual control 4 28 4 14 Changing channels 4 30 4 15 Operational considerations 4 31 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 1 Setting levels and key operation The settings are grouped into levels and the set values are called setting data On the E5AR ER the settings are grouped into 17 levels as shown below When the power is turned on all indicators light up for 1 second The initial level after power on is RUN Povver on level Adjustment level Adjustment 2 level Bank setting level Blinks at Less than Less than Less than 1 seconds 1 seconds 1 seconds Less than RUN level 1 seconds via Less than Less than Less than K lhal 1 seconds 1 seconds 1 seconds Monitor item level PID setting level Approximation setting level 3 seconds 1 second Blinks at _ 1 seconds or longer Protect level o z ju ey ET 1 seconds or l
146. 500 Auxiliary outputs ESAR PA4F 500 Auxiliary outputs 24 VACIDC 100 240 VAC A B C D E Relay outputs Ci 7 100 240 VAC BTGTDTEZLLB Relay outputs Fe 1 am e 1 Lo Tq 07 I F a GNE NE ONE FT cM r b Do Input power supply depends 3 on the model 4 100 to 240 VAC Input power supply or 24 VAC DC no polarity depends 5 r on the model d E53 ARQC D 100 to 240 VAC 6 l 24 VAC D es 5 o A 1 N E53 ARB4 E OUT4 1 PUES Es ARB4 7 2 4o 1 Event inputs Voltage output 3 ol 1 GA Event inputs q E 12V 40 mA Pe 1 a jr ene See I 9 T 17 Er H oj Eue 0 t v 40mAor 7 AE i 4 s 3 7 ir Current output I 6 11 173 I 5 Doi EVS ace 4 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max a 5 Bo 4 6 5 0 20 mA 500 Q max H 6 Nt Eve e 5 Switch using output type setting Glenn EE COM 6 J COM 6 L E53 ARRR E5AR PA4F 500 i E53 ARRR3 ESAR PA4F 500 D D Potentiometer O D Potentiometer O D W W Ole 2 B elay outputs C C IE VAC 1A 3 2 ie r i i OUT2 a Closed 117 4 o iC i o G a mu lt L Ta OUT1 Open 0 9 iC 416 V PT TK V PT TK F Current Voltage Thermocouple Current Voltage
147. 55 Hz ST ees 150 m s relay contacts 100 m s 3 times each in 3 axes and 6 directions innab 100 to 240 V AC type 50 A max 24 V AC DC type 30 A max Approx 450 g unit only Fittings Approx 60 g E5AR U n Terminal cover Approx 30 g el Approx 330 g unit only Fittings Approx 60 g E5ER Terminal cover Approx 16 g Protective structure Front IP66 rear case IP20 terminal plate IPOO Memory protection Non volatile memory Write count 100 000 times 1 2 3 0 0 to 3999 9 s units of 0 1 second 0 01 to 99 99 FS units of 0 01 FS Manual reset value 0 0 to 100 0 units of 0 1 FS Integral time 1 0 0 to 3999 9 s units of 0 1 second ime K T N at 100 C max 2 C 1 digit max U and L 2 C 1 digit max B at 400 C max is not specified R and S at 200 C max 3 C 1 max W Larger of 0 8 PV and 3 C 1 digit max U and L 1 C 1 digit R and S at 200 C max 1 5 C 1 digit EU stands for Engineering Units and is regarded as the units after scaling In the case of a temperature sensor this is C or F A 3 i Appendix Sensor input setting ranges Indicator control ranges Specifica Setting Input setting range Display control range Au tion value o Platinum Pt100 200 0 to 850 0 300 0 to 1500 0 305 0 to 955 0 480 0 0 to 1680 0 resistance temperature Pt100 1 150 00 to 150 00 199 99 to 300 00 sensor 300 0 to 2300 0
148. 6 Ol 6666 L S Unuixeu Sup eBuei 5 Jo 9601 L 01 9601 L 3ndui Dopeuy indui Josuas jo ulpiA eDuej payloads indur eunjejedue 66666 01 6666 L S Uinuixeu Sup indui jum 4eddn peyioeds i IINH ut p pidsip joy Ad uui jeddn pue 5 oneuJojne 8 did 48V0 ZV00 v 66666 01 66661 46981000 H o 1318 SI Uunuixeui j9A9MOH 25 Jo 9201 0 04 L andui Bojeuy indui Josues jo eDueij payioads indui 1 ii E nonu su un sso sso adh ejqeueA MUI SN uolluouu um s eyep Bues asy saris ns juiod 640100 ynejeq snqpoly J AeM odujo5 edi indul o 6upioooy Zx 1uesaJg jo eDuej Aejdsip se ewes Ad ul saddn afues uonpejes ayewone g 14 8 9 pueq jeuonjodoud g did 37vo 4600 A 16 Setting list ed indul ay jo Hues y jo ssejpreDei iz s d indul eui 104 enjeA ynejep eu 7 p peBueuo s ed 1ndui v ueuw 1ndui jo siuur Jewo pue Jeddn o sezi eniu g od 1ndui Aq peuiuuejeq Z 6666 01 6661 0420000 091 1 84444 H ZH 09 L0000000 H ZH 09 00000000 yun eui uos ed 1ndui eui Aq se 1ndui Bojeue 104 61 01 GL pue indul JO pi 01 0 e1e s6un s ed 1ndu py muti jewejBumesuonunjpe
149. 666 01 070 60000 01 00000000 uonisod sso SS9J adh ajqeue Goluoul uoneoiunuuuJO09 Aq 195 senj eA senjeA JOWUOW senj eA 195 ui pepu I A Dunes did A 15 Appendix 00071 01 0000 pezi EuJ40U 3y 0 jue eninbe si 2407006 L 01 0 002 O 0700 1 01 0 002 d 1ndui jo eDejs Indu y u p pnioul si uoneuurxojdde eur juDrens e ueuMw uonounj uoneJedo eui 10 indul v uo peseq senjeA pezijeuou 199 suomounj uoneJedo v JO uoee JO sen eA 199 lE esau ky 666 6 01 666 L 0220000 H 01 LE844444H Gg 24 ozindino uogeuixoidde euy ueyoug 4980 2600 666 6 01 666 L 10220000H 01 LE844444 H 3 Lindino euj uexorg SrgO vzoo 666 6 01 666 1 40 20000 O 1684443 Gg 23 uowwog oz ndu uonewrxoudde euy ueyoug 9pg0 6200 666 6 01 666 10220000H 01 1284343 224 uouuo andu uoneuixoidde euj uexorg 0240 0100 666 6 0 666 1 40 20000 O 16844434 2295 uowwog zindino z uogeuixoidde euaufrens 3080 4000 6666 01 666 L 40 20000 01 16844444 H Z 25 yowwog iubens 0080 9000 6666 1 666 1 J0220000 H 01 E844444 H 225 jou zinduz uopeupoiddesupurens Yogo 9000 6666 Ol 666 L 40 20000 01 L 844444H 615 powo Indu z uogeuixoidde euj ju rens gogo vooo 666 6 01 666 L 40 20000 01 LE844444 H c 1ndjno uoneuuxoJdde eui
150. 750 Broken line approximation 1 Input 3 2 1 000 Broken line approximation 1 Output 3 1 000 l Default Setting data Setting range Pu Broken line OFF Disabled OFF approximation 1 enable ON Enabled Input Broken line pati 1 999 to 9 999 0 000 to Broken line approximation 1 Input 20 Broken line ADD ub 1 999 to 9 999 0 000 to Broken line approximation 1 Output 20 5 6 5 1 Input adjustment functions M Extraction of square root operations Square root extraction A extraction of square root operations is available for each input to allow operation 1 enabled direct input of the signal from a pressure differential flow meter To use square root extraction set Square root extraction enable to ON the initial setting is OFF e The square root extraction function includes the Low cut point setting such that when the result of the operation is below the low cut point the result is set to 0 The low cut point is set for each input using normalized data such that the lower limit of the input setting range is 0 000 and the upper limit is 1 000 Square root extraction operation o Vi jue cx w EA 11 Operation result Ue Sr 4 al jw sx jw u Low cut p
151. 7900 491 dS 1220 S xueg 9r00 491 dS 600 yueg 9600 491 dS 600 3ueg vc00 491 dS 600 z yueg OLOO 0 yueg se ewes y si Burmo eu L j 491 dS 600 yueg 66666 01 66661 4698 1000H 01 L3I8H22H H y uu uue e 0 xueg 66666 01 6666 I 36981000 H 01 L3I8JJJ4 H I t uui q ddn wieje 0 yueg 66666 01 66661 4698 1000HH 01 L3I8H22H H j y 0 yueg 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 pl De mal m m m m P nc r LZ x LT m Dx Ki Ki Dx D nc r LZ 66666 0 6666 L 36981000 H 01 L3 94444 H wli JOMO 0 Yue 66666 01 6666 iui jeddn were 0 yueg 66666 01 66661 enjeA uue e 0 yueg 66666 01 66661 c ywi amo wieje 0 yueg 66666 01 6666 1 Z inui uueje o yueg 66666 01 66661 c enjeA wee 0 xueg 66666 01 6666 L 3698 1000H 01 1218 1 1 1 H H JOMO ULHETE 0 yueg 7000 66666 01 66661 4698 1000HH 01 L3 94444 H uui uueje 0 xyueg 000 66666 01 66661 36981000 H 01 L3 94444 H 0 ueg c000 yel SUES yw Jeddn Bumes dS 0 jui Jamo Hues qS 497 dS 800 0 xueg 0000 uonoejes yueq Aeldsiq s uonisod en eA sseuppy sseippv 9 qeueA sees sen uodteusea wea qobu napon 3 fewoduoo Golluouu uoneoSiunuuuuoo Aq 195 senj eA de s njea JOWU
152. 83 End code that indicates the error Cyclical Redundancy Check This is a check code calcu CRC 16 lated from the client address to the end of the data Two bytes in hexadecimal 7 5 7 6 Section 7 Communication Modbus Error codes Communication Modbus End Error Description detection code priority Function code error Received an unused function code Variable address The variable area number specified in the variable address is error out of range The number of elements does not agree with the number of data items Number of elements x 2 does not agree with the byte count Variable data error The response length exceeds the communication buffer size The operation code or related information in an operation command is not correct The written data exceeds the setting range The setting information in the written data is not permitted in the current operation mode Write via communication is OFF disabled Attempted to write to setting data of setting area 1 from set ting area O H O4 Attempted to write to protect setting data from other than 4 protect level AT is running User calibration in progress Cannot process the operation command Unit error unit change display unit error internal non vola tile memory error Operation error No response In the following cases the received command is not processed and a response is not returned For this reason a tim
153. 9 999 DOJW Disturbance judgement width 99 99 99 99 1 Position proportional type Closed Hold Open 1 0 1 rT o v less than 1 second Adjustment 2 Level LAde LAGP 1 First order lag operation 1 Time constant 0 0 999 9 LAGP 2 First order lag operation 2 Time constant 0 0 999 9 LAGP 3 First order lag operation 3 Time constant 0 0 999 9 LAGP 4 First order lag operation 4 Time constant 0 0 999 9 MAVP 1 Move average 1 Move average count 1 2 4 8 16 32 MAVP2 Move average 2 Move average count 1 2 4 8 16 32 MAVP33 Move average 3 Move average count 1 2 4 8 16 32 pu MAVP 4 Move average 4 Move average count 11 2 4 8 16 32 SQRP 1 Extraction of square root 1 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 SQRP2 Extraction of square root 2 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 SQRP3 Extraction of square root 3 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 SQRPA Extraction of square root 4 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 AP 1 Analog parameter Control rate 1 999 9 999 po key 3 seconds or more Control stops For the input initial setting level see page A 32 Adjustment level Adjustment 2 level Control initial setting 2 level Control initial setting level Special function setting level E
154. Advanced function setting level Enter a password to move to Advanced function setting level The password is set to 169 After entering 169 press the ce key or wait two seconds and you will move to Advanced function setting level Setting range Units Default value 1999 to 9999 Setting Related setting data M Initial setting protect Protect level P 8 3 8 40 8 10 Control initial setting level 2 8 10 Control initial setting level This level contains initial settings for control such as the control method as well as the output type SP limit control mode direct reverse action and closed floating settings Power on Operation level Adiustment Adjustment 2 level level Bank setting PID setting level Approximation setting key Less idi key Less L hdc key Less key Less key Less level than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second key less than 1 second key key 1 second or 3 seconds more Communication Input initial setting Control initial setting gt Control initial setting Alarm setting Display adjustment setting level E key Less level EN key Less 2 le
155. Alarm 1 4 latch The initial setting is OFF B Close in alarm Open in alarm Auxlliarv output 1 open in alam e When close in alarm is selected an alarm output state is output as ri 4 is When open in alarm is selected the alarm output state is inverted 2 alarm before output Ww A Close in alarm Open in alarm is set separately for each auxiliary output in Auxiliary output 1 4 non exiting i 2 val pam Lec Eee The initial setting is 4 5 Close in alarm Auxiliary Setting data output function Close in Auxiliary Operation output indicator alarm a o or Of peninalam ON OFF n e When the power is turned off and for about 2 seconds after the povver is turned on the auxiliary outputs are OFF open Alarm operation e The following example summarizes alarm operation Lower limit summary alarm standby sequence and Close in alarm are selected Alarm type With lower limit standby sequence waww amr al l Alarm hysteresis arm value 3 r l ee PV i Time Cancel standby sequence Alarm output function OFF 2 LU ON closed Alarm output ort pen 5 27 i Section 5 Functions and Operations Display Setting data Level characters name Display 3 Alarms 1 to 4 75 s
156. Bank setting level en a oa 8 26 8 7 PID setting level HP EE 8 30 8 8 Approximation setting level 0560 8 33 8 9 Input initial setting level Dr 8 35 8 10 Control initial setting level 5520000600 8 41 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level L 8 45 8 12 Alarm setting level 00 8 53 8 13 Display adjustment level ub MT 8 59 8 14 Communication setting level 5 5 8 63 8 15 Advanced function setting level L AAF 8 67 8 16 Expansion control setting level LEME 8 72 Section 9 User calibration 9 1 Setting data for user calibration 9 2 9 2 WSC CANDIANOMN a b b lich aUe a a e 9 4 9 3 Thermocouple input calibration s s 9 5 9 4 Anal69 inp rcal bratlon aeuo aaa AA da AL ra ee dovute 9 8 9 5 Resistance temperature input sensor calibration 9 10 90 06 Out DUE CcallDEBOEE uuo e uito toe b On Dese Eoo ak 9 12 9 7 Inspecting indicator accuracy 9 13 Section 10 Troubleshooting 10 1 Troubleshooting checklist
157. Bit position Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 5 Reading the variable area P 6 9 E Monitor value setting data compound store read 6 20 Response This is used to read by a single command the multiple monitor values or setting data items that were stored using Monitor value setting data compound read store write This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 If an area type error or a setting data error occurs in any of the data being read no data will be read SRC Response code Variable type Data KAK E 0000 Monitor value Setting data Variable type Data Monitor value Setting data Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 5 Reading the variable area P 6 9 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F B Write via communication Hesponse Instruction Related MRC SRC code information vvl Related information 00 VVrite via communication disable VVrite via communication enable This command is used to enable or disable Write via communication When sent it changes the set value of Write via communication When write via communication is disabled communication cannot be used to write setting data or send operation commands such as Run Stop The initial setting is disabled This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 MRC SRC Response
158. Cat No 2182 1 02 E5AR E5ER Digital Controller USER MANUAL Introduction OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual This manual describes the functions performance and application methods needed for optimum use of the E5AR E5ER Digital Controllers Please observe the following items when using the E5AR E5ER Digital Controllers e This product is designed for use by qualified personnel with a knowledge of electrical systems e Read this manual carefully and make sure you understand it well to ensure that you are using the EBAR E5ER Digital Controllers correctly Keep this manual in a safe location so that it is available for reference when required Precaution in using the product Before using the Controller under the following conditions make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the Controller are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms and also consult your OMRON representative e Using the Controller under conditions which are not described in the manual Applying the Controller to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amusement machines safety equipment and other systems machines and equipment e Applying the C
159. Decimal point position are not initialized A 29 o lt Appendix Setting data list Power on Operation Level PV Manual MV Position proportional control type PV Valve opening PV SP Display 1 PV SP bank No PV SP Display 2 Present SP MV V SP Display 3 resent SP bank No RSP Remote SP monitor SP M Ramp SP monitor O MV monitor heating C O MV monitor cooling V M Valve opening monitor 5 R S RUN STOP R A A M AUTO MANU Ruta 1 In manual mode 2 One of the following is displayed depending on the Display screen selection setting 1 Display 1 Display 2 2 Display 2 Display 3 3 Display 1 only 4 Display 2 only A 30 Protect Levels OAPT Operation Adjustment Protect 0 4 IGPT Initial setting protect 0 2 WTPT Setting change protect OFF 0 ON 1 mir ce PFPT PF key protect FF OFF 0 ON 1 At least 3 seconds E Lit n na m r Lr 4 4 ama n Lt 101 el r Ft 23 Ey 4 o E SE ule T
160. H plou 0 00000000 uedo l ldulo2 44444444 H 0401 01 0 SOL V LF00000 H 01 948 1 1 1 1 1 H 1009 yea 0G01 01 0 S VLEO0000 H 01 39444444 H pJepueis 1002 1804 p1epueis 10119 Ad 1 AW Jeuonuodoud uonisod dois 1e AN 1002 yeay p1epueis dois 1e AN LECCE Dx x Dx uonounj dwel qS pagesia 0 66666 01 46981 000 01 00000000 H enj eA e dwel dS ed 1ndui fizi o Buipio55v ed 1ndui ng o Buipio55v IN LECCE a X lt E rw E uooun dwel qS pelqesiq 0 66666 01 0 4698 1000 H 01 00000000 H z 410 13 20000000 1 IN uttu f13 L0000000 H 0 S 205 13 00000000 x UN UN HO en eA esu dues dS nun euun dwel dS 80 EA LZ o pe LZ 0102 170 80000000 91 L0000000 H mal 00 55 22 dn of HO sisoJo1s u SOlO u dO 0 c 1 lt EA 0 0L 91 170 v9000000 H 01 L0000000 H 2 pueq euonJodoud uonisogd spuooeg 00c EA EA I m Dx 1 P p 2 0166 2 0 AGE00000 H 01 20000000 N gt Li HO J o09 ponad 1onuo2 spuooeg 0 0c 1 q x zn ni 2J L2 0166 01 2 0 AGE00000 H 91 20000000 UN m gt Dx HO 1
161. IM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted INNO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not d
162. Inferring causes from conditions 10 4 Initial setting examples 4 5 Initial setting protect 5 24 Initialization due to setting changes A 28 Initialize settings 6 27 7 27 IDE SAUTE oo b dus 5 2 8 20 POUT CITOL uu uuu achaxteu otis odd retia 10 3 Input initial setting level 8 35 A 17 n ULU Beni 4 8 8 36 Input type switch error 10 3 Input output configuration 1 7 Inputs terminals 2 8 Inspecting indicator accuracy 9 13 Installation procedure 2 3 Insulation blocks 2 14 Integral time 8 31 Key operation event input 5 29 BAUR s X 0 1 6 ML CV e e ap ad d 4 20 Limit cycle MV amplitude 8 78 Limitations during SP ramp 5 9 Linear current output output type 8 42 List of service communication CompoWay F 6 6 Localo P bab 5 9 8 27 Location of input type switch 1 8 MANU operation indicator 1 5 Mahinal RE 4 28 Manual mode 4 28 Manual ca ma a n bi 8 5 Manual MV initial va
163. L nc key less than 1 second key less than 1 second than 1 sec than 1 second 77 PID setting lt Bank setting level level L LET key less ove L Prd key less L ha than 1 second than 1 second C Control in progress q m om m om m mm um Gm Gm m u um cm um im Gm im m m Adjustment 2 level MAVP Moveaverage4 Move average count 1 2 4 8 16 32 LAGP 1 First order lag operation 1 Time constant 010699919 SQRP1 Extraction of square root 1 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 LAGP2 First order lag operation 2 Time constant 0 0 999 9 SQRP2 Extraction of square root 2 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 LAGP3 First order lag operation 3 Time constant 010699919 SQRP33 Extraction of square root 3 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 LAGPA First order lag operation 4 Time constant 0 0 999 9 SQRP4 Extraction of square root 4 Low cut point 0 000 9 999 MAVP Move average 1 Move average count 1 2 4 8 1 6 32 co AP 1 Analog parameter Control rate 1 999 9 999 z 2 m MAVP Moveaverage2 r Move average count 11 2 4 8 16 32 co MAVP Moveaverage3 Move average count 1 2 4 8 1 6 32 je
164. LY00000 H 01 00000000 H 1009 yE H epis u do Jo epis 1eeH L 0 0 0 00L 0O01L0018 VL00000H 01 30424224 H pJepueis indino 021400 ng ed 1ndui uo spuedeq L c enjeA Aejdsip Suleos Bolgue 66666 01 66661 4698 L000 H 01 L3183244H eBuei Huas Josuas jo oDuei Dunes 10sues JO jum 1 ywi jeddn o eHues 10sues JO JWI JOMO7 juu Jeddn Bues YS oi uui Jamo Humes YS juu Jeddn Bues dS oi uu Humes YS Setting list 13 edA 1ndui uo spu d q Ad en eA 1uesaJg Na ed 1ndui uo spu d q 0 002 0 00 L 13 ed 1ndui uo spu d q 0 002 0 0081 3ui eddn syun uonisod jurod jeuiroeq nd no jeJsueJ en eA uoluoul Bumes sp 666 01 1 600000 10000000 H ouR L 0600 0930 0 NO 0 440 uomeJgi eo 4010 A asao 3200 21 L NO 0 4 10000000 00000000 p lqeu uoneuurxo4dde eui uexoJg OS30 4c00 L NO 0 440 VOO00000 H 00000000 p lqeu c uoneuuixojJdde eui 1uDreas 9440 4200 L NO 0 440 L NO 0 440 L NO 0 440 10000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 H p lqeu uoneulxoldde ulubiens p lqeu r 1001 5 jo uoloeux44 p lqeu 100 eJenbs jo uonoeJ1x3 t930 Ve00 1200 L
165. NS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this document has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions Precautions Definition of Safety Notices and Information The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of the product The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety Always read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions The following notation is used Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not A Caution avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage Symbols General Caution Indicates non specific general cautions warnings and dangers Caution Electrical Shock Caution Indicates possibility of electric shock under spe cific conditions General Prohibition Prohibition Indica
166. O1 T Linear current output 1 type 0 20 mA 0 4 20 mA 1 CO2 T Linear current output 2 type 0 20 mA 0 4 20 mA 1 CO3 T Linear current output 3 type 0 20 mA 0 4 20 mA 1 CO4 T Linear current output 4 type 0 20 mA 0 4 20 mA 1 SL H SP upper limit 1 SL L SP lower limit 2 MODE Control mode 3 OREV Forward reverse operation Reverse OR R Forward OR D CLFL Closed Floating Floating FLOAT Closed CLOSE 1 Temperature SP lower limit 1 to upper limit of Sensor setting range 2 Temperature Lower limit of sensor setting range to SP upperlimit 1 Standard 0 heating or cooling 1 Standard 0 heating or cooling 1 Standard with remote SP 2 Heating or cooling 3 with remote SP Proportional 4 Cascade standard 5 Cascade heating or cooling 6 Advanced Function less than 1 second Setting Level 4 LEAF BE PF1 PF1 setting 1 OFF RUN STOP R S ALLR ALLS AT BANK A M PFDP c PF2 PF2 setting OFF RUN STOP R S ALLR ALLS AT BANK A M PFDP PE4 g PF1 monitor Setting item 1 0 19 PF1 2 PF1 monitor Setting item 2 il PF2 1 PF2 monitor Setting item 1 1 0 19 PF2 2 PF2 monitor Setting item 2 IRE gt r PF2 5 PF2 monitor 1 Setting item 5 0 19 CH N Number of enabled channels
167. OW SONJA 195 ui pajeoilpul H Dumes yueg im n 3698 V000H 9 131 84 3698 V000H 9 13184 346981000 9 1318 36981000 01 131 8 1 36981000 01 131 84 mo Ti 1 1 ad indui o Buipioooy adh idul o Buipioooy adh indul o 2 d idul o Buipioooy adh idul o Buipioooy adh indul o Buipioooy adh ndu o Buipioooy x e 1 Dx LI LA a TN DON r mo 1 A i A i A i VG ong E mz 7 XC XC 7 I X Dx Dx Dx Dx 2 Ta rr ZI nc r LZ x i i A i i P LZ Pay En En a En A on rem 2 m m A i m P r LZ n adh idul o Buipioooy 507 adh 1ndui o Buipioooy adh idul o Buipioooy adh indul o Buipioooy d idul o Buipioooy 5 ed Indu o upiloooy 14 Setting list 10448 1ndul 1 1 je sdo s uorejedo p solo Spuooeg i Jeuoniodoud uollsoq 009 2 pyepuels euun ebau Ald 66 066 01 1070 46991000H 01 10000000H euonodoid uotisog 66666 01 0070 46981000 H S4 Z O 00000000 H 1002 1E H piepue S
168. P 0 00 During stop during Manipulated variable at stop output During MV at PV error output Setting data Setting range Units Default value e MV change rate limit heat 0 0 to 100 0 sec 00 Setting MV change rate limit cooling 0 0 to 100 0 isec 00 6 Related setting data PID Proportional band PID setting level P 8 31 MV change rate limit mode Expansion control setting level P 8 78 8 19 I Section 8 Setting data CH Input value 1 for input correction Input shift 1 Input value 2 for input correction Input shift 2 Lt na aa Lv Ln L8 Pe bo 4 g g Moe Mog Input shift can be performed at any two points f e Setting 8 20 These settings are used to set input shift 1 and input shift 2 for any two points input value 1 for input correction and input value 2 for input correction two point correction Present value PV Adiustment value 2 1 300 Before adjustment 200 Adjustment value 1 Input 200 0 1 000 1 300 Input value 1 Input value 2 Setting data Setting range Units Default value Input value 1 for input 19999 to 99999 1 PE 200 0 correction Input shift 1 199 99 to 999 99 EU 000 5 19999 to 99999 1 EN 1300 0 correction Input shift 2 199 99 to 999 99 EU 000 1 The decimal point position will vary depending on the input type 2 f the input type is change
169. Related information 4 13 Performing manual control P 4 28 Related setting data Manual MV Operation level P 8 5 8 77 I Section 8 Setting data CH me MV change rate limit mode arin Use this setting to select Mode 0 or Mode 1 for the MV change rate limit e When Mode 1 is selected the MV change rate limit only functions with respect to increases in the MV Settingrange Units 1 Mode 1 Setting Related information s 5 2 Control functions W PID sets P 5 12 Related setting data MV change rate limit heat MV change rate limit cooling Adjustment level P 8 19 CH M AT calculated gain HE L AT hysteresis HE H Control mode key heating cooling control Limit cycle MV amplitude and position X proportional control floating During cascade heating cooling Temporary A T execution judgement deviation EHE control only channel 1 is displayed These settings are normally used at the default values AT calculated gain specifies the gain used when PID values are calculated during AT A smaller gain provides greater adaptability while a larger gain provides greater stability AT hysteresis is used to set the value of hysteresis for ON OFF switching during the limit cycle while AT is being run e Limit cycle MV amplitude is used to set the MV
170. SP of 12 0 kg s 3 5 Ratio control of dyeing machines E Adjustment To adjust the PID constants run AT For more information see 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings P 4 19 To change the proportion change Proportion setting AP1 On the E5AR ER use normalized numbers for approxi mation settings such as broken line and straight line approximation For example use 0 200 for 2096 Also if input 1 is K 200 0 to 1300 0 C use 0 0 000 for 200 0 C and 100 1 000 for 1300 0 C 3 21 i Section 3 Typical Control Examples o S lt O um O gt OLLI gt 3 22 Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 1 Setting levels and key operation 4 2 SObLValliGS u Aaaa ALA 4 4 4 3 Initial setting examples 4 5 4 4 Setting the input type 4 8 4 5 Selecting the temperature units 4 11 4 6 Selecting the control mode 4 12 b 4 7 Setting output parameters 4 13 25 4 8 Setting and changing the SP 4 16 Pus 4 9 Performing ON OFF control 4 17 25 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings 4 19 5
171. SUAS Jo swij JOMO pue 1eddn S indui SAO O Se pezi eniui eue sBun s peDueuo si en eA Kejdsip Buijeos Jo yun eu1nye1eduue adA 1ndui v Z uedo apeosey epouJ dS e207 pesoJo epeose epoui dS 10 o3uoo epeose2 u 66 66 0166 66 020000 H o1 148d4dd4H A P HO Uumpm1ueueDpn eoueqinisiq vyo 2200 666 6 0 00070 40720000 H 0100000000H 4 97 HO Puequoneounoe aoueqimsiq zpZ0 1200 19 66 66 01 1070 30 20000 91 10000000 H 339 HO juejsuoo eui eouequnisid 0200 00 1 0 0071 v9000000 H 01 26344444H P HO ureb eoueqinisiq 4620 3100 c uonoeuoojndu 0620 8100 uonooeJ109 1011 JO Z enjeA 1ndu 3270 1100 c 00 66 666 66 661 698 L000H Ol L3I8223434 H 1ndui Cx 0100 o Buipio55v 0 61 66666 01 66661 16981000 H 01 1318 n o 66666 01 6666 1 4698 L000 H 01 1414 1 1 I H HO ee 66 666 0 66 661 46991000H o 318224 Zar u no nio ind l F r TN uonooeJ100 1ndul JO enjeA 1ndu 2 0 SLOO d enpAieg spun Heise Joyuow Jayoereu senquiy ejep Bunies PRVI id yulod euuioeq ynejeq sngpoIN J AeM odujo5 ed A 1ndui x 0 00c A 13 Appendix Uonnoexe JO Jequunu xueg y Wee 7 xueg 3060 4900 491 dS Je90 7 xueg Z900 491 dS 600 9 yueg
172. Setting data Setting range Units Default value 1 Automatic selec tion range upper 10 to 110 of setting range EU 1450 0 Setting limit Analog type 10 to 110 of scaling display value range The maximum is 19999 to 99999 6 Related information m 5 2 Control functions W Banks P 5 9 uz 5 2 Control functions IB PID sets P 5 12 Related setting data PID set automatic selection data Expansion control setting level P 8 74 8 32 8 8 Approximation setting level L EL This level contains straight line and broken line approximation settings These settings only appear if enabled in Control initial setting 2 level Power on mom oum um um m m um um um um omm oum um umo umb Gub Guo Go RED GE GA RED GS A Operation level gt V 7 7 77 a l lteyless s L Ad key less 57 than 1 second than 1 second key less key less than 1 sec than 1 second s 2 d PID setting Bank setting level fk EELJ rey less level E Prd key less level por s than 1 second than 1 second SI1 1 Straight line approximation 1 Input 1 1 999 9 999 SI2 1 Straight line approximation 1 Input 2 1 999 9 999 SO1 1 Straight line approximation 1 Output 1 1 999 9 999 S02 1 Straighi line approximation 1
173. T is running Calibration level in progress Unit error unit change display unit error internal non volatile memory error 2203 Operation error 6 10 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F Operation commands are sent using the following FINS mini command text format FINS mini command text Instruction Related MRC SRC code information 2 2 2 Explanation MRC SRC Specify the FINS mini operation command Operation code Specify an operation code 2 Related information Specify information related to the command Operation commands for the EBAR ER are shown in the following Operation Related information Description code communication 1 ON Enabled 03 AT run 0103 F 2 0 Currently selected PID Set No 1 to 8 PID Set No 04 Write mode 07 0 Backup mode 1 RAM write mode Move to protect level oe G NU a o rem fonar U Yandim 1 Manual mode s si ee i Rs qe SP mode 0to3 F 2 0 LSP 1 RSP 1 Operates for all channels 2 Specify for each channel 0 CH1 1 CH2 2 CH3 3 CH4 F All channels A software reset will not respond no service PDU response When all channels are specified only enabled channels will respond and processing will begin from Channel 1 If an error is detected on any one channel an Operation error will result If all channels end normally Normal end results When cas
174. Tentative A T execute judgment deviation 0 0 100 0 RBMP Bumpless at Run Disable OFF Enable ON PMEC Operation at potentiometer input error Stop OFF Continue ON DOST Disturbance overshoot adjustment function OFF ON 1 Heating cooling control CH Operation at power ON CH SP tracking p n Setting Setting y 8 16 Expansion control setting level L EuL AC e Select Continue Stop or Manual mode for operation after the power is turned on Operation after a software reset or when moving from Initial setting level to Operation level is also determined by this setting Hau Manual mode Related information 4 12 Starting and stopping control P 4 26 kr x Standard control vvith remote SP cascade control or proportional control This setting is used to specify operation when switching from remote SP mode to local SP mode e When remote SP tracking is enabled ON the value of the remote SP is transferred to the local SP e When remote SP tracking is disabled OFF the local SP is not affected by the remote SP Setting range Units Default value FF Disable Enable 6 Related setting data Control mode Control initial setting level P 8 43 SP mode Adjustment level P 8 14 8 73 I Section 8 Setting data CH PID set automatic selection data PID set automatic selection hy
175. Thermocouple Resistance thermometer Resistance thermometer MS J 2 7 Section 2 Preparations IM ESER E5ER Q4B E5ER AB 500 A B E53 ARR4 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC 1 pe Auxiliary outputs te AE tb Relay output ru H B Relay outputs eel B AY COM SM 3 lt 2 9 5 1 Al 11 3 r sug Input power supply F sl depends on the model 9 COM 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC B Opr H SUB no polarity 11 s SUBA leki E 4A d 2 654 Ew 53 500 Event inputs EV e O OUT2 EV2 Ha 2 Voltage output 12V 40 mA E nm OUT 47 2 12 Voltage output Llc 12V 40 mA or SEM er Current output qu 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max p 9 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Current Voltage Thermocouple Switch using output type setting Resistance thermometer x J N E5ER Q43B FLK Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Mh using output type setting 2 E5ER AB 500 EV2 M Event inputs EV1 COM 1 1 1 b 1 1 018 I d c LA V PT TC Current Voltage Thermocoup Resistance thermometer E5ER AB 500 E53 ARR4 100 240 VAC Auxiliary outp
176. This setting can be used when the alarm type is other than none Upper and lower limit alarm Upper and lower limit range alarm or Upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence Related setting data Alarm type Alarm setting level P 8 54 Alarm latch Alarm setting level P 8 55 Alarm hysteresis Alarm setting level P 8 56 Standby sequence restart Alarm setting level P 8 57 Auxiliary output non exciting Alarm setting level P 8 58 CH Bank alarm upper limit 1 Bank alarm upper limit 2 Bank alarm upper limit 3 Bank alarm upper limit 4 O to 7 wv e a 8 6 Bank setting level 5 HL dH Bank alarm lower limit 1 AL iL HL CH Bank alarm lowerlimit2 Abel HL 3H Bank alarm lower limit 3 AL 3L ilia rin HH Bank alarm lower limit 4 AL VL lovver limit alarm If an alarm mode with upper and lower limit settings is selected for Alarm 1 type through Alarm 4 type the upper limit and lower limit are set separately m n Setting m e Set the upper and lower limits of alarms 1 to 4 in banks 0 to 7 For temperature input the decimal point position will depend on the selected sensor For analog input the position is set using the Decimal point position setting Units Default value 19999 to 99999 This setting can be used when the alarm type is Upper and lower limit alarm Upper and lower limit range al
177. Units Default value B 7 o9 1 Setting Communication speed na e After changing the communication speed setting execute a software reset or turn the power off and on to make the change effective n Setting range Units Default value m Setting Oog e s o 8 64 8 14 Communication setting level 5 5 Communication data length LEn Protocol is CompoWay F e After changing the communication data length setting execute a software reset or turn the power off and on to make the change effective Setting range Units Default value Setting Communication stop bit SaL E Protocol is CompoWay F e After changing the communication stop bit setting execute a software reset or turn the power off and on to make the change effective Setting range Units Default value a Setting Lc Communication parity FEES e After changing the communication parity setting execute a software reset or turn the power off and on to make the change effective Setting range Units Default value 3 van E None wen Even Setting ida Odd 8 65 I Section 8 Setting data Transmission wait time Sate e After changing the transmission wait time setting execute a software reset or turn the power off and on to make the change effective Setting range Units Default value a Setting 8 66 mau 8 15 Advanced function setting level L Aa 8 15 Advanced function setting level
178. When using PID control in addition to the Proportional band P Integral time 1 and Derivative time D settings the Cooling coefficient and Dead band settings must be configured The PID constants can be set using AT Auto tuning or manually while the Cooling coefficient and Dead band must be set manually When the proportional band P is set to 0 0026 control becomes ON OFF control and 3 position control is possible The following control modes can only be selected on 2 input types e Standard control vvith remote SP Heating cooling o control with remote SP Ratio control 6 Cascade standard control 6 Cascade heating cooling control R An external DC current or voltage signal is input into the remote SP input input 2 and standard control is performed using the remote SP input as the SP Input 2 can be used within the permitted setting range determined by the input 2 type An external DC current or voltage signal is input into the remote SP input input 2 and heating cooling control is performed using the remote SP input as the SP Input 2 can be used within the permitted setting range determined by the input 2 type Ratio control is used to maintain a set proportional relationship between two variables Cascade control is performed using standard control Input 1 is for the primary loop ch1 and input 2 is for the secondary loop ch2 Cascade control is performed
179. a cannot be performed Note that setting data that cannot be written can still be read In setting area 1 control is stopped This makes it possible to perform operations such as writing initial setting data which are not possible in setting area 0 When the power is turned on setting area 0 is selected To access setting area 1 use the Move to setting area 1 operation command To return to setting area 0 from setting area 1 turn off the power or use the Software reset operation command Software reset instruction Setting area 0 Move to setting Setting area 1 area 1 instruction Control in progress Control stop Variable 52 lc C6 RNNee 7 Adjstmentlevel Setting area C8 Adjustment level During control CA j PiDsetinglwe CB Approximation setting level CC Iutmialsetinleve CD Control initial setting Control initial setting 21eve Alarm setting level Setting area 1 DO Display adjusimentievel Control stop Di Communications setting leve Special function setting level Da Expansion control setting leve C6 C7 C8 CA CB CC CD CE CF D1 D2 D3 6 13 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F The E5AR ER provides a set of applied commands that make use of variable area read write commands operation commands and other services provided by the
180. abled communication cannot be used to write setting data or send operation commands such as Run Stop The initial setting is disabled This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 E Control Run Control Stop Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Related o Rm Rm Run Run Run Run Run This is used to run or stop control H F1 This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 7 21 Section 7 Communication Modbus Response M Bank change 7 22 Response VVhen the control mode is set to cascade control perform the Run Stop operation command of channel 2 If All channels are selected only those that are enabled will be affected by this command To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 2 2 2 bytes E The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 Slave Function Wri
181. al as follows e Input type 0 390 Q e Input type 1 160 Q 6 Wait until the count in Display 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the key This tentatively saves the calibration data at this point 9 10 9 5 Resistance temperature input sensor calibration Input type 0 7 Press the ce to obtain the display at left Set the 6 dial as follows Input type 20 O e Input type 1 40 Q 8 Wait until the count in Display 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the 2 key This tentatively saves the calibration data at this point 9 Press the ce key to obtain the display at left Note that this display will not appear if not all of the required data has been tentatively saved Press the A key Display 2 will show SE5 Two seconds after the key is released or when the e is pressed the tentatively saved calibration data is stored in non volatile memory If you do not wish to save the data in non volatile memory press the c l key instead of the key e For a multi point input type conne
182. al end For the response codes see 6 5 Reading the variable area P 6 9 6 15 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F E Monitor value setting data compound read Communication CompoWay F Response Variable Variable MRC SRC type Address Bit position type Address Bit position Variable type Address Bit position Variable A a sss Setting data type Explanation 0000 0100 2 000 2 T 0200 0x0 4 0000 to 007F 1 0100 to 017F C5 to CB 0100 to O17 Setting data of setting area 0 gt 0200 to 027F m i 0300 to 037F 0000 to 0039 LL 1 un t 1 2 CC to D3 Setting data of setting area 1 0200 to 0239 0300 to 0339 Multiple monitor values or setting data can be read by sending a single command Up to 20 items can be read even if the addresses are not contiguous To specify the variable type or address see Appendix Setting list P A 6 The upper limit of an address vill vary depending on the variable type This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 If an area type error or a setting data error occurs in any of the data being read no data will be read SRC Response code Variable type Data ELi 0000 Monitor value Setting data Variable type Data Monitor value Setting data Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 5 Reading the variable area P 6 9 6 9 Co
183. alue 1 FE Disable a Enable Setting Related information 5 1 Input adjustment functions P 5 2 Related setting data First order lag operation Time constant Adjustment level 2 P 8 22 Movement average 1 enable 1 Movement average 3 enable Movement average 2 enable Movement average 4 enable Afu Use these settings to enable or disable move average for each input n Setting range Units Default value e FF Disable n Enable Setting Related setting data Move average Move average count Adjustment level 2 P 8 23 8 50 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level L c yum Lit T Lt Extraction of square root 1 enable Sori Extraction of square root 3 enable 1 c I yu ac A hm Extraction of square root 2 enable nur c Extraction of square root 4 enable Use these settings to enable or disable extraction of square root operations for each input e FF Disable Enable Setting 6 Related setting data ey Extraction of square root Low cut point Adjustment level 2 P 8 24 Proportional control r y lt Straight line approximation 1 enable a mew Lv LO P 9I Straight line approximation 2 enable pe Use these settings to enable or disable straight line approximation n Setting range Units Default value m FF Disable Enable Setting 6
184. alue When the upper limit of the setting is reached the set value will blink and cannot be further increased P a x cy 2 Press the key continuously to decrease the set value When the lower limit of the setting is reached the set value will blink and cannot be further decreased 3 Follow steps 1 and 2 to change the set value to the desired value The setting is saved 2 seconds after it is changed or when a key other than the AIM keys are pressed Note that when setting a manual MV default the set value is output every 50 ms The set value is saved as explained above 4 3 Initial setting examples 4 3 Initial setting examples This section explains how to configure the initial settings for the sensor input type alarm type control period and other parameters Use the _ key and ce key to move through the display screens The desti nation screen will vary depending on how long each key is held down Typical example Changing setting data The dotted line arrow shown on the left indicates that more setting data follows Press the mode key several times to switch to the desired setting data
185. amplitude during the limit cycle while AT is being run e This is effective when P 40 00 in standard control or when closed is selected in proportional control Temporary AT execution judgement deviation is used to judge if temporary AT is excute or not for running temporary AT When AT is excuted while the deviation is greater than the set value temporary AT runs e AT calculated gain 0 1 to 10 0 0100 Sching AT hysteresis 0 1 to 9 9 Limit cycle MV amplitude 5 0 to 50 0 Temporary AT execution 0 0 to 100 0 FS 10 0 judgement deviation 8 78 8 16 Expansion control setting level L Eu Related information 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings P 4 19 Reference Related setting data AT Execute Cancel Adjustment level P 8 13 CH Bumpless at RUN e When Bumpless at RUN is enabled an integral MV correction bumpless is performed to prevent abrupt changes in the MV when switching from stop to run e Even when the setting is disabled the bumpless correction is performed when PID values change including changing the PID set and when AT ends or is stopped FF Disable CH Operation at potentiometer input error PAEL Position proportional type Closed control e This setting is used to select whether control is stopped or changed to floating control when a potentiometer error occurs during closed control in position p
186. annel Operation is as follows based on the event input ON OFF state un When the event input is ON the mode switches to manual and the MANU operation indicator lights up The content of the event input is reflected in Auto Manual Run level This setting data is an operation command that is particular to a single channel Operation is as follows based on the event input ON OFF state 5 7 Using event input SP mode This function is only effective when the control mode is control with remote SP When the event input is ON the remote SP RSP is used as the SP and the RSP operation indicator lights up When the event input is OFF the local SP LSP is used as the SP The content of the event input is reflected in SP mode Adjustment level This setting data is an operation command that is particular to a single channel Operation is as follows based on the event input ON OFF state cvm bol Setting data Level y name Display 3 2 Event input 1 to 6 Control initial Specify event assignment setting 2 L 2 input 5 31 I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 8 Using transfer output M Transfer output settings Control Transfer output assignment Transfer output scaling 5 32 For transfer output use an output that is not used for control output e Transfer output can be used to output one of the following 6 types of data as selected in Control Transfer output ass
187. area 1 the response for the remote SP monitor ramp SP monitor and valve opening monitor is 0 and the response for the status is as indicated in the notes in Appendix Setting list Status P A 8 Slave Function Byte Read data Response Address mode count Data 1 Data 1 H O3 E Most significant Least significant 1 1 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes Data n Data n CRC 16 Most significant 1 Least significant W SS m 2 The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 5 Reading the variable area P 7 10 7 18 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus M Write setting data to protect level Response Slave Function Write start Number of Byte Address mode address elements count Write data CRC 16 Fel me mi L jo 1 2 1 2 2 1 4 bytes Setting data H 0500 Operation adjustment protect H 0502 Initial setting level protect H 0504 Setting change protect H 0506 PF key protect This command writes setting data to Protect level Protect level is explained in 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 This command is used in setting area O If used in setting area 1 an error will result To use this command use the Write via communication operation command to enable Write via communication and then use the Move to protect level operation command to move to Protect level Slave Function Write start Number of address mode address elements CRC 16 Jo
188. arm or Upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence Related setting data Alarm type Alarm setting level P 8 54 Alarm latch Alarm setting level P 8 55 Alarm hysteresis Alarm setting level P 8 56 Standby sequence restart Alarm setting level P 8 57 Auxiliary output non exciting Alarm setting level P 8 58 8 29 I Section 8 Setting data 8 7 PID setting level 5 7 d This level contains the PID value MV limit and alarm settings for each PID set To move to a PID set use the Display PID set select setting at the beginning of PID setting level Povver on m PID setting level Display PID selection PID1 Operation level Adjustment 1 Adjustment 2 eyes NE eyes OVO yaz i 1 i I i L k s than 1 second than 1 second key less than 1 sec thanisecond I L 1 1 oe lt PID setting 4 Bank setting LI Pc level EEC rey esi Ove ky LOVE E bs than 1 second than 1 second C Control in progress J 8 P PID8 Proportional band T 10 00 999 99 standard 1 18 I PID8 Integral time 0 0 3999 99
189. ata Reference PV SP Operation level P 8 7 SP mode Adjustment level P 8 14 Remote SP ramp rise value Remote SP lower limit Input initial setting level P 8 38 Control mode Control initial setting level P 8 43 SP ramp rise value z O or SP ramp fall value z 0 vam Lit a e Monitors the SP during ramp e The ramp function limits the rate of change of the SP e The setting is only displayed if a value is entered for SP ramp rise value or SP ramp fall value e For other than ramp the SP value is the same as in PV SP Wemrrnge Units SP lower limit to SP upper limit Monitor Related setting data Reference PV SP Operation level P 8 7 SP ramp time unit SP ramp rise value SP ramp fall value Adjustment level P 8 18 SP upper limit SP lower limit Control initial setting level P 8 43 Standard control heating cooling control vu V t Monitors the heating MV during operation e Monitors the MV of standard control and the heating MV of heating cooling control comro Monitorrange Unis _ Heating 0 0 to 105 0 cooling Monitor 8 9 I Section 8 Setting data CH MV monitor cooling L A Control mode is heating cooling control Monitors the cooling MV during operation Monitors the cooling MV during heating cooling control como Monitorrange ns 77 0 0 t
190. ation indicators Operation omen dn indicator Single Explanation indicators tron channel indicator Turns on off when control output 1 is ON OFF 2 Turns on off when control output 2 is ON OFF Common indicator 2 orange Turns on off when control output 3 is ON OFF 2 Turns on off when control output 4 is ON OFF 2 Turns on off when the output function assigned to auxiliary output 1 is ON OFF Turns on off when the output function Common indicator assigned to auxiliary output 2 is ON OFF red Turns on off when the output function assigned to auxiliary output 3 is ON OFF Turns on off when the output function assigned to auxiliary output 4 is ON OFF Turns on when operation stops Otherwise is Single channel off indicator orange Turns on during control at an event input or when run stop is switched to stop Single channel Turns on when the SP mode is set to remote indicator orange Otherwise is off Single channel Turns on when operation is set to manual indicator orange mode Otherwise is off Common indicator Turns on off when write via communication is orange ON OFF enabled disabled Single channel Turns on when the displayed channel is 2 indicator orange Otherwise is off 1 6 Indicates that the model has the function Note that function may be disabled depending on the settings and in this case the indicator is alvvays off Indicates that the model does not have the funct
191. be used to limit the rate of change of the SP using the SP ramp value and thereby cause the temperature to change at a constant rate 3 9 I Section 3 Typical Control Examples B Wiring M Settings Input initial setting level Connect the input to terminal IN1 according to the input type connect the open side of the position proportional valve to OUT1 and connect the closed side to OUT2 When using the ESAR PR4DF wire as shown below VVhen using floating control there is no need to connect a potenti ometer C VV O unless the amount of valve opening is being monitored Select the value control type and perform floating control using Position proportional value vvith travel time of 45 seconds Set SP ramp to change SP within a width of 10 0 C minute Time from completely open to completely close The related setting data and settings are as follows Action ar 7 Reverse action initial setting Closed Floating 2626 Floating initial setting Travel time 45 sec SP ramp time unit min initial setting SP ramp rise value 10 0 C The travel time and SP ramp rise value are set in the following and the initial settings are used for all other parameters 1 Turn on the power and then hold down the key for at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Input initial setting level 3 3 Position p
192. cade control is selected for the control mode specify channel 2 commands for the following operation commands e Run Stop e Auto Manual e SP mode Cascade open closed Section 6 Communication CompoWay F FINS mini response text Response code MRC SRC MRES SRES 30 05 2 2 4 MRC SRC FINS mini command text appears here Result of execution of the command Response codes code 1001 Command length The command is too long too long i Command length The command is too short 1002 too short 4 100 Parameter error Operation code or related information is not correct Unable to execute because write via communication is disabled Unable to execute operation command For more information see correspond 2203 Operation error ing operation command explanation in 6 9 Commands and responses Com munication CompoWay F Unit error unit change display unit error internal non volatile memory error wo eue lol 6 8 Setting areas 6 8 Setting areas The E5AR ER has two setting areas for communication Setting area 0 and setting area 1 In setting area 0 control continues As such setting area 0 makes it possible to perform operations that require control to be in progress such as reading the PV writing an SP and run stop as well as operations that do not interfere with control On the other hand operations that may change control such as writing initial setting dat
193. ch output type are as follows Specifications Output voltage 12 V DC 15 20 PNP Max load current 40mA with short circuit protection circuit I 0 20 mA DC resolution approx 54 000 un 4 20 mA DC resolution approx 43 000 pu Load 500 max The value for the I IWW L IL is 21 mA max e The position proportional type has relay outputs 250 V AC 1 A Control output 1 OUT1 is open output and control output 2 OUT2 is closed output E5AR OUT2 Closed side output OUT2 Closed side output OUT 1 Open side output OUT1 Open side output e Relay output specifications are as follows 250 V AC 1 A including inrush current Auxiliary outputs On the EBAR LMLILI auxiliary outputs 1 to 4 SUB1 to 4 output to terminals terminals B1 to B6 E5AR e On the EBER L 4L IL auxiliary outputs 1 to 4 SUB1 to 4 output to terminals B1 to B6 On the E5ER LITLILIJ auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 SUB1 to 2 output to terminals D3 to D6 E5ER L IALT I Section 2 Preparations Potentiometer inputs terminals E5AR sic il Relay output specifications are as follows 250 VAC1A On the E5ER LITLIL auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 SUB1 and 2 output to terminals D3 to D6 E5ER LITLILJ Transistor output specifications are as follows Max load voltage 30 V DC Max load current 50 mA Residual voltage 1 5 V max Leakage current 0 4 mA max
194. changing channels you will not move to the next channel To con tinue changing channels release and press the key again For more information see 5 4 Display and key adjust ment functions P 5 19 4 30 4 15 Operational considerations i 4 15 Operational considerations 1 About four seconds is required for the output to turn on after the power is turned on Take this into consideration when incorporating the controller into a sequence circuit 2 Using the controller near radios televisions or other wireless devices may cause reception inter ference 4 31 i Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 32 Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 1 Input adjustment functions 5 2 5 2 5 8 5 3 Output adjustment functions 5 16 5 4 Display and key adjustment functions 5 19 5 5 Protecting setings 5 24 5 6 Alarm adjustment functions 5 26 5 7 Ulsing eventinp t u u aaa FRAME REEL 5 29 5 8 USING transfer output 5 32 5 9 Using communication functions 5 34 ce Q 158 50 LL I Section 5 Functions and Operations 9 1 Input adjustment fun
195. channel is set to Stop e Auto Manual of the specified channel is set to Manual To use the command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 H00 HOA 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 me mo mo mw 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Related information Backup mode RAM write mode This command is used to select backup mode or RAM write mode The initial setting is backup mode This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Explanation When communication is used to write setting data of Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting or Approximation setting level the data is also written to internal non volatile memory When communication is used to write setting data of Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting or Approximation setting level the data is not written to internal non volatile memory RAM write mode When SP tracking or PV tracking is ON and the mode is changed to
196. code Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 E Control Run Control Stop Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related information Control state mEn 1 Stop 10 Run 2 20 Ru 3 n Run This is used to run or stop control This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 If All channels are selected only those that are enabled will be affected by this command To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command 6 21 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F Hesponse M Bank change 6 22 Response MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related information 00 to 07 20 10 27 30 to 737 FO to F7 This command is used to change banks there are 8 banks numbered 0 to 7 An SP alarm values and a PID Set No are stored in each bank This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 An operation error will result if AT is running in the selected channel To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response c
197. ct as explained in step 2 and repeat steps 5 to 9 e f linear current output is selected continue with the procedure explained in 9 6 Output calibration P 9 12 10 Turn off the power to quit calibration mode I Section 9 User calibration 9 6 Output calibration The procedure for calibration when linear current output is selected is explained in the following e Output calibration is displayed after input calibration is finished after the input calibration values are saved Perform aging for at least 30 minutes Output upper limit The input calibration value save state appears as shown at left Connect a precision digital meter DMM in the following to the output terminal of the linear current output as shown below Press the ce key to obtain the display at left and begin 20 mA calibration While viewing the output on the DMM use the AIX keys to set the output to 20 mA In the example at left 20 mA appears at a value 2 digits smaller than before
198. ction is enabled e These settings set the move average count for move averaging for each input Data following the move average is shown below Input data Operation result Time e This function is used to reduce changes in the input due to distur bances in the fluid surface when controlling fluid level A Setting range Units Default value 175777 Of times Setting 8 23 I Section 8 Setting data Related information 5 1 Input adjustment functions W Move average P 5 5 Reference Related setting data Move average Enable Control initial setting 2 level P 8 50 Extraction of square root 1 Low cut point 59 Extraction of square root 2 Low cut point 59 22 Extraction of square root 3 Low cut point 59 23 Extraction of square root Extraction of square root 4 Low cut point 59 P 4 function is enabled These settings are used to set the low cut point of each input Data following extraction of square root operations are shown below e This function is used for extraction of square root operations for fluid sensors Operation result Low cut point Argument 1 input data Setting range Units Default value 1 0 000 to 9 999 0 00 Setting 6 Related information 5 1 Input adjustment functions W Extraction of square root opera tions P 5 7 6 Related setting data Extraction of square root Enable Control initial setting 2 level P 8 51 8 24 T 1
199. ctions B input shift Input shift value 1 2 e Input shift is accomplished by 2 point correction Input shift input value 2 Input shift value 2 e n the event that there is a large difference between the temperature at the sensor position and the temperature at a location where a temperature reading is required with the result being that satis factory control is not possible the temperature difference can be set as an input shift value Input shift value 2 Y After adjustment Before adjustment Input shift value 1 Input 0 Input shift Input shift input value 1 input value 2 ME Default Setting data Setting range Units vae o x xv xv x x c o v 0 0 l r r a e Era c SF EE EE DUE PU Od ERE 1 Straight line correction is accomplished by setting the value required to correct Input value for input shift 1 in Input shift 1 and the value required to correct Input value for input shift 2 in Input shift 2 Different correction values may b
200. d the default values of the input value for input calibration will change to the upper and lower limits of the input range of the sensor type being used Related setting data Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 8 4 Adjustment level Ald CH Disturbance gain daun Disturbance time constant datt Disturbance rectification band da h Disturbance judgment width daa These settings are used to adjust overshoot to disturbances Disturbance gain is used to adjust the amount of overshoot caused by disturbances Setting data Setting range Units Default value e Disturbance gain 1 00 to 1 00 065 Setting Disturbance time constant 0 01 to 99 99 10 Disturbance rectification band 0 000 to 9 999 0 000 Disturbance judgment width 99 99 to 99 99 FS 0 00 6 Related setting data ss Disturbance overshoot adjustment function Expansion control setting level P 8 80 8 21 I Section 8 Setting data 8 5 Adjustment 2 level Adjustment level 2 contains supplemental settings for adjustment of control such as the time constant of first order lag operation move average count low cut point of extraction of square root operations and settings for proportional control These functions only appear in the display if they are enabled in Control initial setting 2 level Power on M Operation level Adjustment Adjustment 2 level level nm key less key less
201. d Functions B Front Operation indicator Channel indication Bar graph Indicator 1 nn x mi Indicator 2 Operation indicator l H H H edm 0 RY HA l n Ica or Function key 1 Auto Manual key Up key Function key 2 Down key Channel key Level key Mode key Operation indicator m sm s s mmm Aapa faf Indicator 1 Indicator 2 Indicator 3 Mode key Down key Level key Up key Function key 1 Function key 2 Auto Manual key Channel key 1 4 1 2 Part Names and Functions ll How to read the display Display 1 Shows the present value and the setting data s name or error name Red Display 2 Shows the set point value and the set value of the setting data Green Display 3 Shows the Manipulated Variable MV and the bank number or level name Orange Channel indication Shows the set channel number Only appears on a multi point input type On a single input type the display is always off Orange The ESER shows the corresponding channel when the CH2 operation indicator is lit Bar graph Shows a bar graph of the settings 6 Oper
202. d in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 If AT is being run in the specified channel an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus When the control mode is set to cascade control perform the local SP remote SP operation command of CH2 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related Response address mode address code information CRC 16 1 2 2 2 bytes 8 The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 B Echo back test Slave Function Write start Command address mode address Test data CRC 16 2 1 2 2 bytes u This command is used to perform an echo back test The command can be used in any state of the EBAR ER The test data can be any two bytes of hexadecimal data Slave Function Write start Response address mode address Test data CRC 16 2 1 2 m 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 7 29 Section 7 Communication Modbus r r eB 9 g o 7 30 Section 8 Setting data 8 1 to use this chapter 8 2 8 2 Protect level 1000 000 8 3 8 3 Operation level NP 7 4 PP suma 8 5 8 4 Adjustm
203. d is used when Initial setting level protect is set to 2 Disable move to input initial setting level an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 H00 H00 H08 H O0 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Use this command to move to protect level Protect level is explained in 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 This command is used in setting area 0 If used in setting area 1 an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 H00 H00 H08 H O0 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 B Auto Manual Response Initialize settings Response 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus Slave Function Writestart Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2
204. depending on the scaling 19999 to 99999 1999 9 to 9999 9 199 99 to 999 99 19 0 to 10V 19 999 to 99 999 1 9999 to 9 9999 Set the input type switch of each input to match the Input type setting of the corresponding input The initial setting is 2 TC PT Related setting data Input temperature units Input initial setting level P 8 37 SP upper limit SP lower limit Control initial setting level P 8 43 8 9 Input initial setting level 2 2 Input 1 temperature units diu Input 2 temperature units L Ceu L al Input 3 temperature units Input 4 temperature units L li Input type is temperature input e Select Celsius C or Fahrenheit F for the temperature units n Setting range Default value 1 Setting 6 Related setting data Input Type Input initial setting level P 8 36 CH AC n Scaling input value 1 AC 2 mn um Lt m Scaling display value 1 AC gt a4 i V Scaling input value 2 As e Lit jw m4 Scaling display value 2 nC Input type is analog input R Decimal point position e These settings are used when the input type is analog input e Scaling is carried out for analog input The display value for Scaling input value 1 is set in Scaling display value 1 and the display
205. dicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related information Stops AT OO 6 23 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F Response B Write mode 6 24 This command stops AT This command is used in setting area O If used in setting area 1 an operation error will result An operation error will also result in the following situations e Run Stop of the specified channel is set to Stop e Auto Manual of the specified channel is set to Manual To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related information o gt Backup mode RAM write mode This command is used to select backup mode or RAM write mode The initial setting is backup mode This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Explanation When communication is used to write setting data of Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting or Approximation setting level the data is also wr
206. disturbance gain is 1 Temperature When disturbance gain is 0 5 A l NA When disturbance gain is 0 QZ LLL SP Time e The reset time after a disturbance can be lengthened by increasing the disturbance time contstant The default value 1 is normally used for the disturbance time constant In the event that adjustment of the disturbance gain alone is not sufficient this value can be adjusted for fine tuning When constant disturbance is 1 Temperature p When constant disturbance is 2 SP pe f Time e The waveform may vary from that in the diagram depending on differences in the object of control and differences in PID values 5 2 Control functions Conditions for activation of disturbance overshoot adjustment Disiuibaneerediificati n band e f the deviation is greater than the Disturbance judgement width after the PV is rectified to the Disturbance rectification band the disturbance overshoot adjustment function activates e When the Disturbance judgement width is a positive value distur bance overshoot adjustment will activate when a disturbance occurs that makes the PV fall When the Disturbance judgement width is a negative value disturbance overshoot adjustment will activate when a disturbance occurs that makes the PV rise e Disturbance overshoot adjustme
207. dress End Response texi ETX BCC MR s SRC MRES SRES Data 2 2 2 2 bytes If the specified FINS mini command was not successfully executed the response will only contain the MRC SRC MRES and SRES List of FINS mini service commands communication CompoWay F MRC SRC o Service name Description 01 01 x Monitor value setting data read Reads monitor values setting data I 01 02 x Monitor value setting data write Writes monitor values setting data x 01 x 04 x Monitor value setting data compound read Performs multiple reads of monitor values set x ting data s v i Performs multiple writes of monitor values set 01 13 Monitor value setting data compound write iting data un Monitor value setting data compound x Sequentially reads 5111477701 01 10 ified in monitor value setting data compound Stored read x read store n Monitor value setting data compound read Specifies addresses to be read using monitor 01 SPEM S Store write value setting data compound stored read 01 E 12 Monitor value setting data compound read Reads the contents stored using variable area store check read compound read store 05 03 Machine attribute read Reads the model and other attributes I 06 01 Controller status read ps the ope
208. ds Communication Modbus P 7 14 7 27 Section 7 Communication Modbus MH Cancel latch M SP mode 7 28 Response Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 Hoo H 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Related information HOO H0 H20 H 30 Cancel alarm latch H FO Cancel alarm latch This command cancels alarm latch The command is used when the alarm latch function is in use This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 If AT is being run in the specified channel an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 Hts H Hoo Hoo 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 Ho H mo 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Related Description information H O0 Local SP Remote SP Local SP Cascade open Hemote SP Cascade closed Local SP Hemote SP Use this command to select the SP mode Local SP Remote SP The command can be used when cascade control or remote SP is in use This command can be use
209. e This setting is used to have the local SP track the PV when in manual mode The setting prevents abrupt changes in the MV when switching from manual mode to auto mode Auto mode Manual mode Auto mode Setting range Default value 22 Disable PON d amp FF Disable Enable If an input error occurs during PV tracking the local SP will change to the upper limit of the sensor setting range 8 16 Expansion control setting level L EuL CH y FPWSV Wn mm IO QCFC Ty C C C C C Q CQK QK KK K Kk a XxKOKOKOKOKKRKO Manual output method nnt Manual MV initial value This setting is used to specify how the MV is output when switching from auto mode to manual mode e When Hold MV is selected the MV at the time of switching is held after which it can be changed using Manual MV Operation level e When Output default value is selected the value specified in Manual MV default value is used This can then be changed using Manual MV Operation level Examples of how the MV changes using the two methods are shown below MV MV Manual MV initial value Time Time Auto mode Manual mode Auto mode Manual mode Setting At MV hold At Initial value output Default Hold MV H Manual output method Output initial vale 5 0 to 105 0 Standard Manual MV initial value 105 0 to 105 0 Heating cooling 6
210. e approximation Output 1 1 999 to 9 999 NM 0 000 Straight line approximation Output 2 1 999 to 9 999 pow 1 000 6 Related setting data Reference Straight line approximation 1 enable Straight line approximation 2 enable Control initial setting 2 level P 8 51 Broken line approximation 1 Input 1 to FLU id to Foci 1 Broken line approximation 1 Input 20 Broken line approximation 1 Output 1 to Fa 14 4 to Broken line approximation 1 Output 20 is enabled Use these settings to set values for broken line approximation 1 e Set values for broken line approximation Up to 20 points can be specified for one broken line approximation Use normalized data for the values f Input n gt Input n 1 the setting of point n 1 will not be effective Operation result P5 disabled because P5 Input 5 lt Input 4 3 Output 3 P3 Output 2 5 6 point broken line approximation characteristics Output 1 1 x P7 to 20 nput 1 Input2 Input3 Argument 1 Input data Disabled Setting data Setting range Units Default value Broken li imation Input 1 t e s m b ES adod Setting roken line approximation Inpu Broken li imation Output 1 t C PPO ane 3699169999 0 000 Broken line approximation Output 20 Related information Reference 5 1 Input adjustment functions W Broken line approximation P 5 6 Related setting data Br
211. e ar Advanced PID control Proportional band z 0 00 Integral time 0 This is used to set an MV for rectification during P and PD control to eliminate the offset This setting only appears when Proportional band z 0 00 and Integral time 0 Setting range Units Default value Setting Related setting data PID Proportional band PID Integral time PID setting level X P 8 31 8 15 I Section 8 Setting data CH ON OFF Control P 0 0 a hm Hysteresis heating ju w 4 X i s Lc A Lit Hysteresis cooling This sets the Hysteresis to enable stable operation when control is switched ON OFF For standard control Hysteresis heating is used Hysteresis cooling cannot be used For heating cooling control the Hysteresis can be set separately for heating and cooling Use Hysteresis heating for heating and Hysteresis cooling for cooling e This setting appears when Proportional band 0 00 Setting range Units Default value Setting Related setting data PID Proportional band PID setting level P 8 31 CH r e Control period heating AC x Control period cooling e This sets the output period When setting this value take controlla bility and product life if the connected manipulation device is a relay into consideration e Control peri
212. e by Seller Buyer agrees to pay the price in effect at time of shipment Discounts Cash discounts if any will apply only on the net amount of invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges taxes and duties and will be allowed only if i the invoice is paid according to Seller s payment terms and ii Buyer has no past due amounts owing to Seller Orders Seller will accept no order less than 200 net billing Governmental Approvals Buyer shall be responsible for and shall bear all costs involved in obtaining any government approvals required for the impor tation or sale of the Goods Taxes All taxes duties and other governmental charges other than general real property and income taxes including any interest or penalties thereon imposed directly or indirectly on Seller or required to be collected directly or indirectly by Seller for the manufacture production sale delivery importation consumption or use of the Goods sold hereunder including customs duties and sales excise use turnover and license taxes shall be charged to and remitted by Buyer to Seller Financial If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory to Seller Seller reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory security or payment in advance If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise comply with these Terms or any related agreement Seller may without liability and in addition to other remedies cancel any unsh
213. e out occurs at the host device e The client address in the received command is different from the communication unit number set in the E5AR ER A parity error framing error or overrun error occurred due to a transfer or other error e A CRC 16 code error occurred in the received command frame e An time interval greater that 3 5 characters occurred between data sets while receiving the command frame 7 3 List of functions 7 3 List of functions Function codes supported on the E5AR ER are shown below Function codes Communication Modbus Function un Description codes Heads the variable area Multiple variables that are contiguous can be read Read variables multiple Writes to the variable area Write variables Can write to multiple variables that multiple are contiguous Broadcasting is possible 06 H 06 Write variable Writes an operation command operation command Broadcasting is possible 08 H 08 Echo back test Performs an echo back test 7 7 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 4 Variable area The area used for data exchange when communicating with the EBAR ER is called the variable area The PV is read and various setting data are read and written using the variable area of the EBAR ER Operation commands do not use the variable area E5AR ER Microprocessor Operation instruction etc Variable area Read write The variable area is accessed by specifyi
214. e power off and then on to make the new setting take effect 5 34 5 9 Using communication functions For information on communication procedures see Sec tion 6 Communication CompoWay F or Section 7 Communication Modbus P 7 1 depending on the communication protocol you are using Operation procedure Before performing communication follow the steps below to set the communication unit number communications speed and other communication parameters 1 Hold down the for 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Initial setting level 2 Press the key to move from Input initial setting level to Communica tions setting level 3 Press the ce key to scroll through the setting item as shown at left Protocol selection za Communication unit No Communication speed ce Communication LEA aa length 4 Press the AI keys to change a setting Communication stop bit Communication parity Transmission wait time Configure communication setting data in accordance with the other computers B Write via communication Bank No To allow a host computer to write setting data to a controller set Write via communication Adjustment level to aa Enabled 1 Press the key less than 1 second to move from RUN level to Adju
215. e required for Input shift 1 and Input shift 2 and thus the slope of the line between the two points may differ before and after correction Input shift is set for each channel The input shift settings for inputs 1 to 4 of a multi point input type correspond to channels 1 to 4 First select a channel with the key and then set the corresponding input shift values 5 1 Input adjustment functions 6 Obtaining input Temperature readings are taken using the E5AR ER at any two points shift values 2 and the actual temperature at the required location the object is point correction measured at the same two points Preparations 1 Set the input type based on the sensor 2 Obtain a temperature sensor that can measure the temperature of the object similar to that shown in Figure 1 A E5AR Digital Controller B Thermometer Figure 1 Configuration for input shift Procedure for 1 Correction will be performed of the temperature readings at two points one using 2 point near room temperature and one near the desired SP Measure the temperature correction of the object when it is near room temperature and when it is near the SP B and check the corresponding readings of the controller A 2 Set Input shift 1 to the difference between the temperature of the object B and the controller reading A when near room temperature Object temperature B Controller reading A and set Input value fo
216. e through separate conduits or ducts Do not wire the lead in parallel with the power line Change the wiring to allow a shorter lead Use shielded wire for the lead The mounting location of the temperature sensor is too far Mount the sensor so that the tip of the protective tubing from the point of control and the thermal response is slow The ambient operating temperature of the EBAR ER Keep the ambient operating temperature within the rated exceeds the rated temperature range 10 to 55 C The temperature of the terminal plate is not uniform due to Install the EBAR ER in a location where it is not exposed heat dissipation from peripheral devices Connections Installation Wireless devices are used near the E5AR ER Shield the EBAR ER The terminal plate of the EBAR ER is exposed to strong air flow Prevent air flow from blowing on the terminal plate The input type switch setting is not correct Set the input type switch to the correct setting for the input The input type setting is not correct Set the correct input type The temperature units setting is not correct Set the correct temperature units The measured temperature appears to deviate after Set the input shift value to 0 0 setting an input shift value The units of a data setting are not correct Correct the host system program The host system program is not correct The input terminal for thermocouple input is short circuited Connect the thermocouple A
217. e y 1 _ 9 O 01 0 syueg p o senjeA uue y O Vx O 2 010 S4ueq dS L O m L O L O y o indino JO jlUJl IoMO L O m L O L O 7 01 1ndino 9 JO 1 i ddn sjeuueuo Jo Jequinu p qeu3 9 0 uonpejes Indino 3ndino jejsueJ 01002 y 01 silu uuuBisse indino ieilixny r 0 slu uuuBissp 1ndino 1011402 anjen Aejdsip 209 O fue Indu c Bureos ue Humes Indu Jo yw edd O 9 0j sJuawubisse indui jue 3 JAMO dS c anjen eydsip Buren O abue Buas indu O l anea eldsip ulipos 10 eDuei Humes Indu jo 3 601 O 111 Jeddn qS 10 O O 8 0 aia Aq Ad uti Jeddn eue uon ejes opewioyny anjen 209 O abue Buas indu O c anea Buipeos 10 eDuei indui jo yui zaddn O dS c anjen eydsip 205 O abue Buas indu O l anea feydsip Bues 10 eDuei Humes Indu jo 1 01 O y ll ddn qS Meaning of symbols O Initialized Not initialized A Added channels initialized indui eJnyejeduo uonisod julod jewioeq ed y uue v ed uue v ed Z uue v H ed A uue v indui ye
218. ear case Watertight packing D Watertight packing UUM Gradually tighten the screws in the top and bottom fittings alternating between each so that they are balanced Tighten until the ratchet turns without engaging Pulling the unit out Normally there is no need to pull out the unit however it can be pulled out if needed for maintenance purposes When pulling the unit out place a cloth over the screwdriver to prevent scratches and other damage 2 3 Section 2 Preparations 2 2 How to Use the Terminals Verify the layout of the terminals A 1 using the engravings on the top and sides of the case E E5AR E5AR Q4B E5AR C4B fe E5AR A4B 500 B E5AR A4B 500 E5AR A4B 500 E5AR A4B 500 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC 1777 Auxiliary outputs 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC Auxiliary outputs B Relay outputs x Relay outputs m n UA DH cou 106 x 21 sue po ime gt suse Input power supply 5 Do Input power supply depends on the 6 HEB COM depends on the model x Dr SUB3 model 100 to 240 VAC 1 75 ua 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC 1 4 G
219. eat dissipation Do not block the vents on the product Use the product within the noted supply voltage and rated load Be sure to confirm the name and polarity for each terminal before wiring the terminal block and connectors Do not connect anything to unused terminals Use the specified size of crimp terminals M3 width 5 8 mm max for wiring the terminal block 7 To connect bare wires to the terminal block use AWG22 to AVVG14 cross sectional area 0 326 to 2 081 mm to wire the power supply terminals and AWG 28 to AWG16 cross sectional area 0 081 to 1 309 mm for other terminals Length of exposed wire 6 to 8 mm 8 Ensure that the rated voltage is achieved no longer than 2 s after turning the power ON 9 Turn OFF the power first before drawing out the product Never touch the terminals or the electronic components or subject them to physical shock When inserting the product do not allow the electronic components to contact the case 10 Do not remove the inner circuit board 11 Output turns OFF when shifting to the initial setting level in certain modes Take this into consideration when setting up the control system 12 Allow the product to warm up for at least 30 minutes after the power is turned ON 13 Install surge absorbers or noise filters in devices near the product that generate noise in particular devices with an inductance component such as motors transformers solenoids and magnet
220. eating cooling control is expressed as a negative value 8 31 I Section 8 Setting data MV lower limit The setting range differs for standard control and heating cooling control The cooling MV of heating cooling control is expressed as a negative value The MV limit function does not operate on a position proportional type during floating control and thus the setting is not effective in this case Setting data Setting range Default value Standard control 100 0 MV lower limit 0 1 to 105 0 MV upper limit Setting control 100 0 0 to 105 0 Standard control o MV lower limit 5 0 upper limit 0 1 Heating cooling control 105 0 to 0 0 The following MVs take precedence over the MV limits Manual MV Manipulated variable at stop e MV at PV error 6 Related information 5 3 Output adjustment functions W MV limit P 5 16 CH PID Automatic selection range upper limit Aur 1 to 8 When using automatic selection of PID sets use this setting to set an upper limit for each PID set e Set the automatic selection range upper limit for PID Set Nos 1 to 8 e Note that the limit for PID Set 8 is fixed at 110 of the sensor setting range and thus does not need to be set e This value is applied to the PV present value or DV deviation set in PID set automatic selection data The initial setting is PV n
221. ecifies PID Set No 1 to 8 This command runs AT On the E5AR ER the PID Set No must be specified when running AT 20 Currently selected PID Set No 21 to 28 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 To specify the currently selected PID Set No the PID set currently used for operation set the lower byte of the related information to 0 This command is used in setting area O If used in setting area 1 an operation error will result An operation error will also result in the following situations e Run Stop of the specified channel is set to Stop e Auto Manual of the specified channel is set to Manual To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 2 1 2 E 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 5 2 bytes Ch Command HFO Al 7 23 Section 7 Communication Modbus Hesponse B Write mode 7 24 This command stops AT This command is used in setting area O If used in setting area 1 an operation error will result An operation error will also result in the following situations e Run Stop of the specified
222. eck the bank number view the leading digit of the setting data cn nn 4 Use the AIX keys to set the value to 50 00 A PID Set No 1 to 8 is set in PID Set No in Bank setting level For this reason PID control parameters different from the selected bank can be used during operation If PID Set No is set to the PID set is automatically selected PID auto selection according to previously set conditions 6 PID set automatic selection When PID Set No is set to 0 in a bank the PID set is automatically selected according to previously set conditions In the example at left PID set selection data is set to PV When PV x 200 0 C PID Set 1 is used When 200 0 PV x 400 0 C PID Set 2 is used PV present value PV 24 00 PID automatic selection range upper limit is set so that the value increases as the PID Set No increases However note that the value for PID Set 8 is internally fixed at Automatic selection range upper limit 999 9 FS 1300 Internal fixed value 999 996 FS To prevent chattering when changing PID sets hysteresis can be set in PID set selection hysteresis PV or DV deviation can be selected for the PID set selection data Default Setting data Setting range EE EU O Auto selection Banks 0 to 7 PID Set No 1 to 8 PID Sets 1 to 8 1450 0 PID Sets 1 to 8 Automatic 10 to 110 of selection range upper limit
223. ection 8 Setting data Write via communication Ln CH SP mode Lt EL Models that support communication This enables or disables the writing of setting data from a host computer to the controller gt The initial setting is Disabled 627 Select a to enable or 522 to disable write via communication Operation Related setting data Reference Communication protocol selection Communication setting level P 8 64 Communication unit No Communication setting level P 8 64 Communication speed Communication setting level P 8 64 Communication data length Communication setting level 8 65 Communication stop bit Communication setting level P 8 65 Communication parity Communication setting level P 8 65 Transmission wait time Communication setting level P 8 66 Control mode is standard control with remote SP cascade control or proportional control e Use this setting to select the SP mode e n local SP mode the local SP set in the bank in the controller is used for control In remote SP mode the remote SP specified by an external signal 4 to 20 mA etc is used r Use the AIM keys to select L 52 Local SP for local SP mode or 5P Remote SP for remote SP mode When remote SP mode is selected the RSP indicator lights up Operation l e When cascade control is used cascade open secondary loop ind
224. ement 09 99 to 99 99 FS width 5 15 I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 3 Output adjustment functions B MV limit Upper limit value of MV limit EA Li L Upper and lower limits can be applied to the output of the calculated MV When using ON OFF control the MV will be the MV upper limit when output is ON and the MV lower limit when output is OFF The MV limit function does not operate when floating control is selected on a position proportional type The following MVs take precedence over the MV limit function Manual MV default MV at stop MV at PV error The MV upper limit and MV lower limit can also be set in each PID set Output e 100 e Upper limit value of MV limit Lower limit value of MV limit e n the case of heating cooling control overall upper and lower limits are set for heating and cooling Separate limit settings are not possible Output Heating side MV Cooling side MV q mmm Lovver limit value of MV limit Upper limit value of MV limit 5 3 Output adjustment functions Default Setting data Setting range Standard control 5 0 to MV upper limit O 1 MV lower limit Heating cooling control 105 0 to 0 0 Standard control MV lower limit 0 1 to 105 0 MV upper limit
225. en near the board to enable a higher precision of temperature control XI H BBBB TOO Conveyor WY Heater Temperature sensor e A thermocouple or platinum resistance temperature input sensor can also be directly connected to input 2 previously input 2 only supported 4 to 20 mA or 1 to 5 V and an external converter was required e Auto tuning is now possible in both the cascade closed and cascade open states 3 13 I Section 3 Typical Control Examples B Wiring Thermocouple K close to the heater is connected to IN2 thermo couple K in the oven is connected to IN1 and a power adjuster is connected to OUT1 When using the E5AR QQ43DW FLK wire as shown below Sensor2 Heater 69 Sensor 1 G3PX Power adjuster 4 20 mA ll Settings Inputs 1 and 2 are set to thermocouple K and the control mode is set to cascade standard control The related setting data and settings are as follows Input 1 type switch TC PT initial setting Input 2 type switch TC PT initial setting Input 1 input type 2 K 200 0 to 1300 0 C initial setting Input 2 input type 2 K 200 0 to 1300 0 C initial setting Output type of output 1 1 Linear current output Output type of linear current output 1 1 4 to 20 mA initial setting Control mode 5 Cascade standard control SP 180 0 The control mode and SP
226. ensation wire that you intend to use for the thermocouple EBAR EBER Input power Cold junction compensator supply Compensating wire Operation Make sure that the cold junction compensator is at O C and set the STV output to the voltage that is equivalent to the inspection value startup power If the cold junction compensating system is set to external a cold junction compensator and compensation wire are not needed Resistance Preparations temperature input Connect as follows to the required devices sensor EBAR ESER ce Input power supply L gt Operation Set the 6 dial to the resistance that is equivalent to the inspection value 9 13 Section 9 User calibration Analog input e Preparations Connect as follows to the required devices E5AR E5ER F H Input power supply L Operation Set the STV output to the inspection value voltage or current E5AR E5ER 2 r Input power supply L Section 10 Troubleshooting 10 1 Troubleshooting checklist 10 2 10 2 Enor message S sudo l lab Rz 10 3 10 3 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal measured values 10 4 10 4 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal control 10 5 10 5 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal output 10 7 10 6 Inferring causes from conditions communication
227. ent level URN 8 12 8 5 Adjustment 2 level UP Ia ue E 8 22 8 6 Bank setting level MU 8 26 8 7 PID setting level E E s 8 30 8 8 Approximation setting level 5 58 8 33 8 9 Inputinitial setting level 50 Y 8 35 8 10 Control initial setting level NC Em 8 41 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level ELE ps qaa pana 8 45 8 12 Alarm setting level 715 8 53 8 13 Display adiustment level 50005 E 8 59 8 14 Communication setting level 25 8 63 8 15 Advanced function setting level L Ad 8 67 8 16 Expansion control setting level EE 8 72 D o 0 I Section 8 Setting data 8 1 How to use this section e Marks used in this section f n Setting n Monitor Q Operation Mu Explains the meaning and function of a setting data item Shows the setting range and initial setting of a setting data item Used for monitor values Explains a procedure for operating the EBAR ER Indicates where a setting data item is explained and notes related setting data items 6 Display conditions for related setting data CH AT run stop j Setting data name Operation conditions A setting will only appear in the display of the EBAR ER when the conditions of use for the setting are satisfied conditions of use are indicated to the right of each setting in this section Protected settings are not disp
228. ependent control takes place when the SP mode of channel 2 is local SP mode and cascade closed cascade control takes place when the SP mode is remote SP mode 6 Related setting data su Control mode Control initial setting level P 8 43 8 4 Adjustment level L Ald CH _ _ Cooling coefficient L 5L Heating cooling control Advanced PID control Proportional band z 0 00 When there is a large difference in the heating and cooling characteristics of the object and satisfactory control is not possible using the same PID constants the heating P proportional band is multiplied by a coefficient for use in cooling control The cooling P in heating cooling control is obtained and the coefficient is set using the following equation Cooling P Cooling coefficient x P heating proportional band Setting range Units Default value Setting 6 Related information Reference 3 2 Heating cooling control of a chemical reaction device P 3 5 6 Related setting data PID Proportional band PID setting level 8 31 CH Dead band L d Heating cooling control This sets an output dead band for heating cooling control A negative value can also be set to create an overlap band Set an area centered on the SP where the control amount is O during heating cooling control Setting range Units Default value CH Manual reset valu
229. es in 10 2 Error messages P 10 3 and following 10 2 Error messages 10 2 Error messages When an error occurs Displays 1 and 2 show error messages Hefer to the following table to check the meaning of the message and how to solve the problem Output state at error Display 1 Display 2 FPN TT Control output Alarm output Unit error The unit requires service Please OFF OFF contact your dealer Unit change Hold down the _ key for at least 5 seconds to store the current unit configuration OFF OFF If this does not clear the error display please contact your dealer sn Xum 535 Unit error consult your dealer Non volatile Hold down the key for at least memory error 5 seconds in the error display to OFF OFF initialize Input error Check for an incorrect input MV output according Upper limit display connection broken wire or short to MV at PV error exceeded circuit Check the input type and setting operation input type switch settings Normal Exceeds display Not an error however appears display range lower line 1 when PV exceeds the display Exceeds display range 19999 to 99999 Normal operation range upper line Normal HSP RSP input error s the wire connected to the RSP display operation input broken or short circuited indicator blinks Normal Potentiometer Check the potentiometer wiring When Closed Floating display input error is closed and operation a
230. escribed in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIO
231. et in Position proportional dead band and the hysteresis is set in Open Close hysterisis The relation to valve opening is shown below Open close hysteresis ON OFF A 100 MV Valve opening 100 A 0 When the present value is inside the PV dead band this function is used to perform control for PV SP and stop unnecessary output when the PV is close to the SP Use this setting to select whether to stop control or switch to floating control and continue when a potentiometer error occurs during closed control In the event that a break occurs in the O or C wires of the potentiometer potentiometer errors may not be detect able thus this function stop control or switch to floating control does not operate 3 4 Cascade control of reflow ovens 3 4 Cascade control of reflow ovens Cascade control is used to reduce the effects of disturbances in the manipulated system disturbances in the secondary loop by adding a second PID loop to the regular PID loop Cascade control is also used in situations where a sensor is added close to the object to improve control performance E Application Conventional temperature control of reflow ovens is performed using only a sensor installed near the heater In lead free reflow ovens the melting temperature of solder is higher and in order to minimize heat induced deterioration of the electronic components a second sensor is added inside the ov
232. etting Sets the alarm type Type L I Alarms 1 to 4 Alarm setting Alarm output latch gt Latch L 3 hold Alarms 1 to 4 Alarm setting Alarm output Hysteresis L 3 hysteresis L 3 Standby Alarm setting Sets standby sequence sequence reset J restart conditions Auxiliary Alarm setting outputs 1 to 4 J Open in alarm Close in alarm Open in alarm 5 28 5 7 Using event input 5 Using event input e Event input can be used on the E5AR LI B 2 input EBER L TI IB 2 point E5AR LILID 4 point E5ER LILID 4 point and E5AR L L IDB 6 point An order of priority exists for event input key operation and commu nication settings with the most recent setting taking precedence Operation changeover takes place when event input switches OFF ON and ON OFF fF M Event input allocation Function settings for event input using external contact input are Event input 1 assignment P 9 configured using Event input allocation 1 to 6 e On a multi point input type assignment data can be set for channels 2 and higher as appropriate for the number of channels Event input assignment n Channel 1 BankNo bit2 f m ju Iu M Event input y V Channel 1 Channel 1 auto manual Channel 1 SP mode remote
233. even segment display 7 LSP at the right top placed in a vvhite box Page 8 35 Description added to RSPH and RSPL in the bottom graphic Page 8 46 Description under Setting range in the top table corrected Page 8 49 The second Cascade standard control in the bottom table corrected to Cascade heating cooling control Page 8 51 The default value under straight line approximation corrected from ON to OFF Page A 2 Note 3 added below the Unit Ratings table Page A 2 Outflow current Approx 7 mA under Unit ratings corrected to Short circuit current Approx 4 mA Page A 3 5 FS digit or less under Indication accuracy corrected to 4596 FS 1 digit max Page A 3 0 2 to 99 9 seconds under Control period corrected to 0 2 to 99 0 seconds Page A 3 Acceleration 10 m s under Vibration tolerance corrected to Acceleration 20 m s lt Page A 19 Description under Setting monitor value for OEOC corrected Page A 20 Description under Setting monitor value for OE20 corrected Page A 22 The second Cascade standard control in the table corrected to Cascade heating cooling control Page A 30 DOTC Disturbance time constant under Adjustment level corrected to 0 01 99 99 Section 1 Contents Section2 Preparations Introduction Precaution in using the product Precautions IV Precautions for Safe Use
234. event that user calibration is necessary use the calibration functions for temperature input analog input and output that are provide in the controller However note that OMRON cannot ensure the results of calibration by the user Also calibration data is overwritten with the latest settings The default calibration settings cannot be returned to after user calibration Input calibration The input type selected in the setting data is calibrated Input types consist of the following 20 types e Thermocouple 13 types Analog input 5 types e Resistance temperature input sensor 2 types 6 Output calibration The output type selected in the setting data is calibrated There is only one output type that can be selected Linear current output Registering The new calibration data for each item is temporarily registered It can calibration data be offcially registered as calibration data only when all items have been calibrated to new values So be sure to temporarily register all items when you calibrate the EBAR ER When calibration data is registered it is registered regardless of whether or not the E5AR ER has been calibrated by the user Prepare separate measuring devices and equipment for calibration For details on how to handle measuring devices and equipment refer to the respective instruction manuals 9 4 9 3 Thermocouple input calibration 9 3 Thermocouple input calibration e Thermocouples are calibrated in
235. expenses related to any claim inves tigation litigation or proceeding whether or not Seller is a party which arises or is alleged to arise from Buyer s acts or omissions under these Terms or in any way with respect to the Goods Without limiting the foregoing Buyer at its own expense shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller and defend or settle any action brought against Seller to the extent that it is based on a claim that any Good made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of another party Property Confidentiality The intellectual property embodied in the Goods is the exclusive property of Seller and its affiliates and Buyer shall not attempt to duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Seller Notwithstand ing any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling all engineering and tooling shall remain the exclusive property of Seller All information and materials supplied by Seller to Buyer relating to the Goods are confidential and propri etary and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly prevent disclosure to any third party Miscellaneous a Waiver No failure or delay by Seller in exercising any right and no course of dealing between Buyer and Seller shall operate as a waiver of rights by Seller b Assignment Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder without Seller s written consent c Amendment These Terms constitute the entire agreement between Buye
236. g Monitor and Reference in Setting Data in Section 8 are explained in Section 8 Abbreviations Abbreviations used in the setting data illustrations and text are as follows Abbreviation Meaning PPV Presentvalue 8 s pin m n Data after scaling is shown in industrial units such as C m and g and EU is used to indicate the minimum increment of such a quantity For example the minimum increment of 50 02 m is 0 01 m and thus 1 EU would be equal to 0 01 m 6 Notation used for settings Letters numbers and abbreviations in settings that appear in the E5AR ER display are as follows R b t a E F M 2 F L 5 A lB c D E F G HI I I KL M esas ERE Most icant digit Revision History The revision code of this manual is given at the end of the catalog number at the bottom left of the back cover The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Cat No Z182 E1 02 Pages and changes May 2003 Original production 02 February 2004 1 The following changes were made Other changes were also made to improve general quality Introduction Descriptions mainly on precautionary information updated Page 1 5 Bar graph added to the top list Page 1 6 Function key 1 added to the Auto Manual key Page 1 7 Note at the bottom of the page corrected Page 1 8 Event i
237. g area 1 Operation instruction Control in progress Control stop Bescp on Aa Setting area 0 During contro Setting area 1 Control stop Expansion control setting level Control initial setting level 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus The E5AR ER provides a set of command frames that make use of variable area read write commands operation commands and other services provided by the Modbus communication protocol E5AR ER command frames are explained below E Monitor value read Communication Modbus Slave Function Read start Number of address mode address elements CRC 16 Lo peer o den Jue d 1 1 Monitor value Address Monitor value Ch Data name V 1 3 0400 H 0402 H 0404 H 0406 H 0408 H 040A H 040C H 4400 H 4402 H 4404 H 4406 H 4408 H 440A 2 2 2 bytes Address Internal SP H 8406 Bank No monitor H 8408 PID Set No monitor H 840A H8400 Internal SP Bank No monitor PID Set No monitor H 440C H C400 Modification type H C402 Modification type 2 4 4400 This command is used to read the PV status and other monitor values The number of elements can be set from H 0004 to 006A 4 to 106 to allow reading of monitor values in contiguous addresses When used in setting area 1 the response for the PV and internal SP is 0 and the response for the status is as indicated in the notes in
238. gh resolution e Multi inputs e Multi point inputs B Controller Banks PID sets 1 2 50 ms sampling period Accuracy Thermocouple Larger of 0 1 PV or 1 C 1 digit max Platinum resistance temperature input sensor Larger of 0 1 PV or 0 5 C 1 digit max Analog input 0 196 FS 1 digit max For non standard specifications see Specifications on page A 2 of the Appendix Input resolution 1 100 C Pt 100 Resolution range 0 01 C 150 00 to 150 00 C is available High speed sampling and high accuracy high resolution are simul taneously achieved to enable high accuracy high speed control to match the application Wide range of temperature inputs and analog inputs are available Temperature inputs Thermocouples K J T E L U N R 5 W Platinum resistance temperature input sensors Pt 100 Analog inputs Current inputs 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20mA Voltage inputs 1 to 5 V 0 to 5V 0 to 10V A 2 input type and a 4 point input type are available for the EBAR A 2 point input type is available for the E5ER All multi point inputs also support multi input eliminating the need for an externally connected converter Up to 8 banks can be created to store SPs local SP alarm values and PID set numbers Switch between banks by bank selection event input key operation or communication Up to 8 PID sets can be created to store settings PID value MV limits and automatic selection range upper
239. han 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second key less than 1 second LL Control in progress C Control stop Alarm setting level LT4 Alarm 4 type 11 AALT Alarm 4 latch OFF ON Alarm 1 hysteresis 0 01 99 99 Lir ALH4 71 1 Alarm 4 hysteresis 06210 01 99 99 REST Standby sequence restart Condition A condition B xa _ SBIN Auxiliary output 1 non exciting lt 0 Close in alarm N O 5 a Open in alarm N C Alarm 2 hysteresis 0 01 99 99 ALT3 Alarm 3 type 0 11 _ SB3N Auxiliary output 3 non exciting Close in alarm N O 2 Open in alarm N C ce E ui SB4N Auxiliary output 4 non exciting AL 0 Close in alarm N O aza Open in alarm N C co A3LT Alarm 3 latch OFF ON ALH3 Alarm 3 hysteresis 0 01 99 99 8 53 I Section 8 Setting data CH Alarm 1 type Alarm 2 type Alarm 3 type Alarm 4 type Setting EX 8 54 yum 4 r nnm A yum x p m Qm Md r nm bee Mog x al C nnm Z Alarm 1 type Alarm 2 type Alarm 3 type Alarm 4 type Alarm is assigned to auxiliary output e These settings are
240. hanged the upper and lower SP limits will be reset to the upper and lower limits of the input setting range The SP limits are set separately for each channel Input temperature setting range Setting range o X 0 s A A Change to A B upper limit value c X Change SP Y t z upper limit o T SP setting ange When input type is changed B O setting is possible A Set value in general Y Upper and lower SP limit v Upper and lower limit of sensor 1 l l l setting not possible l l e The E5AR ER allows setting data to be grouped for use in PID control A group of setting data is called a PID set PID sets consist of the following setting data omm Dra PPepriona ban 250 06 70 posan n o m o selection range 200 0 400 0 upper limit e Select PID Set No in Display PID selection of PID setting level and set the data for each PID 5 2 Control functions i Set P proportional band of PID set 3 to 50 00 FS Operation procedure Display PID selection 1 Press the key repeatedly to move to PID setting level Display 3 shows L P a 2 Use the AIX keys to set Display PID selection to 3 3 Press the ce key to select P Proportional band To ch
241. ic coils If a noise filter is used for the power supply check the voltage and current and install the noise filter as close as possible to the product Separate the product as far as possible from devices generating strong high frequency noise e g high frequency welders and high frequency sewing machines or surges Do not tie noise filter input output wires together 14 Keep the wiring for the product s terminal block and connector separate from high voltage high current power lines to prevent inductive noise Do not run the wiring parallel to or in the same cable as power lines The influence of noise can also be reduced by using separate wiring ducts or shield lines 15 Install an external switch or circuit breaker and label them clearly so that the operator can quickly turn OFF the power 16 Do not use the product in the following locations Locations where dust or corrosive gases in particular sulfuric or ammonia gas are present Locations where icing or condensation may occur Locations exposed to direct sunlight Locations subject to excessive shock or vibration Locations where the product may come into contact with water or oil Locations subject to direct radiant heat from heating equipment Locations subject to extreme temperature changes 17 Cleaning Do not use thinners Use commercially available alcohol s O C1 VI Precautions for Correct Use 6 Service Life U
242. ign functions to the PF1 and PF2 keys to enable them to be used as function keys e When performing multi channel control the PF2 key functions as a CH key and thus cannot be used as a function key PF2 setting does not appear values OFF FF Disabled Does not Does not function as a function key as a function Does not function as a function key RUN RAM Run currently displayed channel Stop Stop currently displayed channel R S 7 5 Run Stop Switch between run and stop for cur rently displayed channel ALLR Atir Run all channels all Stop all channels AT Execute Can Switch between AT execute and AT cel cancel AT run is executed for the currently selected PID set 7 Bank selection 1 Svvitch through the bank numbers brink adds 1 to the current bank number H A c MN LL NN Switch between auto and manual PFDP 2242 Monitor Setting Display monitor setting item item Select Monitor Setting item 1 to Monitor Setting item 5 Special function level e Hold down the PF1 or PF2 for at least 1 second to execute the function selected in PF1 setting or PF2 setting If Monitor Setting item is selected the display will scroll through monitor setting items 1 to 5 each time you press the key 8 15 Advanced function setting level L Ad Setting data range Units Default value Disable Run Setting PF1 setting Stop Run Stop toggle Run all
243. ignificant Least significant 2 Specify the Unit No of the EBAR ER Set in hexadeci mal from H 01 to H 63 1 to 99 The function code for variable area write is H 10 Specify the address of the setting data to which you wish First address of to write write For more information on addresses see Appendix Set Client address ting list P A 6 Specify the number of setting data items that you wish to write x 2 for the number of elements The setting range is H 0002 to H 0068 2 to 104 Example When the number of setting data items is 2 specify H 0004 Byte count Specify the number of bytes of data to be written FINS mini response text Slave Function Write start Number of address mode address elements CRC 16 111 0 1 1 2 2 2 Client address The value from the command frame appears here This is the received function code In an error response frame H 80 is added to the received function code to indicate that it is an error Function mode response Example Received function code H 10 Function code in error response frame H 90 Number of elements Beginning Beginning address of write that was received address of write Number of Received number of elements elements This is a check code calculated from the client address to the data end For the calculation method see 7 2 Frames W Command frame 6 Example of CRC 16 cal culation P 7 4 CRC 16 7 12 7 6 Writing
244. ignment For more information see 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level 1 2 Control Transfer output 1 to 4 assignment P 8 46 SP ramp SP PV MV heat MV cool valve opening Note that the heating and cooling MVs can only be output from a standard type and the valve opening can only be output from a position proportional type with a potentiometer connected Output Control Transfer output assignment Channel sp ZN ChamelirmpSP 0 Canna presentvaiue PY gi Channel 1 MV heat side Channel 1 MV cool side Channel 1 valve opening AN anne VIV heat side Channel 2 MV cool side E nmay easy annel 4 MV heat side e Scaling of the output value can be performed using Transfer output upper limit and Transfer output lower limit The upper limit can be set to a smaller value than the lower limit to perform reverse scaling The scale can be enlarged using the width between the upper and lower limits specified in the setting data The following diagram shows an example of scaling the heating MV Transfer output Transfer output mA mA Reverse scaling Scaling enlargement MV 0 100 Upper limit Lower limit Lower limit Upper limit value 0 value 100 value 10 value 80 5 8 Using transfer output e f the Input type Scaling display value 1 2 SP upper and lower limit or Temperature units setting is changed when SP or Hamp SP is
245. increased in proportion to the difference between the PV and the SP Control whereby the MV is decreased as the present value increases When the present value PV is lower than the set point SP the MV is increased in proportion to the difference between the PV and the SP e When pulse output is used the control period must be set for each channel I Section 1 Overview Position proportional type The position proportional type only uses standard control Control Transfer output Control mode 1 input type 2 input type 4 input type 177 Standard con trol OUT1 Channel 1 control output open side OUT2 Channel 1 control output closed side Direct Reverse action Control whereby the MV is increased as the present value increases Direct action When the present value PV is higher than cooling the set point SP the MV is increased in pro portion to the difference between the PV and the SP Control whereby the MV is decreased as the present value increases Reverse action When the present value PV is lower than heating the set point SP the MV is increased in pro portion to the difference between the PV and the SP e Floating control and closed control can also be selected for the position proportional type Floating control allows position propor tional control without a potentiometer 6 Control Transfer Use this setting to assign what type of data is output from each output
246. ing level P 8 29 Auxiliary output assignment Control initial setting 2 level P 8 48 Alarm type Alarm setting level P 8 54 Alarm latch Alarm setting level P 8 55 Standby sequence restart Alarm setting level P 8 57 8 12 Alarm setting level 5 3 CH Standby sequence restart Vv Lt Alarm types 1 to 4 With standby sequence Use this setting to select the condition for restarting the standby sequence after it has been canceled e Condition A Operation startup including power on when an alarm value alarm upper and lower limit or input shift value input value for input calibration 1 and 2 input shift 1 and 2 is changed or when the SP is changed e Condition B Power on The following example shows operation using a lower limit alarm with standby sequence SP change Y Condition A only Alarm pointe i 1 1 after change 7 Alarm hysteresis 1 1 Condition A only O Standby sequence 1 Alarm point 77 4 I 6 Standby sequence restart point Alarm output Condition A Alarm output Condition B e After changing the standby sequence restart setting a software reset must be executed or the power turned off and on to make the change take effect Setting range Units Default value 7 7 1 i 51 EN R Condition A Setting 6 Related setting data iii Alarm type Alarm setting leve
247. ing level P 8 42 Output 1 output type Output 3 output type Control initial setting level P 8 42 gt Event input 1 allocation Foul Event input 4 allocation E uH Event input 2 allocation Fue Event input 5 allocation Event input 3 allocation Eu 3 Event input 6 allocation Eu pe Use these settings to assign event input functions Setting range Units Default value 1 Disable 0 Write via communication OFF ON 1 Setting CH1 Bank No Bit O 2 CH1 Bank No Bit 1 3 CH1 Bank No Bit 2 4 CH1 Run Stop 5 CH1 Auto Manual 6 CH1 SP mode Remote Local 7 CH2 Bank No Bit 0 8 CH2 Bank No Bit 1 9 CH2 Bank No Bit 2 10 CH2 Run Stop 11 CH2 Auto Manual 12 CH2 SP mode Remote Local 13 Similarly CH3 14 to 19 CH4 20 to 25 f the same setting is selected for different event input assignments the event input for which ON OFF is determined last will be effective Note that when the power is turned on and the same bank No assignment is repeated the event input with the higher number is given priority e SP modes Remote Local of CH2 to CH4 are disabled When the control mode is set to cascade control assign the following CH2 operation commands e CH2 Run Stop 11 e CH2 Auto Manual 12 CH2 SP mode Remote Local 13 Cascade open Cascade open closed Related information 5 7 Using event input P 5 29 8 47 I Section 8
248. ing level P 8 55 Alarm hysteresis Alarm setting level P 8 56 Standby sequence restart Alarm setting level P 8 57 8 13 Display adjustment level 8 13 Display adjustment level L This level contains settings for adjustment of the display contents including selection of the PV SP display screen bar graph display item display refresh period monitor item level setting and display scan Power on om om om 1 Operation level key Less than 1 second Adjustment key Less Adjustment 2 key Less than 1 second Bank setting level key less than 1 second y key Less than 1 second PID setting level Approximation LI LI LI LI LI x LI 8 LI LI L LI 1 setting level L Pud key Less than 1 second m m m m im om om om m om m om om om om im im om om om om om om om im im m m om im om m mu im om im om im mu im im om im im om im im om mu mu mu im m key 1 second nput initi level key 3 seconds al setting key Less than 1 second Control initial setting level key Less than 1 second Control initial setting 2 level key Less than 1
249. initial setting Cooling coefficient 0 50 Dead band 0 00 C initial setting In the following the control mode SP and cooling coefficient are set and the initial settings are used for the other parameters 1 Turn on the power and then hold down the 1 key for at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Input initial setting level 3 2 Heating cooling control of a chemical reaction device 2 Press the key for less than 1 second to move from Input initial setting level to Control initial setting level Control initial setting level Output 1 Output type I 2 3 Press the ce repeatedly to select Aaa Control mode Press the key to select 1 Heating cooling control Control mode 2 RUN level 4 Hold down the key for at least 1 second to return to RUN level PV SP MV will appear Press the key to set the value to 250 0 Present value PV SP MV Lut j gt w ca ju w XJ 2 a m y ln g X 5 Press the key less than 1 second to move from RUN level to Adjustment level
250. inues control using a remote SP equivalent to the MV at error of the primary loop For this reason be sure to set MV at error for the primary loop Section 3 Typical Control Examples 3 9 Ratio control of dyeing machines Ratio control is used to maintain a constant proportional relationship between two or more variables E Application Channel 1 3 18 This machine mixes a constant proportion of flowing sand and dye in order to dye the sand a uniform color Ratio control that maintains a constant weight ratio between sand and dye Dye Sand Color liquid Flow meter 1 4 o Sand weight meter 1 78 Settings are shovvn vvhen 4 to 20 mA is used in the input from the dye flovv sensor 4 to 20 mA is used in the input from the sand vveight measurement sensor and a pump is used that is driven by an inverter with a 4 to 20 mA input is used in the manipulation system Control of the proportion of gas to air is also carried out in firing control in gas kilns With the goal of preventing pollution and saving energy the proportion of gas to air is strictly controlled to prevent incomplete combustion and improve combustion effi ciency 3 5 Ratio control of dyeing machines B Wiring ll Settings IN1 is connected to the adjustment system and IN2 is connected to the sensor in the reference system A flow meter is connected to IN1
251. ion I Section 1 Overview 2 When the control output is current output the indicator turns off when the MV is 096 or less and turns on when the manipulated variable is greater than 0 E Explanation of the keys NE Level key Press to change setting levels Mode key Press to change the setting data within a setting level Each time is pressed the value of display 2 increases Hold down A Up key the key to increase the value quickly The key is also used to scroll for ward through the setting item Each time is pressed the value of display 2 decreases Hold down Dovvn key the key to decrease the value quickly The key is also used to scroll backward through the setting item Press to change to a protected level See 4 1 Configuration of Setting Protect key Levels and Key Operation page 4 2 for operation when the II key and are pressed simultaneously When pressed this function key activates the function set in PF1 set ting Example PF1 setting is A M A M is the default setting Functions as an Auto Manual key hereafter shown as the key that is used to switch between auto mode and manual mode The mode changes when the key is pressed for at least one second the timing of key release does not matter Function key 1 Auto Manual key Functions as a channel ke
252. ion on addresses see the Modbus section in Appendix Setting list P A 6 Note that the addresses indicated in the variable area map are addresses of channel 1 For example to specify an address of channel 2 on a multi point input type add H 4000 to the address in the variable area map For channel 3 add H 8000 and for channel 4 add H COOO e Number of The number of elements is expressed as a 2 byte hexadecimal value elements The specification range for the number of elements varies depending on the command See 7 9 Commands and responses Communi cation Modbus P 7 17 For example if the number of elements is 0010 the first 8 elements of data H 10 from the address are specified In Modbus protocol one element is two bytes of data however setting data on the E5AR ER is four bytes 6 Set values Values read and written to the variable area are expressed in hexadecimal and disregard the decimal point position negative values are expressed as a two s complement Example D 105 0 H 0000041A The variable is an 8 digit number in hexadecimal Negative values are expressed as a two s complement The decimal is disregarded For example if the PV of the E5AR ER is 105 0 it will be read as H 0000041A 105 0 1050 H 00000414A Use of the variable area on the E5AR ER is explained in the following sections 7 9 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 5 Reading the variable area The variable area is read by setti
253. ipped portion of Goods sold hereunder and stop any Goods in transit until Buyer pays all amounts includ ing amounts payable hereunder whether or not then due which are owing to it by Buyer Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts Cancellation Etc Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation unless Buyer indemnifies Seller fully against all costs or expenses arising in connection therewith Force Majeure Seller shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery resulting from causes beyond its control including earthquakes fires floods strikes or other labor disputes shortage of labor or materials accidents to machinery acts of sabotage riots delay in or lack of transportation or the requirements of any government authority Shipping Delivery Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Seller a Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Seller b Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier shall constitute delivery to Buyer c All sales and shipments of Goods shall be FOB shipping point unless oth erwise stated in writing by Seller at which point title to and all risk of loss of the Goods shall pass from Seller to Buyer provided that Seller shall retain a security interest in the Goods until the full purchase price is paid by Buyer d Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only e Seller will package Goods as it deems proper for protection
254. isplay 1 Display 2 the bank number appears in Display 3 At Display 2 the MV appears in Display 3 Display screen selection Display adjustment level can be used to set the display sequence to Display 1 Display 2 Display 2 Display 3 Display 1 only or Display 2 only The initial setting is Display 2 Display 3 PV SP MV PV SP Bank No 6 Related setting data Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 Input temperature units Input initial setting level P 8 37 Scaling input value 1 Scaling display value 1 Scaling input value 2 Scaling display value 2 Decimal point position Input initial setting level P 8 37 Remote SP upper limit Remote SP lower limit Input initial setting level P 8 38 PV decimal point display Input initial setting level P 8 39 SP upper limit SP lower limit Control initial setting level P 8 43 SP mode Adjustment level P 8 14 PV SP display screen selection Display adjustment level P 8 60 y s Local SP control mode set to standard control with remote SP e This is used to monitor the remote SP while in local SP mode e n remote SP mode the remote SP can be monitored in Display 2 of the PV SP screen Monitor range Units Remote SP lower limit to remote SP upper limit EU Note that the SP limits are in effect CH Ramp SP monitor CH MV monitor heating 8 3 Operation level Related setting d
255. ist is Not occurred 0 If this command is used in setting area 1 the related information is undefined B Echo back test Response 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F MRC SRC Test data This command is used to perform an echo back test The command can be used in any state of the EBAR ER Keep the test data within the following ranges depending on the communication data length Communication Description data length p ASCII code H 20 to H 7E ASCII code H 20 to H 7E or H A1 to H FE MRC SRC Response code Test data Low pow Doo KTN Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 6 31 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 10 Program example M N88Basic 6 32 This program displays the response from the E5AR ER on the screen when command data is entered from the keyboard Command data from the unit number to the number of elements must be entered The program was created in N88BASIC PROGRAM E5AR ER Communication Sample Program CompoWay F VERSION 1 00 c Copyright OMRON Corporation 2003 All Rights Reserved OPEN COM E73 AS 1 SENDDATA Communication data input INPUT SEND DATA SEND If no input jump to end routine IF SEND THEN EXITSEND BCC 0 SEND SEND CHR 3 FOR I 1 TO LEN SEND BCC BCC XOR ASC MIDS SENDS
256. itten to internal non volatile memory When communication is used to write setting data of Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting or Approximation setting level the data is not written to internal non volatile memory RAM write mode When SP tracking or PV tracking is ON and the mode is changed to remote SP mode or manual mode the SP is not written to internal non volatile memory Note that when a change is made by key operation the data is written to non volatile memory Backup mode When the write mode is changed from RAM write mode to Backup mode the setting data of Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting and Approximation setting levels is written to internal non volatile memory Each level is explained in 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 The time required for RAM backup varies depending on the number of settings that were changed in RAM backup mode The more settings that were changed the longer the time required For example if all settings in Operation Adiust ment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting and Approxi mation levels were changed the most time would be required which is about 2 seconds Hesponse B RAM data store Hesponse B Software reset Hesponse 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F MRC SRC Response code Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation com
257. l P 8 52 Travel time Control initial setting 2 level P 8 52 Position proportional dead band Adjustment level P 8 17 Open Close hysterisis Adjustment level P 8 17 Operation at potentiometer input error Expansion control setting level P 8 79 P Lt Input 1 cold junction compensation y y Cat ea r Input 2 cold junction compensation 4 x r Lt Input 3 cold junction compensation e il nd Input type is thermocouple input P r Input 4 cold junction compensation e When the input type is thermocouple input this setting is used to specify whether cold junction compensation is performed inside the controller or outside the controller e Select External cold junction compensation when two thermo couples are used to measure the temperature difference or when an external cold junction compensator is used for increased accuracy n Setting range Units Default value e 7 External an Internal Internal Setting 6 Related setting data Ex Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 8 75 I Section 8 Setting data CH CH PV tracking 8 76 A Setting E Setting 42 m yum PROC This setting is normally used at the default value e This sets the advanced PID constant o Setting range Units Default value 0 00 to 1 00 DEM 0 65 LL
258. l P 8 54 Alarm latch Alarm setting level P 8 55 8 57 I Section 8 Setting data Auxiliary output 1 non exciting Auxiliary output 2 non exciting Auxiliary output 3 non exciting Auxiliary output 4 non exciting 8 58 a Setting ay yu ane uM Lt ni yu ni c pum Lit n bos gt jw Ct va Lt wu yu yu Lt x ni eU These settings are used to select the output state of alarms 1 2 3 and 4 e When close in alarm is selected the state of the alarm output function is output without change When open in alarm is selected the state of the output function is inverted before output The relation between the alarm output function alarm output and operation indicator is shown below Auxiliary Auxiliary Operation o Open in alarm Setting data Setting range Units Default value Auxiliary output 1 non exciting n Close in alarm Auxiliary output 2 non exciting 1 L Open in alarm n Close Auxiliary output 3 non exciting in alarm Auxiliary output 4 non exciting Related setting data Bank alarm Bank setting level P 8 28 Bank alarm upper limit Bank alarm lower limit Bank setting level P 8 29 Auxiliary output assignment Control initial setting level 2 P 8 48 Alarm type Alarm setting level P 8 54 Alarm latch Alarm sett
259. l Calibration level Advanced control settings and position proportional settings Calibration by the user To move to the special function setting level set Initial setting protect in the Protect level to 0 J LAd Adjustment 2 level In following each levels control is stopped input initial settings control initial setting control initial settings 2 alarm settings display adjustment communication settings advanced function settings expansion control settings and calibration Note that control will stop on all channels if you move to any of these levels Display 3 shows the current level The characters and the corre sponding levels are as follows Display 3 LE Protect level R N level Adjustment level tea Bank settinglevel O tK Piselngewi LEET Approximation setting level Technical LA Monitoritemlevel May appear depending on the selected setting data 21 4 Display adjustment level 4 3 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 2 Set values The values selected for each setting are called set values There are two types of set values numbers and characters Set values are displayed and changed as follows Changing a numeric set value 1 Press the key continuously to increase the set v
260. l communication Featuring a unified frame format and commands that are compliant with FINS which has a record of successful use with OMRON programmable controllers CompoWay F makes communi cation easy between multiple components and a computer The communication function is used by creating a program on the host computer As such the explanations in this section are from the perspective of the host computer For example Read Write refers to the host computer reading or writing to the EBAR ER FINS Factory Interface Network Service This is a protocol for message communication between controllers on an OMRON factory automation network E Communication TT Transfer connection Multi point specifications Communication method RS 485 2 wire half duplex Synchronization method Start stop Baud rate 9 6 k 19 2 k 38 4 k bit s Send code ASCII Data length 7 8 bits Stop bit length 1 2 bits Error detection Vertical parity None Even Odd BCC Block Check Character Start stop synchronized data configuration Flow control None Interface RS 485 Retry function None nitial settings are shaded M Transfer protocol Communication CompoWay F The host computer sends a command frame and the E5AR ER sends a response frame based on the content of the command frame One response frame is sent in response to one command frame Host computer E5AR ER The exchange between the command frame and response frame
261. laram l l 8 28 HADI aida is asiste fes metuat dores asa 8 28 Alarm hysteresis 5 26 8 56 Flarn mnlaeh za l b 5 27 8 55 Alarm lower limit 8 29 Alarm setting level 8 53 A 23 Alarm types 4 23 8 54 Alarm upper limit 8 29 Alarm Valu6S 4 24 Analog input calibration 9 8 Analog parameter 8 25 Approximation setting level 8 33 A 16 ASCOIIGOGGSL tegmen peo UA UR A 5 AT Auto tuning 4 19 8 13 AT calculated gain 8 78 AT CANCE a aa lag 6 23 7 23 AT execute 6 23 7 23 AT Excute Gancel icri 8 13 AT DysteresiS a R s b hukaq 8 78 Auto Manual 4 29 5 30 6 27 7 27 8 11 Automatic selection range upper limit 5 12 Auxiliary output assignment 1 11 4 22 8 48 Auxiliary output non exciting 5 27 8 58 Auxiliary outputs terminals 2 13 Bank change sua 6 22 7 22 Bank NO aaa Da UAE 8 13 Bank No Bits to 2 5 30 Bank setting level 8 26 A 14 Banks al ual 1 2 5 9 Bar graph display items 8 61 Broke
262. larm type table When separate upper and lower limit alarm values are set the upper limit value is indicated by H and the lower limit is indicated by L When upper and lower limit upper and lower limit range or lower limit alarm with standby sequence is selected the Alarm upper limit and Alarm lower limit settings must be configured Alarm value must be configured when any other alarm type is selected M Settings To output an alarm to the auxiliary output the Auxiliary output assignment Alarm type and Alarm value settings must be configured Outputting a lower limit alarm to auxiliary output 2 using CH 1 alarm 1 and an alarm value of 10 0 C Auxiliary output 2 The following explains how to set Auxiliary output 2 assignment to assignment CH 1 alarm 1 in Control initial setting level 2 1 Hold down the key at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Input initial setting level e Em gt 2 In Input initial setting level Display 3 shows L Zi Press the key twice less than 1 second each time to move to Control initial setting 2 level 3 In Control initial setting 2 level Display 3 shows L Z Press the key repeatedly less than 1 second each time to select Auxi
263. latile memory Operation and Adjustment levels are explained in 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 H00 H O0 H05 H O0 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 HOO H00 H06 H00 1 1 2 2 2 bytes A software reset causes the same operation as turning the power off and on This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command No response A response is not returned to this operation command 7 25 Section 7 Communication Modbus E Move to setting area 1 M Move to protect level 7 26 Response Response Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 me me Hoo mr mo 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Use this command to move to setting area 1 The command is used in setting area 0 Nothing happens if the command is used in setting area 1 If the comman
264. layed regardless of the conditions of use although they are in effect In the case of settings that can be configured separately for each channel on a multi point input type appears to upper left of each of these settings in this section as x V w RC During control using advanced PID control Display symbol Display 1 Setting data for each channel Level indication Display 3 6 Order of explanation of settings 8 2 Settings are explained by level 8 2 Protect level L Prt 8 2 Protectlevel 2 6 Protect level consists of four types of protection Operation adjustment protect Initial setting protect Setting change protect and PF key protect Each is used to protect the corresponding settings and prevent accidental changes to the settings Povver on Protect levels PAE E L PLI E D than 1 second than 1 second key less key less 1 than 1 second than 1 second Approximation 1x PID setting Bank setting Setting change protect setting E level OFF 0 ON 1 level 1 EEE keyless 1 Ped keys level m bar than 1 second than 1 second Mo mare sz EM E EE d remm e mi EVE NET HUS nun ete te Er PF key protect 17 1OFF 0 ON 1 C Control in 7 progress Hcei1 sec Hcei3 sec or l
265. ld the key down for at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Input initial setting level jm Lx d cx e ju w Dur a m m x JE w X 2 Press the ce key to select 2 igui Input 1 Temperature units Select C F with the AI key r C F F 3 Hold the key down for at least 1 second to return to RUN level amp LX a a 1124 a a w Z i Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 6 Selecting the control mode The control mode allows various types of control to performed The control mode is initially set to standard control e Standard control Heating cooling control 2 Performs standard heating or cooling control The Direct reverse operation setting is used to select heating reverse action or cooling direct action When using PID control the Proportional band P Integral time D and Derivative time D settings must be configured These PID constants can be set using AT Auto tuning or manually When the proportional band P is set to 0 0026 control becomes ON OFF control Performs heating and cooling control
266. liary output 2 assignment 4 24 4 11 Using auxiliary output Alarm 1 type Rep n yum pur mn m a per JE yur C 2 Bank 0 Alarm value 1 4 Press the to set the auxiliary output 2 assignment to 1 CH 1 alarm 1 Set Alarm 1 type to Lower limit alarm in Alarm setting level 5 Press the key less than 1 second to move to Alarm setting level The display will show Alarm 1 type 6 Press the A key to select 3 Lower limit alarm Set Bank Alarm 1 value to 10 0 C in Bank setting level 7 Hold down the 8 Press the key at least 1 second to move to RUN level key three times less than 1 second each time to move to Bank setting level Press the Press the key repeatedly to select Bank alarm 1 value
267. limit are explained in this section E Auxiliary output assignment This setting assigns the type of data that is output from each auxiliary output On multi point output types data assignments can be set for channels 2 and higher as appropriate for the number of channels Auxiliary output Auxiliary output assignment Channel 1 alarm 1 Channel 1 alarm 2 Channel 1 alarm 3 Channel 1 alarm 4 Channel 1 input error Channel 1 RSP input error H Channel 1 5 A ALM output U ALM output is an OR output overall alarm of alarms 1 to 4 of all channels The initial settings are as follows 1 point input type 2 point input type E5AR LILILIW E5ER LILILIW chi alarm 1 ch1 alarm ch1 alarm 3 ch1 alarm 4 4 point input ypeE5AR L IL WW TU The EB5ER LIA2LIL and EBER SUB3 and SUBA auxiliary output 2 point types are not equipped with 4 22 4 11 Using auxiliary output M Alarm types SP Set point T output function Set value in general Aarm ype Alarm value X is positive Alarm value X is negative Alarm function OFF Output OFF Upper and lower limit deviation Upper limit deviation 7 Lovver limit deviation Upper and lower limit range deviation x1 x1 Upper and lower limit alarm 1 6 with standby sequence deviation Upper limit alarm 6 with stanbdy sequence deviation Lower limit alarm with stanbdy seq
268. local 6 Communication e When the event input is ON setting data can be written with the vvrite OFF ON communication function and the CMVV indicator lights up The content of the event input is reflected in Communication OFF ON Adjustment level e This setting data is an operation command that is common to all channels e Operation is as follows based on the event input ON OFF state OOO Write via communication OFF Write via communication ON 5 29 Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 30 Bank No Bits 0 to 2 e Run Stop Auto Manual ME The bank number is specified by the event input ON OFF state The content of the event input is reflected in Bank No Adjustment level This setting data is an operation command that is particular to a single channel Operation is as follows based on the event input ON OFF state Event input Bank No Bank No Bank No Description Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 F F F F Run Bank No 0 Run Bank No 1 Run Bank No 2 Run Bank No 3 Run Bank No 4 Run Bank No 5 ON Run Bank No 6 N Run Bank No 7 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON To use eight banks Banks 0 to 7 3 event input points are required VVhen the event input is ON operation is stopped and the STOP indicator lights up The content of the event input is reflected in Run Stop Run level This setting data is an operation command that is particular to a single ch
269. lue 8 77 Manual output method 8 77 Manual reset value 8 15 Manual settings 4 21 Modbus communication protocol 7 2 lee Nc Tc 1 6 Monitor item level setting 8 62 Monitor value setting data compound read Communication CompoWay F 6 16 Monitor value setting data compound read store write 6 19 Monitor value setting data compound read store check read 6 20 Monitor value setting data compound store read 6 20 Monitor value read Communication CompoWay F 6 14 Monitor value read Communication Modbus 7 17 Monitor Setting item 5 22 Motor calibration 3 12 8 52 Motor calibration error 10 3 Move average 5 5 8 23 Movement average enable 8 50 Move to advanced function setting level REM 8 40 Move to calibration level 8 71 Move to protect level 6 26 7 26 Move to setting area 1 6 26 7 26 MV at PV error 5 18 8 18 MV at stop 4 26 5 18 8 18 MV change rate limit
270. lue and the SP ramp fall value can be set separately I Section 3 Typical Control Examples M Settings for position proportional control Closed Floating e Motor calibration and travel time Position proportional dead band and Open Close hysterisis PV dead band Operation at potentiometer input error When position proportional control is selected Closed Floating Motor calibration Travel time Position proportional dead band Open Close hysterisis Operation at potentiometer input error and PV dead band can be used e Closed control Control whereby a potentiometer is connected to feed back the amount of opening of the valve e Floating control Control without feedback of the amount of opening of the valve Control is possible without connecting a potentiometer Run Motor calibration when a potentiometer is connected for closed control or floating control that monitors the amount of valve opening This will also automatically set the Travel time which is the amount of time from when the valve is completely open to when the valve is completely closed When performing floating control without a potentiometer it is necessary to manually set the Travel time Set the travel time to the amount of time from when the valve is completely open to when the valve is completely closed The valve output hold interval the duration of ON OFF switching of open output and closed output is s
271. mands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information This writes the setting data of Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting and Approximation setting levels to internal non volatile memory For information on these levels see 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information A software reset causes the same operation as turning the power off and on This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command No response A response is not returned to this operation command 6 25 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F E Move to setting area 1 M Move to protect level 6 26 Hesponse Response nstruction Related MRC SRC code information Use this command to move to setting area 1 The command is used in setting area 0 Nothing happens if the command is used in setting area 1 If the command is used when Initial setting pr
272. ment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting Approximation setting Monitor item level and Protect levels The keys are only effective when PF key protect is OFF Operation adjustment protect and Setting change protect do not apply to the function keys Run Stop and Bank No parameter settings can be changed and saved using a function key if the key is set to the corre sponding function 5 21 I Section 5 Functions and Operations Monitor Setting item PF1 setting or PF2 setting can be set to Monitor Settings PF d to display monitor settings using a function key The content to be displayed is set for each channel in Monitor Setting item 1 through Monitor Setting item 5 of the corresponding function key The selections are shown in the following table for the setting or monitor ranges see the respective explanations of the setting data TH E Remake Description value Monitor Setting Display Disabled 2 27 Disabled 0000 PvisPBankNo PVSPMV Gan set SP 3 PViDeviaion Monitor ony Proportional band P ime D PF1 monitor Setting item 1 Setting ru ri Alarm upper limit 1 Alarm lower limit 1
273. mmands and responses Communication CompoWay F M Protect level setting data write Response Variable Number of MRC SRC type Address Bit position elements Data Setting data 0000 Operation adjustment protect 0001 Initial setting level protect 0002 Setting change protect 0003 PF key protect This command vrrites protect level setting data See 5 5 Protecting settings P 5 24 for information on protect level This command is used in setting area O An error will result if used in setting area 1 To use this command use the Write via communication operation command to enable Write via communication and then use the Move to protect level operation command to move to Protect level MRC SRC Response code Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 6 Writing to the variable area P 6 10 M Setting data write Communication CompoWay F Variable Number of MRC SRC Hype Address Bit position elements Data ATL vT r Variable Address Setting data type Explanation 0000 to 007F Setting data of setting area 0 1 baa RUN level m 0100 to 017F 2 Adjustment level C8 Co Adjustment level 2 pm 0200 to 027F 3 Bank setting level CA PID setting level CB E i 0300 to 037F Approximation setting level 0000 to 0039 Setting data of setting area 1 Input initial setting level CE 0100 to 0139 2 Control initial setting level CF C
274. mode Mode 0 0 Mode 1 1 ce L Lh TRH 4 u ee ss output 4 upper limit ce HRL 4 Transfer output 4 lower limit LAG 1 First order lag operation 1 enabled OFF ON First order lag operation 4 enabled OFF ON MAV 1 Movement average 1 enabled OFF ON MAV 4 Movement average 4 enabled OFF ON SQR 1 Extraction of square root 1 enabled OFF ON SQR 4 Extraction of square root 4 enabled AFF OFF ON SCL 1 Straight line approximation 1 enabled SCL 2 Straight line approximation 2 enabled co OFF ON Er Broken line approximation 1 enabled aFF OFF ON co CALB Motor calibration OT Travel time 999 Expansion Control Setting Level AT G AT calculated gain 0 1 10 0 AT H AT hysteresis 015919 R LCMA n Limit cycle MV amplitude 5 0 50 0 TATE Temporary AT execute judgement deviation 0 0 100 0 co h RBMP Bumpless at Run rp Disabled OFF Enabled ON ce p P MEC t 4 Operation at potentiometer input error oF E Stop OFF Continue ON DOST daak Disturbance overshoot adjustment function OFF ON Setting data list See page A 30 to input initial setting level A 1key 1 second or more Control starts less than
275. munication CompoWay F e Number of elements 6 Set values Channel identifier For multi point input types that require settings for channels 2 to 4 specify 1 to 3 to identify the channels On single input types only 0 Channel 1 can be specified In area address This is a number that is assigned to each set of data in the variable area Addresses are assigned in order beginning from the first set For more information on addresses see Appendix Setting list P A 6 Note that the addresses indicated in the setting list are addresses of channel 1 For example to specify an address of channel 2 add 0100 to the address in the setting list For channel 3 add 0200 and for channel 4 add 0300 The number of elements is expressed as a 2 byte hexadecimal number The specification range for the number of elements varies depending on the command See 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompovVVay F P 6 14 for more information For example if the number of elements is 0010 the first 16 elements of data H 10 from the address are specified Values read and written to the variable area are expressed in hexadecimal and disregard the decimal point position negative values are expressed as a two s complement Example D 105 0 H 0000041A The variable is an 8 digit number in hexadecimal Negative values are expressed as a two s complement The decimal is disregarded For example if the PV of the E5AR ER is 105 0 it
276. n Mod bus P 7 17 Unit error unit change display unit error non volatile memory error Normal end No error Command response example Operation command to channel 2 client address H 01 Channel 2 operation command Address H 0000 Written data H 0111 Stop command to channel 2 Command CRC 16 Response 00 001 01 111 CRC 16 7 15 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 8 Setting areas The EBAR ER has two setting areas for communication functions Setting area 0 and setting area 1 In setting area O control continues As such setting area O makes it possible to perform operations that require control to be in progress such as reading the PV writing an SP and run stop as well as operations that do not interfere with control On the other hand operations that may change control such as writing initial setting data cannot be performed Note that setting data that cannot be written can still be read In setting area 1 control is stopped This makes it possible to perform operations such as writing initial setting data which are not possible in setting area O When the power is turned on setting area O is selected To access setting area 1 use the Move to setting area 1 operation command To return to setting area O from setting area 1 turn off the power or use the Software reset operation command Power on Software reset Operation instruction Setting area 0 Move to setting area 1 Settin
277. n data is stored in non volatile memory If you do not wish to save the data in non volatile memory press the el key instead of the A key e For a multi point input type connect as explained in step 2 and repeat steps 5 to 9 e f linear current output is selected continue with the procedure explained in 9 6 Output calibration P 9 12 10 Turn off the power to quit calibration mode 9 9 Section 9 User calibration 9 5 Resistance temperature input sensor calibration The procedure for calibrating a resistance temperature input sensor is explained in the following EPAR ESER CD Input power supply For the connection vviring use vviring of the same thickness 1 Connect the power supply 2 Connect a precision resistance box 6 dial in the following to the input terminal of the resistance temperature input sensor as shown at left 3 Turn on the power 4 Move to calibration level A 30 minute aging time begins Perform aging using this time as a guideline When 30 minutes elapses Display 2 will show O Note that you can proceed to the next stop before the display shows O 5 Press the key c l to display the count value for each input type At this time the count value that was input will appear in Display 2 in hexadecimal Set the 6 di
278. n device has activated Increase the temperature setting of the overheating prevention device to a value higher than the SP of the EBAR ER Direct action and reverse action settings are Set the correct settings incorrect The PID values are not suitable Run AT e Set suitable PID values Control has not been started Start control The output does not increase due to MV limits Change the output limits to suitable values The cooling fan is running Stop the cooling fan 6 The measured value rises above the SP Possible cause Solution Abnormal measured value See section 10 3 The load is connected to the wrong channel and Wire correctly the heater is being controlled by the control output of another channel The contact of the control output drive relay has Replace the relay melted Short circuit failure in SSR Replace the SSR Current flows to heater due to SSR leakage Connect a bleeder resistor to prevent action due current to leakage current Direct action and reverse action settings are Set the correct settings incorrect The PID values are not suitable Run AT e Set suitable PID values The output does not decrease due to MV limits Change the output limits to suitable values Output is taking place in manual mode Stop manual mode The object of control generates heat Use heating cooling control Large overshoot See the Overshoot or undershoot troubleshooting table 10 5 i Section 10 Tr
279. n line approximation 5 6 8 34 Broken line approximation enable 8 51 Bump less at RUN 8 79 Cancel B C U ua n ada Aa 6 28 7 28 Cascade control 3 13 Cascade heating cooling control 1 9 4 12 Cascade open close 8 14 Cascade standard control 1 9 4 12 CH2 operation indicator 1 5 Changing channels 4 30 Channel indication 1 5 Closed Floating 3 12 8 44 Close in alarm Open in alarm 5 27 CMW operation indicator 1 5 Cold junction compensation 8 75 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F 6 14 Commands and responses Communication Modbus 7 17 Communication terminals 2 13 Communication data length 8 65 Communication parity 8 65 Communication protocol selection 8 64 Communication setting level 8 63 A 25 Communication speed 8 64 Communication stop bit 8 65 Communication Unit No 8 64 CompoWay F communication protocol 6 2 Connecting the cold junction compensator ooh cie
280. nd cooling control The heating control output P and the cooling control output P are as follows Heating P P Cooling P Heating P x Cooling coefficient The cooling P is obtained by multiplying the heating P by the cooling coefficient and cooling output control is performed with different characteristics than heating control output Output Output 100 100 Heat side side Heat side side 076 py 0 PV gt A Heat side P x 0 8 Heat side P Heat side P x 1 5 SP S Heat side P o gt 3 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln 3 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln The control method whereby a potentiometer is used to read the amount of opening of a valve and then open or close the valve by means of an attached control motor is called position proportional control or on off servo control E Application To control a gas kiln using a position proportional control valve select the control valve control type and configure the instrumentation as shown in the following example Potentiometer SP ramp SP ramp setting value SP ramp in units of time 4 20 mA transfer output Temperature sensor MN E55A Recorder When there is a concern that sudden temperature changes will damage or change the composition of an object such as a ceramic work the SP ramp function can
281. nd error Could not execute the specified FINS command Sum of bits that are 1 in received data does not agree 10 Parity error a U with the set communication parity value Stop bit of command frame characters is 0 s l Attempted to transfer nevv data because received data 12 Overrun error U buffer is already full Calculated BCC different from received BCC Characters other than O to 9 or A to F in FINS mini command text In the case of an echo back test when 144 aman data other than the test data is sent No SID and FINS mini command text or no FINS mini command text MBC SBC not correct in FINS mini command text No sub address SID or FINS mini command text or 16 Sub address error sub address less than 2 characters and no SID and FINS mini command text 6 5 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 3 FINS mini text The FINS mini command text and FINS mini response text form the body of command response commu nication FINS mini command text and FINS mini response text are configured as follows Command text FINS mini command text consists of an MRC main request code and an SBC sub request code followed by the required data FINS mini STX Node No Sub address SID command text ETX BCC Response text FINS mini response text consists of the MRC and SRC followed by an MRES main response code and SRES sub response code and then the required data FINS mini STX Node No Sub ad
282. ne nitial settings are shaded M Transfer protocol Communication Modbus 7 2 The host computer sends a command frame and the E5AR ER sends a response frame based on the content of the command frame One response frame is sent in response to one command frame Host computer E5AR ER The exchange betvveen the command frame and response frame is explained belovv After a receiving a response from the controller have the host computer vvait at least 5 ms before sending the next command 7 1 Communication method When writing multiple sets of setting data in a row such as when writing to the variable area or performing a compound write controlla bility may be affected Pay attention to the following points Maximum of 3 setting data sets can be written Response 50 ms or higher 7 3 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 2 Frames Based on the Modbus RTU communication protocol commands from the host computer and responses from the E5AR ER take the form of frames The data comprising command frames and response frames are explained below In the following explanation an H at the beginning of a numeric value for example H 02 indicates that the value is a hexadecimal number A number or letters enclosed in quotation marks for example 00 is an ASCII character E Command frame 6 Example of CRC 16 calculation CRC 16 calculation method As indicated at right the value from the clie
283. ng Display 2 will blink and indicate that AT is running Only Write via communication Run Stop AT Execute Cancel and Auto Manual can be changed while AT is running No other settings can be changed e f Run Stop is set to Stop while AT is running AT will stop and operation will stop If Run is then selected AT will not resume e f an input error occurs while AT is running AT will stop AT will run again after recovery from the error e f AT is started during SP ramp AT will run for the ramp SP The timing for generating a limit cycle varies depending on whether or not the deviation DV when AT is begun is less than the temporary AT execution judgement deviation initial setting 10 096 FS PV during AT is as follows Deviation gt 10 FS Present Limit cycle MV amplitude 4096 value PV SP aq SP Present value PV Deviation 1096 FS Limit cycle MV amplitude 40 Deviation Deviation 1096 FS 1096 FS b d p Time AT start AT end AT start AT end The amplitude of change of the limit cycle MV can be changed in Limit cycle MV amplitude For heating cooling and position proportional floating type control the limit cycle is as follows regardless of the deviation Limit cycle MV aie amplitude 100 i i AT start AT end E Manual settings 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings To set the PID co
284. ng data read Communication CompoWay F Hesponse Variable MRC SRC type Address Bit position Number of elements Variable Setting data Address type Explanation Setting data of setting area 0 0000 to OO7F Protect level RUN level Adiustment level Adiustment level 2 Bank setting level PID setting level 0300 to 037F Approximation setting level 2 0000 to 0039 1 Setting data of setting area 1 Input initial setting level 0100 to 017F 0200 to 027F 0100 to 0139 Control initial setting level Control initial setting 2 level Alarm setting level Display adjustment level Communications setting level Special function setting level Expansion control setting level 0200 to 0239 0300 to 0339 This command is used to read setting data The number of elements can be set from 0002 to 0019 to allow successive reading of 2 to 25 items of setting data in contiguous addresses To specify the variable type or address see Appendix Setting list P A 6 The upper limit of an address will vary depending on the variable type This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 When used in setting area 1 the response for the remote SP monitor ramp SP monitor and valve opening monitor is 0 and the response for the status is as indicated in the notes in Appendix Setting list Status P A 8 MRC SRC Response code Data Low p PI Hesponse codes The above indicates a norm
285. ng the position of a variable within the variable area using a channel identifier area number and in area address Address Each variable type has an address Each address is two bytes long Communication and expressed in hexadecimal Assign addresses according to units of Modbus access size An address consists of a channel identifier area number and in area address Address 2 bytes A 2 77 pie v Channel Area number 00 to 3F Address in area 00 to FE indentifiers 0to 3 Area numbers Area numbers in the variable area are as follows Variable T Description type 06 RUN eve Adjustment level Setting area 0 Operation in 08 Adusmentiewl2 Progress 09 Bank setting level PID setting level 1 Approximation setting level Control initial setting 2 level Operation stopped nput initial setting level Control initial setting level 4 Alarm setting level Setting area 1 0 1 7 8 7 4 Variable area Channel identifier For multi point input types that require settings for channels 2 to 4 specify 1 to 3 to identify the channels On single input types only 0 Channel 1 can be specified Channel identifier Channel 1 1 Channel 2 2 Channel 3 3 Channel 4 In area address This is a number that is assigned to each set of data in the variable area Addresses are assigned in order beginning from the first set For more informat
286. ng the required data in the following command frame Command frame Slave Function Read start Number of address mode address elements CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Explanation Specify the Unit No of the EBAR ER Set in hexadeci mal from H 01 to H 63 1 to 99 The function code for variable area read is H 03 Specify the address of the setting data that you wish to First address of 1 read read For more information on addresses see Appendix Set ting list P A 6 Specify the number of setting data items that you wish to read x 2 for the number of elements The setting range is H 0002 to H 006A 2 to 106 Example If the number of setting data sets is 2 specify H 0004 Check code calculated based on the value from the cli ent address to the data end For the calculation method see 7 2 Frames Command frame Example of CRC 16 calculation P 7 4 Client address Number of elements Response frame Slave Function Byte Read data address mode count Data 1 Data 1 me Most significant Least significant 1 1 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes m Data n Datan CRC 16 Most significant 1 Least significant 5 2 Explanation Client address The value from the command frame appears here This is the received function code In an error response frame H 80 is added to the l received function code to indicate that it is an error Function code response Example Received function code H
287. nk 7 Alarm value 1 19999 99999 pe a dies 7 AL1H Bank 7 Alarm upper limit 1 299991299999 O s T wa p gt Lass r E AS 4 7 AL1L Bank 7 Alarm lower limit 1 19999 99999 d r Li cis 22 A 7 AL4L Bank 7 Alarm lower limit 4 19999 99999 CH Display bank selection ju m V Use this setting to select the bank that you wish to display f n e Set the number of the bank that you wish to display e Up to 8 banks Bank Nos 0 to 7 can be used An SP local SP alarm value and PID Set No are stored in each bank el data Setting range Default value value tion Setting Bank number selected for execution Related setting data Reference Bank No Adjustment level P 8 13 8 26 8 6 Bank setting level 5 CH z Lt Bank local SP LSP d O to 7 Use this setting to set the SP local SP in each bank The SP of banks to 7 be set e When an SP is changed in PV SP in Operation level the local SP of the currently used bank is also changed A Setting data Setting data Setting range cs Default value m SP lovver limit to Setting 6 Related information M 5
288. nput 4 type RSPL Remote SP lower e imit z ce PVDP PV decimal point display an OFF 0 ON 1 j SNC Sensor induction noise Temperature Lower limit of sensor setting range to upper limit of sensor setting range Analog Larger of 19999 and display value equivalent to input lower limit to AMOV smaller of 99999 and display value Move to advanced function setting equivalent to input upper limit level 1999 9999 Temperature Lower limit of sensor setting range to upper limit of sensor setting range Analog Smaller of 99999 and display value equivalent to input upper limit to remote SP upper limit 1 8 35 I Section 8 Setting data Input 1 input type Input 2 input type Input 3 input type Input 4 input type 8 36 1 Setting mn P 4 m nm I 9 nm P 4 Lt nm Pu gt P 4 PR nnm e These settings are used to set the sensor type e f these settings are changed the SP limit settings are returned to the initial settings In this case reset the SP upper limit and SP lower limit settings as necessary e Refer to the following table to configure the settings Initial settings are shaded Setting range Input type Setting Input Ki 200105000 00109000 T 000104000 300 0 to 700 0 E 001060001 00to11000 s 16 One of the following ranges appears
289. nput assignment diagram corrected Page 1 10 Control transfer output allocation diagram corrected Page 1 12 Item 11 corrected to Communications method Pages 2 4 to 2 7 Terminal arrangement graphics corrected Page 2 8 Paragraph belovv the table deleted Page 2 9 Note added below the table Page 2 10 E5ER graphic on the right side deleted and E5ER on the left graphic changed to EBER Li4L L 1 Page 2 11 Event inputs 3 to 7 corrected to event inputs 3 to 6 in tvvo paragraphs under Event inputs terminals Page 3 11 and throughout the manual Control initial setting level 2 corrected to Control initial setting 2 level Page 3 16 The RSP indicator in the graphic under RUN level Ch 2 corrected to OFF from ON Page 4 7 PID adiustment level corrected to PID setting level Page 4 22 Auxiliary output assignment diagram corrected Page 4 25 Item 8 Press the level key twice corrected to Press the level key three times Page 4 31 Item 1 About two seconds corrected to About four seconds Page 5 9 Monitor and setting range for SP ramp time unit in the top table corrected Page 5 30 Auto Manual Adiustment level corrected to Auto Manual RUN level under Auto Manual Page 8 12 DOTC Disturbance time constant under Adjustment level corrected to 0 01 99 99 Pages 8 15 8 16 8 19 8 27 8 31 and 8 32 PID Set No corrected to PID Page 8 26 The s
290. nputs Auxiliary outputs EV1 pe o Auxiliary outputs EV1 ey Transistor outputs Transistor outputs EV2 EV2 s 2 SUB1 SUB1 4 ME NE 7 COM x xo V PT TC Current Voltage Thermocoup Resistance thermometer i 1 o6 6 e amp f O V PT Current Voltage Thermocouple Resistance thermometer E53 ARR4 Auxiliary outputs Relay outputs E5ER AB 500 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC D o o 3 Input power supply depends on the model 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity J V E53 ARQC3 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 20 mA DC 500 0 C Suvitch using output type setting J E5ER AB 500 Event inputs EV1 E53 ARCC OUT2 D 2 Current output 4 3 4 5 o 4 20 mA DC 500 max 0 20 mA 500 Q max Svvitch using output type setting t OUT1 Current output 8 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch using output type setting V PT Current Voltage Thermocouple Resistance thermometer Section 2 Preparations E5ER QT3DW FLK 2 loop Control E5ER AW 500 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC E53 ARB4 E gt 1 R kesi 00 0 Input power supply depends on the model
291. ns XII 5 1 Input adjustment functions ULU u u u Yi aaa aaa 5 2 ROL L aaa alm n 5 2 First order lag operation 5 5 Move average income aa a i oi u ba Ruas 5 5 Broken line approximation 5 6 Extraction of square root operations 5 7 Other input adjustment functions 5 7 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 Control Turcos aote mese 5 8 oUudubnmuasusu c l s s b 5 8 Pall ua 2 u bab n b la 5 9 SPI sure a su ma s bun 5 12 PID SSIS u Ec 5 12 Disturbance overshoot adjustment 5 14 Output adjustment functions 5 16 VAT deep M M 5 16 NIV CHANGe ram a s l 5 17 NIV IL LOD TR In 5 18 WIM at PVY OOT Vessa bigerren 00000 00 000000 5 18 Display and key adjustment functions 5 19 Bie SC LL E T 5 19 PF settings function Keys 5 21 Other display and key adjustment functions 5 23 PLOTECUNG SOTINGS uuu u
292. nstants manually set values for the Proportional band P Integral time I and Derivative time D f you already know the control characteristics directly set the PID constants and adjust control The PID constants are set in Proportional band P Integral time 1 and Derivative time D Integral time and D Derivative time can be set to to select propor tional action In the initial settings the manual reset value is set to 50 0 so that the proportional band is centered on the SP When P Proportional band is changed Slow rise and a longer rectifi cation time but no over shoot When P is increased Overshoot and hunting occur but attains the set value quickly and stabilizes When P is decreased When 1 Integral time is changed Longer time to attain the SP The rectification time is longer but there is less hunt ing overshoot and under shoot When P is increased Overshoot and undershoot When P is occur decreased Hunting occurs Quick rise Less overshoot and under VVhen P is i shoot rectification time but increased fine hunting occurs at own changes Overshoot and undershoot increase and more time is needed to return to the SP When P is decreased 4 21 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 11 Using auxiliary output Auxiliary output assignment Alarm type Alarm value Alarm upper limit and Alarm lower
293. nt address to the end of the data is calculated and the result set in CRC 16 7 4 In RTU mode each frame begins and ends with a silent time interval that is at least 3 5 characters long Slave Function address mode Data CRC 16 CRC 16 calculation range Silent interval at least 3 5 characters long Specify the Unit No of the EBAR ER Set in hexadecimal Client address from H OO to H 63 0 to 99 When broadcasting to all units specify H 00 Responses are not returned to a broadcast The function code indicates the type of command from the host computer The code is set in hexadecimal and is 1 Function code R m byte long For more information see 7 3 List of functions P 7 7 Text of command based on the function code Specifies Data variable addresses and the values of setting data specify in hexadecimal Cyclical Redundancy Check This is a check code calcu CRC 16 lated from the client address to the end of the data Two bytes in hexadecimal Silent interval at least 3 5 characters long The following explains how a message is processed 1 byte at a time in the processing register this is a 16 bit register called the CRC register 1 Setan initial value of H FFFF in the CRC register 2 Perform XOR on the CRC register and the 1st byte of the message and return the result to the CRC register 3 Shift the contents of the CRC register 1 bit to the right filling the MSB with o 4
294. nt does not activate in the following situations e When Disturbance rectification band or Disturbance judgement width is set to 0 e When the SP is changed when the SP change width exceeds the Disturbance rectification band e During AT e During ON OFF control P 0 00 During PD control I 0 00 Disturbance judgement width e The units for the Disturbance rectification band and Disturbance judgement width settings are FS As such if the input type is K 1 200 0 to 1300 0 C and you wish to set the Disturbance judgement width to 15 0 C 15 0 C 1500 0 C x 100 1 00 FS hence 1 00 should be set Disturbance rectification Temper Disturbance overshoot adjuster does not operate ature band ee m m SP 00 Ne Z Disturbance 2 5 E judgement Disturbance overshoot adjuster operates Time Default Setting data Setting range ums at Disturbance overshoot OFF Disabled OFF adjustment enable ON Enabled Disturbance gain Disturbance gain 1 00 to 1 00 065 Disturbance time constant time constant 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 1 1 00 Disturbance 0 000 to 9 999 0 000 band Disturbance judg
295. ntact input v EV3 EVA EV4 EV5 EV5 EV6 EV6 Using non contact input ON 1 kO max OFF 100 kO or higher No contact 1 ON residual voltage of 1 5 V max OFF leakage current of 0 1 mA max Circuit schematic 2 2 How to Use the Terminals Communication terminals Terminator 100 125 Q waa 1 2 W e To communicate with a host system connect between terminals F1 and F2 on the or C1 and C2 on the E5ER E5AR E5ER e The connection type is 1 1 or 1 N In a 1 N installation up to 32 units including the host computer can be connected e The maximum total cable length is 500 m e Use a shielded twisted pair cable AWG28 or higher Cable reference diagram AWG28 or higher cross sectional area of conductor 0 081 mm2 Use a resistance of 100 to 125 O 1 2 W in the terminators Install terminators at both ends of the transmission path including the host computer e To connect to an RS232C port on a computer use a 232C 485 convertor Example convertor RS 232C RS 485 Interface Convertor K3SC Adapter K32 23209 RS 232C RS 485 RS 232C M Converter K3SC 10 D sub 9pin ERE Straight m Terminator zaa RT 100 125 Q Gar F2 1 2 W E5AR E5AR No 1 No 31 I Section 2 Preparations Insulation blocks As shown in the following diagram each function block of the EBAR ER is electrically insulated Input event inp
296. nual Manual MV Manual MV default at time of power off if in manual mode before power off MV at stop if in auto mode before power off Note 1 The initial setting is Continue e Set Operation at power off separately for each channel e When the control mode is set to cascade control set Operation at power ON for CH2 Note 1 If the manual output mode is default value output the default value of manual MV default is output 4 26 4 12 Starting and stopping control ll Settings The procedure for stopping control is as follows 1 Press the cel key repeatedly to select 7 5 Run Stop 2 Press the A key to switch to 5262 Stop The STOP indicator blinks and control stops To resume control follow the same steps to switch to riin Run The STOP indicator goes off and control resumes Switching between run and stop is also possible by event input or communication For event input switching see 5 7 Using event input P 5 29 For communication switching see 5 9 Using com munication functions P 5 34 4 27 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 13 Performing manual control B Manual mode 4 28 Standard type Position proportional type In standard c
297. o 105 0 Monitor g 6 Related setting data aay Control mode Control initial setting level P 8 43 CH Valve opening monitor un Position proportional type Monitors the amount of valve opening during operation pe e Monitors the amount of valve opening during position proportional control e A potentiometer can be connected and Motor calibration can be executed to monitor the amount of valve opening 1 Unis Position propor 10 0 to 110 0 Monitor tional Related setting data iu Control mode Control initial setting level P 8 43 Motor calibration Control initial setting 2 level P 8 52 CH Run Stop CH Auto Manual l if Operation ps Operation nu 8 3 Operation level d Use this to run or stop control e The initial setting is Run os 1 Press the AlN keys to select tin Run or 5262 Stop When Stop is selected the STOP indicator lights up Related information 4 12 Starting and stopping control P 4 26 Related setting data PF1 setting PF2 setting Advanced function setting level P 8 68 PF1 setting z Auto Manual and PF2 setting z Auto Manual S 2 E e Use to select Auto or Manual m The initial setting is Alka Press the Al keys to select HAE a Auto for Auto mode or
298. o J9JsueJ 0100 alt AOQE SE AOQE SE ulES 1 P E 24 aal x uoneooj pe e indino JejSueJ 011002 IE aroge e oui 9000 se aui aroge se oui anoge Se aw 9000 se aui 0 SNOL 99 UEG anode se ULG 9000 e IUES 22 V d Cx uonisod enj eA yulod euuioeq ynejaq AOQE SE 9UJES meo AOQE SE ulES LE 0 SZ PHO 02000000H Ol 6 000000 H c 01 ZL EHO 81000000H O 1000000 H SL 01 6 ZHO 01000000H 01 60000000H Mes 8 Buruedo anjen LHO 80000000 H 4 1ndino 1ejsueJ 104 opis p soyo 40 epis Burooo 1ndino jo u09 HO 0000000H 9 1ndino 1ejsued 104 opis uedo 40 epis Buneeu 1ndino joju09 H2 90000000H s Ad enreA 1ueseJd LHO S0000000H v dS HO v0000000 H 45 LHO 60000000 2 1ndino ionuo 104 epis p soyo 40 epis Buneeu 1ndino joju09 HO Z0000000 H L 1ndino joluoo 104 epis uedo 40 epis Buneeu 1ndino joju09 HO L0000000H 0 peiqesiq 00000000 enj eA uoluoul Bunes 12031u0UJ uoneoriunuJuioo Aq 18S senj eA sen eA JojuouJ sen eA 195 ui pa1eoipul ai a PaP PU EX gt x uoneooje z indino JeJSueJ 01002 uoneooje indino JejsueJ 0J u02 pom sanquyy eyep 6umes 2030 9000 zo Lsseuppy sssinpv cfe smapow ifewoduoo I A Z Dunes fenlul onuo2 A 19 Appendix al aal M att
299. o change settings Keys cannot be used to change settings Hovvever set tings can be changed in Protect level e The initial setting is OFF PF key protect This function prevents use of the PF1 PF2 keys value OFF PF1 PF2 keys are enabled PF key protect ru ru rrr ON PF1 PF2 keys are disabled Prohibits use as a function key or a channel key e The initial setting for PF key protect is OFF 5 25 I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 6 Alarm adjustment functions B Alarm hysteresis Alarm 1 hysteresis M Standby sequence Standby sequence reset 6 Standby sequence restart 5 26 Hysteresis can be applied when alarm outputs switch on and off as shown below Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm pus hysteresis Alarm hysteresis ON ON OFF A A Alarm value Alarm value Alarm hysteresis can be set separately for each alarm in Alarm 1 to 4 hysteresis All default values are 0 02 FS Standby sequence is used to delay alarm output until the PV leaves the alarm range once and then subsequently enters it again For exam
300. o set to 00 Node No SID Not used on the E5AR ER Be sure to set to 0 Service ID M The text of the command Command text ETX Code that indicates the end of the text 03H Block Check Character This stores the result of the BCC calculation from Node No to EXT FINS mini STX Node No Sub address SID command text ETX BCC 02H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 35H 30H 30H BCC 30H e 30H 30H e 30H 30H e 30H e 35H 30H e 30H e 03H 36H ee XOR exclusive OR operation 6 4 6 2 Frames Communication CompoWay F M Response frame A response is not sent to com P End FINS mini mand Tames that do not end ode No Sub address Code response text with ETX BCC characters o w 1 2 2 2 1 byte Code that indicates the beginning of the communi S cation frame 02H Be sure to set this code in the leading byte The number that was specified in the command Node No frame is repeated here This is the Unit No of the responding E5AR ER Sub address Not used on the E5AR ER Set to 00 Returns the result of the command executed as End code instructed by the command frame FINS mini Text of the response Response text TX Code that indicates the end of the text O3H CC Block Check Character This stores the result of the BCC calculation from Node No to EXT B End codes Communication CompoWay F Error End Description detection code p order of priority FINS comma
301. ocal SP will be set to 230 0 C in step 5 3 15 I Section 3 Typical Control Examples Adjustment level ch 2 Present value PV SP MV SP mode y Lit w a RUN level Ch 2 du Present value PV SP MV lt E i t Lt ju w ca ju w XJ 2 nC I Present value PV SP MV AT Execute Cancel yum EA 2 3 16 3 Press the key less than 1 second to move from RUN level to Adjustment level SE Press the cei key repeatedly to select the secondary ch 2 Sac SP mode Press the M key to set the SP mode to 52 Local SP The RPS operation indicator is off in local SP mode indicating independent control cascade open in the secondary loop Press the key repeatedly to return to RUN level The secondary ch 2 PV SP MV will appear Set the secondary SP to 230 0 which is the PV obtained in step 2
302. od heating is used for standard control e For heating cooling control control periods can be set separately for heating and cooling n Settingdata Settingdata Setting range m Default value m Control period 0 2 to 99 0 M heat ettin 3 Control period 0 2 to 99 0 Sec 20 0 cooling Related setting data EE PID Proportional band PID setting level P 8 31 CH Position proportional dead band CH Open Close hysterisis 8 4 Adjustment level Ald in Position proportional control type n n This sets the output hold interval the interval while switching the open output and close output ON and OFF during position propor tional control 0 1 to 10 0 2 0 Setting Related setting data Open Close hysterisis Adjustment level P 8 17 L P Position proportional control type ume V t e This setting is used to add hysteresis when switching the open output and close output ON and OFF during position proportional control A 0 1 to 20 0 08 Setting Related setting data m Position proportional dead band Adiustment level P 8 17 8 17 I Section 8 Setting data CH SP ramp time unit SP ramp rise value SP ramp fall value RC a ad ux 14 a X Lv Lv 5n ux M p gt This specifies the change rate during SP ramp The maximum allowed change
303. ode Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 B AT execute B AT cancel Hesponse 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related Information t l 00 Currently selected PID Set No 01 to 08 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 10 to 18 2 10 Currently selected PID Set No 11 to 18 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 Hu 20 Currently selected PID Set No 21 to 28 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 eee eer 30 Currently selected PID Set No A 31 to 38 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 MES FO Currently selected PID Set No 7777 F1 to F8 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 This command runs AT On the EBAR ER the PID Set No must be specified when running AT To specify the currently selected PID Set No the PID set currently used for operation set the lower byte of the related information to 0 This command is used in setting area O If used in setting area 1 an operation error will result An operation error will also result in the following situations Run Stop of the specified channel is set to Stop e Auto Manual of the specified channel is set to Manual To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Hesponse codes The above in
304. oint Input data Default Setting data Setting range value Square root extraction OFF Disabled OFF 1 to 4 enable ON Enabled Square root extraction 0 000 to 9 999 EU 0 000 low cut point 1 to 4 E Other input adjustment functions The following input adjustment functions are also available These functions are explained in Section 8 Setting data P 8 1 e Line noise reduction Input initial setting level Display digits after PV decimal point Input initial setting level 5 7 I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 2 Control functions M SP ramp SP ramp time unit Operation at startup SP ramp 5 8 The SP ramp function limits the amount of change of the SP to a set rate When this function is enabled and the amount of change exceeds the set rate a space that limits the SP is created as shown in the diagram below During SP ramp control takes place not by changing the SP but rather by using a value that is limited by the set rate of change this is called the ramp SP On the E5AR ER an SP ramp rise value and an SP ramp fall value can be set separately SP SP ramp SP after change
305. oint display 8 39 8 76 Pu o ib 8 7 PV SP display screen selection 8 60 RAM data store 6 25 7 25 RAM write mode 8 70 Ramp SP monitor 8 9 Halo COMMO sorti re reo s b 1 9 3 18 Read setting data Communication Modbus 7 18 Registering calibration data 9 4 Remote SP lower limit 8 38 Remote SP monitor 8 8 Remote SP upper limit 8 38 Remote SP local SP 8 14 Resistance temperature input sensor calibration 9 10 Reverse operation 4 13 Reverse operation heating 1 9 Rodos 2 13 RSP operation indicator 1 5 ASP INDUC MOR 10 3 gite E 6 21 7 21 R n Stop 4 26 5 30 8 11 Saving setting 4 4 cal cara a vi su e dap eru 4 9 Scaling display value 8 37 Scaling input value 8 37 Sensor induction noise reduction 8 40 SOL VOllieS uu T 4 4 Setting and changing the SP 4 16 Setting areas uu u u du 6 13 Setting change
306. oken line approximation 1 enable Control initial setting 2 level P 8 51 8 34 8 9 Input initial setting level L H This level contains initial settings for input including input type temperature units and scaling settings Power on than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second L key less than 1 second key 1 key 3 second or seconds Control stops Input initial J Control intial setting gt Control initial setting Alarm setting gt Display adjustment gt Communication more or more setting aJ ey less key less less key less key less than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second key less than 1 second LL Control in progress C Control stop Input initial setting level y INESE Scaling input value 1 DSP1 Scaling display value 1 19999 Scaling display value 2 1 INP 2 Scaling input value 2 12 T Input 2 type 0 19 DSP2 Scaling display value 2 Scaling display value 1 1 99999 DP Decimal point position 0 4 3DU Input 3 temperature units RSPH Remote SP upper I4 T I
307. old Open output ON Valve completely closed MV at PV error Position propor tional type Note The order of priority of the MV settings is Manual MV default gt at Stop gt MV at PV error 5 4 Display and key adjustment functions 5 4 Display and key adjustment functions E Display scan 6 Display scan start stop Begin display scan after power on Display scan is used to automatically change display channels on a multi point input type This function only applies to channels that are enabled in the Number of enabled channels setting If the Number of enabled channels is 3 channels 1 2 and 3 are displayed Display scan can be started automatically after power on or by pressing the key To stop display scan hold down the key for at least 1 second Use the Begin display scan after power on and Display scan period settings to specify how display scan operates Begin display scan Display scan scan after using E ke Disabled Disabled Enabled OFF 0 OFF Disabled Disabled Enabled e When display scan is enabled use the key to start or stop display scan To start display scan hold down the key in the Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting Approximation setting or Monitor item level Display 1 sta
308. oling 6 Analog Analog 1 4 input 8 41 I Section 8 Setting data Multi output model Quam 9 t nnm Output 1 type bee aan nnm yur V t Output 3 type Use these settings to select the output type for multi output e Select pulse voltage output or linear current output e VVhen pulse voltage output is selected the output is 12 V DC 40 mA e When linear current output is selected use the Linear current output type setting to select an output of O to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA n Setting data Setting range Units Default value e 0 Pulse voltage output l a 1 Linear current output Sa Setting 6 Related setting data ay Linear current output type Control initial setting level P 8 42 Control Transfer output assignment Control initial setting 2 level P 8 46 9 t nm Linear current output 1 type P t mnm Linear current output 2 type ku 9 t pas bee Meg aan r pue V t mnm Linear current output 3 type x V t 4 yu E t nm Linear current output 4 type Output is current output Use this setting to select the linear current output type e Select 0 to 20 mA output or 4 to 20 mA output n Setting data Setting range Default value L 0 0 to 20 mA Setting 6 Related setting data Control Transfer output assignment Control initial setting 2 level uu P 8 46 8 42 CH SP
309. ommunication after the power is turned on Unstable signals that occur when the E5AR ER is Initialize the host system reception buffer at the turned on or off are read as host system data following times Before sending the first command e After the power of the E5AR ER is turned off The host system sends a command before Ensure that the program always reads the receiving a response from the EBAR ER response after sending a command The interval between receiving a response and Allow an interval of at least 5 ms after receiving a sending the next command from the host system is response before sending a command too short Mistake in host system program Correct the program e Check the command in the line monitor e Try running a sample program The unit number setting is different from the unit Make sure the unit numbers match number specified in the command Settings 10 8 Appendix S BEC CA 0 ne m I A 2 Sensor input setting ranges Indicator control ranges A 4 PRS GOSS A A 5 o o A 6 setting dalal l ea A 30 JX o o lt i Appendix Specifications Unit ratings Power supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 24 V DC 50 60 Hz 24 V DC Allowed voltage variance 85 to 110 of rating voltage range 22 VA max 15 VA 10 W max P E5ER 17 VA max E5ER 11 VA 7 W max Thermocouples K
310. on the alarm output is held on until the power is turned off Note that the latch is canceled if you change to setting area 1 When the alarm output is set to close in alarm closed output is held and when set to open in alarm open output is held After changing an alarm 1 to 3 latch setting a software reset must be executed or the power turned off and on to make the new setting take effect Alarm 1 latch Alarm 2 latch FF Disable Alarm 3 latch Enable Alarm 4 latch aF F Disable 6 Related setting data Bank alarm Bank setting level P 8 28 Bank alarm upper limit Bank alarm lower limit Bank setting level P 8 29 Auxiliary output assignment Control initial setting 2 level P 8 48 Alarm type Alarm setting level P 8 54 Alarm hysteresis Alarm setting level P 8 56 Standby sequence restart Alarm setting level P 8 57 8 55 I Section 8 Setting data CH Alarm 1 hysteresis Alarm 2 hysteresis Alarm 3 hysteresis Alarm 4 hysteresis f a Setting a 8 56 Alarm is assigned to auxiliary output and HL HH alarm type is set to other than No alarm These settings are used to enable hysteresis for alarms 1 2 3 and 4 l Default Alarm 1 hysteresis 7 5 0 01 to 99 99 FS 0 02 Alarm 4 hysteresis Related setting data Bank alarm Bank setting level P 8 28 Bank alarm upper limit Bank alarm lower limit Bank sett
311. on volatile memory If you do not wish to save the data in non volatile memory press the c l key instead of the key e For a multi point input type connect as explained in step 2 and repeat steps 5 to 10 e f linear current output is selected continue with the procedure explained in 9 6 Output calibration P 9 12 11 Turn off the power to quit calibration mode I Section 9 User calibration 9 4 Analog input calibration Analog input is calibrated in the following groups according to the analog input type current input group 15 16 voltage input group 1 17 18 and voltage input group 2 19 E5AR E5ER Ad Input nput power Supply stv C O DMM 1 Connect the power supply 2 Connect the STV and DMM to the input terminals of the analog input as shown above Note that different input terminals are used for current input and voltage input Make sure the connections are correct 3 Turn on the power 4 Move to calibration level A 30 minute aging time begins Perform aging using this time as a guideline When 30 minutes elapses Display 2 will show O Note that you can proceed to the next stop before the display shows O 5 Press the key to obtain the display at left The count value that was input will ap
312. onger 3 seconds or longer Control initial Control initial setting level setting 2 level e E Less than Less than 1 seconds Input I 1 seconds 1 seconds K i Alarm setting level setting leve Less than Less than 1 seconds 1 seconds Less than Communications Display 1 seconds setting level adjustment level Password input Set value in general 169 1 seconds or longer Less than 1 seconds Special function BA Expansion control setting level setting level Less than 1 seconds Password input Set value in general 1201 Control in operation Control is stopped on all Calibration level Control stopped channels of multi point input Reset from calibration level is by power off ype 4 1 Setting levels and key operation PID setting level Approximation setting level Monitor item level Input initial setting level Control initial setting level Control initial setting 2 level P I D values of each PID set and limit settings settings Alarm setting level Alarm type and output settings Display adjustment level Display adjustment settings HI P ay ag 57 g operation is Communications setting level Communications speed communication data length and stopped other communication settings Special function setting level Initialization of settings and PF key settings Expansion control setting leve
313. onger or longer Protect level V t 20 mn Operation adjustment protect Initial setting protect LLL Setting change protect YEPE PF key protect PEPE The range of setting data protected is indicated Initial settings are shaded Operation adjustment protect Restricts key operation in the Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting Approximation setting and Monitor item levels Setting Adjustment PID settings values py sp Adjustment 2 Approximation settings Setting Monitor items Display change Yes O Display Yes x Display Change levels No When the set value is O protection is not enabled 8 3 I Section 8 Setting data 8 4 f Setting f e Setting Setting e Initial setting protect Restricts movement to the Input initial setting Control initial setting Control initial setting 2 Alarm setting Display adjustment and Communication setting level Move to Control initial setting Setting Move to Input initial Control initial setting 2 Alarm values setting level setting Display adjustment and Communication setting level Yes shows Advanced function setting level Yes Does not show Advanced function setting level e When Initial setting level protect is set to 2 nothing happens when the level key is held down for 1 second to move to Input initial setting level from Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting
314. onitor value display This only slows the display refresh cycle it does not affect the update period of the PV during control e To disable the function select OFF Setting range Units Default value Setting 8 61 Section 8 Setting data Monitor item level setting nanL One of the following levels can be selected as the monitor item level setting Input initial setting level Control initial setting level Control initial setting 2 level Alarm setting level Display adjustment level Communication setting level Advanced function setting level Expansion control setting level The monitor item level is added after the Approximation setting level e When OFF is selected the function is disabled Monitor item level is disabled Setting range Default value value 2 Disabled monitor item level 4 Input initial setting level Setting 1 Control initial setting level Control initial setting 2 level 4 Alarm setting level 4 Display adjustment level 2 Communication setting level Advanced function setting level Expansion control setting level E input type j gt cx I 4 PU gu Li w 4 224 m Ka P Start display scan after power ON Lv LO P nr Display scan period e Display scan automatically switches through channels on the display when multiple channels are used on a multi point input type
315. ontrol initial setting 2 level C CD Alarm setting level Display adiustment level Communications setting level Special function setting level Expansion control setting level DO 0200 to 0239 D1 U D2 0300 to 0339 D3 The above setting data is vvritten The number of elements can be set from 2 to 24 to write setting data of contiguous addresses Section 6 Communication CompoWay F Hesponse To specify an address see Appendix Setting list P A 6 Setting data of setting area 1 can be written in setting area 1 An error will result if written in setting area O To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command To store setting data of Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting or Approximation setting levels in non volatile memory select Backup with the Write mode command If not set to Backup the setting data will not remain in memory when the power is turned off For more information on the above levels see 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 MRC SRC Response code Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 6 Writing to the variable area P 6 10 M Setting data compound write Communication CompoWay F MRC SRC Variable type Address Bit position Data Ty v Fe Variable type Address Bit position Data T a e Variable Ad
316. ontrol initial setting 2 level r2 OUT 1 yr Control Transfer output 1 allocation HH TRH 4 0 20 Transfer output 4 upper limit OUT 4 Control Transfer output 4 allocation HRL 4 Transfer output 4 lower limit EV 6 Event input 6 allocation d First order lag operation OFF ON SBO 1 Auxiliary output 1 allocation Movement average 1 0 36 enabled OFF ON MAVA SBO 4 Auxiliary output 4 allocation 4 Movement average 4 enabled OFF ON Extraction of square root 1 enabled OFF ON s1 Extraction of square TRL 1 Transfer output 1 lower limit aF root 4 enabled OFF ON br He TRH 2 Transfer output 2 upper limit SCL2 Straight line o approximation 2 enabled TRL 2 Transfer output 2 lower limit OFF ON Broken line approximation 1 enabled OFF ON 1 CALB RN nE L4 Motor calibration ransfer output 3 lower limit aFF OFF ON l MOT Travel time 3214 999 8 45 I Section 8 Setting data yu Lt Control Transfer output 1 allocation gizir 1 Control Transfer output 3 allocation ot Control Transfer output 2 allocation sizlik Conirol Transfer output 4 allocation at Setting range m smi Disable 0 Setting CH1 control output heating
317. ontrol the MV is manipulated and in position propor tional control the amount of valve opening is manipulated To perform manual operation or manually set the MV or valve opening set the Manual Auto setting to ARALI Manual or hold down the key at least 1 second MANU lights up in the operation display while in manual mode The PV appears in Display 1 the MV appears in Display 2 and appears in Display 3 To change the MV press the AIX keys The MV is updated every 50 ms When switching between manual mode and auto mode the action of the MV is balance less and bumpless Other setting level can be moved to in manual mode However AT Execute Cancel cannot be selected and does not appear in the display Switching between auto and manual is possible a maximum of 100 000 times During cascade control if the primary loop is switched to manual control when the secondary loop is in any of the following conditions the manual MV is disabled e The SP mode of the secondary loop is local cascade open e The secondary loop is in manual mode e Operation at error is taking place in the secondary loop When a potentiometer is connected MANU lights up in the operation display while in manual mode The PV appears in Display 1 the valve opening appears in Display 2 and AAnti appears in Display 3 When a potentiometer is not connected Display 2 shows To turn on open out
318. ontroller to systems machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly and especially require safety Notice 1 AII rights reserved No part of this manual may be reprinted or copied without the prior written permission of OMRON 2 The specifications and other information in this manual are subject to change without notice for purposes of improvement 3 Considerable care has been taken in the preparation of this manual however OMRON assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear In the event that a problem is discovered please contact one of the Omron offices or agents listed at the end of the manual and provide the catalogue number shown on the cover of the manual Certain Terms and Conditions of Sale 10 11 Offer Acceptance These terms and conditions these Terms are deemed part of all catalogs manuals or other documents whether electronic or in writ ing relating to the sale of goods or services collectively the Goods by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies Seller Seller hereby objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer s purchase order or other documents which are inconsistent with or in addition to these Terms Please contact your Omron representative to confirm any additional terms for sales from your Omron company Prices All prices stated are current subject to change without notic
319. ormation Related Description information i Local SP Remote SP 40 Local SP 10 2 Cascade open 44 Remote SP Cascade closed Use this command to select the SP mode Local SP Remote SP The command can be used when cascade control or remote SP is in use This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 e f AT is being run in the specified channel an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Hesponse 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F MRC SRC Response code Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 B Read machine attributes Hesponse This command reads the E5AR ER model and communication buffer Size The command can be used in any state of the EBAR ER MRC SRC Response code Format Buffer size Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Model 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 E 5poj n rere j Bytes 7 to 9 are blank D Size Symb Size A size 96 x 96 mm E size 96 x 48 mm 2 Constant program Symbol Constant program Blank Constant 3 Standard Position proportional Symbol Standard position proportional lank P
320. os O through 7 Each bank contains an SP local SP alarm value and PID set number and these settings are stored using the bank function in Bank setting level A bank can be specified by event input key operation or communication This setting is used to specify a bank by key operation Use the IAI keys to specify a bank No The initial setting is Currently used bank No 6 Related setting data Bank Local SP Bank setting level P 8 27 Event input Assignment Control initial setting 2 level P 8 47 w 4 i i In auto mode running This is used to run AT Auto tuning Operation e The MV is increased and decreased around the SP to obtain the characteristics of the object of control The PID values are calcu lated from the results and the Proportional band Integral time and Derivative time are automatically set e Normally this is 622 AT can be run by pressing the key to select the PID set number AT cannot be run while control is stopped Select to specify the PID set currently used for control Select a number from 1 to 8 to specify a PID set number AT automatically returns to 6272 when finished e The SP blinks if PV SP are monitored during AT e The channel cannot be changed during AT Related setting data PID Proportional band PID Integral time PID Derivative time PID setting level P 8 31 8 13 I S
321. otect is set to 2 Disable move to input initial setting level an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Use this command to move to protect level Protect level is explained in 5 5 Protecting settings P 5 24 This command is used in setting area O If used in setting area 1 an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 B Auto Manual Response Initialize settings Response 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Related Description information Operation mode Auto Manual Auto Manual 2 Auto 4 Manus Auto Manus Auto Manus Use this command to select auto or manual operation This command is used in setting area O To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Re
322. oubleshooting 6 Overshoot or undershoot occurs o Abnormal measured value See section 10 3 A regular slow thermal response temperature Change to a sheath type temperature sensor sensor is connected to a fast thermal response control system Connection The proportional band is too narrow the P value is Increase the P value within the limit that the too small response speed does not become too slow e Run AT The integral time is too short the 1 value is too e Increase the value within the limit that the small response speed does not become too slow e Run AT The derivative time is too short the D value is too Increase the D value within the limit that stability small during rectification does not deteriorate Run AT ON OFF control is being performed Use P control or PID control The control period is too long in a fast thermal Shorten the control period response control system Overlap band is mistakenly set as a dead band in Set to overlap band heating cooling control e Hunting occurs Check connections and settings as explained above in Overshoot or undershoot occurs The heat capacity of the heater is too large for the Use a heater with a heat capacity suitable for the heat capacity of the object of control object of control Settings Periodic disturbances occur that cause the heat Establish an environment will minimal capacity of the object of control to change disturbances Method
323. ouepeoe uuo uononpai esiou uononpur Josuegs 1 NO 10000000 H 440 00000000 H e dsip jurod jewioap Ad ed Idul o Guipioooy yo ye se oues uij Jeddn yndu o yuayeainba anjena e dsip pue 66666 JO Ja euus 0 uij 190 3ndui o juepeninbe nip eydsip pue 66661 Jo 196127 Bojeuy oDuei Josues jo yw j Jeddn o eGuej Hues 10sueg eunje1eduue jul JOMO dS ejoueH H l ye se owes u jndul jeddn o juejeunbe anea Aejdsip pue 66666 JO Je euus 0 luij Jamo 3ndui o juejeunbe enjea ejdsip pue 66661 10 Je61e Bojeuy efuei Dunes Josues jo ui g ddn o eDuei Hues Josues Jo yw eunje1eduuoe uni R 141 Jeddn qS edi ndu o 2 Lon n Lt p 01 0 v0000000 H O 00000000 uonisod 1104 euroeq H l ye se owes 66666 40420000 H 01 enjeA ejdsip Duieos x c en eA e dsip Sulleos 49 ye se owes yuui jeddn 1ndur o lluui 1SAO 1ndu Cun V c en eA indui Duijeog Jo9 ye se owes L g enje Aejdsip Buijeos 01 66661 L3183344 H X enj eA ejdsip Sulleos H l ye se owes h ll z ddn 1ndur o 1iuuj 19 M0 1ndu _ COL en eA indui Sulleos 1 4 10000000 H 0 Do 00000000 H syun y Indu edA indui se ewes 1ndu L 4 10000000 H Do 00000000 edA y 1ndu syun
324. parameters Travel time Control initial setting 2 level P 8 52 m Position proportional type Set the time from valve completely open to valve completely closed e This parameter is automatically set when Motor calibration is run Setting range Units Default value 6 Related information 3 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln lg Settings for position proportional control P 3 12 6 Related parameters Motor calibration Control initial setting 2 level P 8 52 8 12 Alarm setting level 5 3 L 3 8 12 Alarm setting level This level contains settings for the type and output operation of alarms including alarm type close in alarm open in alarm and latch settings Power on Operation level Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting l PID setting gt 77 i key Less key Less E key Less EE L key Less 7 L leyl ss level Ef I than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second i key less than 1 second key key 1 second 3 seconds or more or more Input initial setting Control initial setting Control initial setting gt I Alarm setting s level i EE key Less key Less key Less level key Less level t
325. pe Read address Bit position type Read address Bit position Variable type Read address Bit position Variable adress Setting data type Explanation 0000 0100 2 ot 2 onone 02007 0800 0000 to 007F 0100 to 17 00 to 017F 2 C5 to CB 0200 to 027E Setting data of setting area 0 0300 to 037F 0000 to 0039 0100 to 0139 2 C5 to D3 0200 to 0239 Setting data of setting area 1 0300 to 0339 This command is used to store the addresses of multiple monitor values or setting data that you wish to read The stored monitor values or setting data can be read by sending a single Monitor value setting data compound store read command Up to 20 items can be stored even if the addresses are not contiguous To specify the variable type or address see Appendix Setting list P A 6 The upper limit of an address will vary depending on the variable type This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 MRC SRC Response code Response codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 5 Reading the variable area P 6 9 6 19 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F E Monitor value setting data compound read store check read Hesponse This is used to check the contents that were stored using Monitor value setting data compound read store MRC SRC Response code Variable type Read address Variable type Read address
326. pear in Display 2 in hexadecimal Set the STV as follows e For input types 15 and 16 20mA For input types 17 and 18 5V e For input type 19 10V Lt a r 9 8 9 4 Analog input calibration 6 Wait until the count in Display 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the 32 key This tentatively saves the calibration data at this point Input types 15 and 16 7 Press the key to obtain the display at left Set the STV as follovvs Input types 15 and 16 1 mA e Input types 17 and 18 1V Input type 19 1V 8 Wait until the count in Display 2 is sufficiently stable and then press the 2 key This tentatively saves the calibration data at this point 9 Press the key ce to obtain the display at left Note that this display will not appear if not all of the required data has been tentatively saved Press the A key Display 2 will show SE5 Two seconds after the key is released or when the e is pressed the tentatively saved calibratio
327. ple the temperature unit can be set If the input type SW is set to analog input current input or voltage input scaling and the decimal point position can be set Input nput type SW Input type Temperature input Resistance temperature input sensor Pt 100 e Temperature units Thermocouples K J T E L U N R S B W Current input 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Scaling Voltage input 1 to 5 V Oto 5 V Oto 10 V Decimal point position Input type SW bottom An operation command can be assigned to each event input If event input is to be used use an EBAR ER IL IB D In the case of a multi point input type assignment data can be set for channels 2 and higher as needed for the number of channels The operation instruction Write via communication OFF ON is common to all channels 7 HER 5 ae Channel 1 Bank 2 1 m Channel 1 e Hz Channel 1 Auto Manual Channel 1 SP mode remote local r Channel 2SP mode remote local 1 3 Input output Configuration and Main Functions Control mode The type of control performed by each controller is selected by setting the control mode Setting the control mode sets default values for the output assignments required for the control After setting the control mode specify direct reverse operation for each channel Standard type Control modes of input points 1 input Standard control Heating cooling control
328. ple in the case of a lower limit the PV is normally smaller than the SP when the power is turned on and thus is within the alarm range which would cause the alarm output to switch on However if With lower limit standby sequence is selected the alarm output will not switch on until the PV rises above the alarm set value and out of the alarm range and then falls below the alarm value a second time The standby sequence is canceled when alarm output occurs and then restarts based on conditions specified in the Standby sequence reset setting Condition A Operation startup including power on or when the alarm value alarm upper and lower limit or input shift input value for input shift 1 input shift 1 input value for input shift 2 or input shift 2 is changed or when the SP is changed Condition B Only at operation startup including power on The Standby sequence reset setting is common to Alarms 1 to 4 The initial setting is 0 Condition A 5 6 Alarm adjustment functions i B Alarm latch Alarm 1 latch e The Alarm latch function is used to make an alarm output that has switched on remain on until the power is turned off regardless of the temperature The alarm latch state can be canceled by turning the power off or by a communication command e Alarm latch is set separately for each alarm in
329. por tional type 6 Related information 3 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln P 3 9 2 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level t 8 11 Control initial setting 2 level 21 2 This level contains initial settings for computational functions including Control Transfer output assignment event input assignment auxiliary output assignment and first order lag operation enable disable Power on semasa a Operation level Adjustment gt Adjustment 2 setting D PID setting Ed A key Less level key Less level key Less level keyless level 1 p a keyLess level M EEF than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second key less than 1 second w m m m m m Gm m Gm m m m m m Semen m m m m m m m m ma f key key 1 second 3 seconds i ormore ormore Control stops Input initial setingi e initia Control initial setting 77 gt Alarm setting gt Display adjustment Sd level key Less level l JkeyLess 2 level key Less level 17 3 key Less level keyess level 5 than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second i key less than 1 second Control in progress C Control stop C
330. protect 5 25 Setting communication parameters 5 34 Setting data compound write Communication CompoWay F 6 18 Setting data read Communication CompoWay F 6 15 Setting data write Communication CompoWay F 6 17 Setting initialization 8 68 Selling levels 4 2 Software reset 6 25 7 25 SETS ca desunt a 5 12 8 43 SP mod n 5 31 6 28 7 28 8 14 SP Tramp nuna aa ere 5 8 SP ramp fall value 8 18 SP ramp rise value 8 18 SP ramp time unit 8 18 SP MACK ING a a Ul 8 73 Specifications A 2 Standard control 1 9 3 2 4 12 Standard control with remote SP 1 9 4 12 Standby sequence 5 26 Standby sequence restart 8 57 Start display scan after power ON 8 62 Status read Communication CompoWay F 6 30 Status Communication CompoWay F A 8 SIOD Piana va Ucet 6 21 7 21 STOP operation indicator 1 5 Straight line approximation 3 20 8 33 Straight line approximation enable 8 51 SUB1 operation indicator 1 5 SUB2 operation indicator
331. protect to 0 in Protect level and then move to Special setting level e Calibration is ended by turning off the power The setting data for input calibration is shown below The last digit of Display 1 shows the input number The example below shows 1 for input 1 In the case of input 2 the display would show 3590 2 Rd i imer Input type 1 K 1 lt 2 gt J 1 4 K 2 lt 8 gt J 2 lt 5 gt PT100 1 0 Seral 1 lt gt shows set value in general of input type 6 Output calibration setting data The setting data for output calibration is shown below The display varies depending on the output type of each output In the following example the last digit of Display 1 shows 1 for output 1 For output 2 this would be a Aziz Skee d Store input calibration value At linear current output 9 2 9 1 Setting data for user calibration If user calibration was performed on any of inputs 1 to 4 or outputs 1 to 6 following purchase of the controller user calibration completion infor mation will appear as shown below when you move to Calibration level Displays dots 9 3 i Section 9 User calibration 9 2 User calibration The E5AR ER is calibrated before shipment from the factory and thus there is normally no need for the user to calibrate the controller In the
332. pueq reuonuodoud did 0000 m li MEH Ho 8 01 1 80000000 01 10000000 H uonoeljes id Aejdsiq 1 en eA ynejeq 49 5 7200 pueq reuonuodold v Aid 9 vo pueq reuonuodold Aid vzvo LGId SE owes eui si DULMO O eu L pueq jeuolwodoid z did ed 1ndui AQ Huu 4eddn eBueiJ 7 o Buipiooov 07 66666 01 66661 16981000H 0 L3L83334H uoioe es did ed 1ndui Ad ywi jeddn eBueiJ 7 o Buipiooov 66666 01 66661 4698 L000 H 01 L3 18 4444 H uono l s IEWOJNE did 070 01 0 SOL 00000000 H 91 V LE00000H 1002 1E H L O Ywl j y9 1e Se eures Jeddn AN 01 0 S 3DO4444434 H p1epueis HUI J9MO AN L did 0 S01 01 0 0 V LF00000 H 01 00000000H I009429H 96 H 12 58 OWES 0 G0L VLPOOOO00H 01 1707 Yuu AN pJepueiS i yw Jeddn AW Gld Spuooes 06 666 01 0070 92V L9000 H 01 00000000 H euim eAneAuep Ald 06 666 01 0170 97V L9000 H 01 V0000000 H 10148 1ndui 1e SEO 10 senumnuoo uonejedo pesojo jeuonJodoud uonisog 06666 01 0070 97V L9000 H 01 00000000 10119 1ndul 1ejeujomuejod ye 50015 uonejedo pesojo spuooeS jeuonJodoud uomisog 009 1eep p1epuels L euun e1691ul did Spuooes 6666 0 070 4 260000 H 01 00000000 H SWI eAqeAUep Ald 6666 01 170 46060000HH 01 L0000000 H 40 48 1ndui 1e S20 10 i senumnuoo uomnejedo pesojo jeuonJodoud uonisog 6
333. put press the A key To turn on closed output press the xz key The MV is updated every 50 ms When switching between manual mode and auto mode the action of the MV is balance less bumpless Other setting screens can be moved to in manual mode However AT Execute Cancel cannot be selected and does not appear in the display Switching between auto and manual is possible a maximum of 100 000 times 4 13 Performing manual control i The procedure for switching to manual mode during control and changing the MV is explained in the following 6 When Auto Manual is selected with the PF1 setting or PF2 setting Initially the PF1 setting is Auto Manual 1 Hold down the key for Auto Manual at least 1 second The MANU indicator lights up and the mode changes to manual ju EA gt To return to auto mode hold down the key at least 1 second The MANU indicator goes off and the mode changes to auto e ju w Dur gt 6 When Auto Manual is not selected with either the PF1 setting or PF2 setting 1 Press the cel key repeatedly to select Z A Auto Manual ep Lx Vd cx jue XJ a Ee m
334. put type list page 8 36 Press less than 1 second fr Display 3 will show control initial setting level m 2 Refer to output type list page 8 42 sa indicates that the key is pressed several times to switch to desired setting data Control initial setting level Check Output 1 Output type a E Output 1 type tid Pulse voltage output Control mode Check the control i Standard control mode Ta Press twice less than 1 second Display 3 will show 3 alarm setting level Alarm setting level Alarm 1 type 7 the alarm 2 Upper limit alarm m 3 Refer to alarm type list page 8 54 Change the alarm type with the AIX key Alarm 2 type e HB Absolute value upper limit alarm T Press for at least 1 second to return to RUN level 4 3 Initial setting examples 5 Change control period 6 Set alarm value 1 7 Set alarm value 2 8 Set SP 9 Run AT 10 Start operation Control begins RUN level Adjustment level Zx RZ with keys Bank setting level Verify that the display bank selection is 0 Set alarm value 1with the A keys 4 Set alarm value 2 with the AIM keys xz PID setting level Adjustment level Run AT with RUN level Change the control period Present value PV SP MV Less than 1
335. r and Seller relating to the Goods and no pro vision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties d Severability If any provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid such provision shall not invalidate any other provision e Setoff Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice f As used herein including means including without limitation Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use Suitability of Use Seller shall not be responsible for conformity with any stan dards codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Good in the Buyer s application or use of the Good At Buyer s request Seller will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Good This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Good in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of this Good nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for this Good i Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this document ii Energy control system
336. r and lower limits of the sensor e The decimal point position depends on the selected sensor For analog input the decimal point position depends on the Decimal point position setting RSP Remote SP upper limit gt Using input type of 4 to 20 mA Remote SP lower limit Input mA 4 20 Note that the SP limits are in effect and therefore if the input remote SP is above or below the SP limits the SP will be clamped to the upper or lower limit During cascade control only Ch2 is displayed Setting data Setting range Units Default value Temperature Lower limit of sensor set ting range to upper limit of sensor setting range Analog Smaller of 99999 and dis play value equivalent to upper input limit to smaller of 99999 and dis play value equivalent to upper input limit Remote SP upper limit Temperature Lower limit of sensor set ting range to upper limit of sensor setting range Analog Larger of 19999 and dis play value equivalent to input lower limit to smaller of 99999 and display value equivalent to upper input limit Remote SP lower limit 8 9 Input initial setting level 2 2 6 Related setting data Reference Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 Input temperature units Input initial setting level P 8 37 Control mode Control initial setting level P 8 43 SP upper limit SP lower limit Control initial setting level P 8 43
337. r input shift 1 to the controller reading A 3 Set Input shift 2 to the difference between the temperature of the object B and the corresponding controller reading A when near the SP Object temperature B Controller reading A and set Input value for input shift 2 to the controller reading A 4 After configuring the settings check the reading of the controller A and the temperature of the object B 5 Correction has now been performed at two points near room temperature and near the SP If you wish to improve the accuracy near the SP establish two more correction points above and below the SP Figure 2 illustrates the correction Temperature indicated on machine A After adjustment Indicated temperature aller ed secs iere tte ex 550 0 C Indicated temperature 1 before adiustment ex 500 0 C Before adiustment hift value 2 put ce al al 4 Pes n Indicated temperature before adjustment t a ex 40 0 C Input shift Indicated temperature P value 1 a after adiustment Temperature ex 25 0 C Room temperature Proximity of SP indicated on ex 25 C ex 550 C thermometer B 1 1 Input shift Input shift input value 1 input value 2 p r Image adjustment by point adjustment of Fig 2 2 5 3 I Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 4 6 Example of 2 point correction Inpu
338. r the number of channels The U ALM output is an OR output with alarm functions 1 to 4 for all channels Auxiliary output Auxiliary output assignment Channel 1 Channel 1 alarm 2 5 s All channel alarm 1 OR output All channel alarm 2 OR output All channel alarm 3 OR output All channel alarm 4 OR output All channel input error OR output All channel RSP input error OR output I Section 1 Overview E Explanation of Model Numbers Q 2000668260 a E R T T LT T L T DSize A 96 x 96 mm E 48 x 96 mm 2 Constant Program 3 Control method Standard heat cool Position proportional 4 Output 1 Relay rela R Pulse output pulse voltage currenti0 Current current C 5 Output 2 Relay ray R Pulse output pulse vollage current Q 6 Auxiliary output 4 T Option function 1 RS 485 communication 8 Option function 2 None Blank Events 4 points D Input 1 Multi input event input 2 points Multi input FB Potentiometer input Multi input multi input Input 2 Multi input multi input y Communications method CompoWay F The above is an explanation based on functionality There may be some differences from the product line depending on the combination of features selected Please check the catalogue when ordering For details on using DeviceNet communications functions refer to the E5AR E5ER Digital Controller
339. ration status 08 I 01 Echo back test Performs an echo back test 30 05 x Operation command Command such as Run Stop AT Execute x Cancel and Move to setting area 1 6 6 6 4 Variable areas 6 4 Variable areas The area used for data exchange when communicating with the E5AR ER is called the variable area The PV is read and various setting data are read and written using the variable area of the E5AR ER Operation commands and reading of machine attributes do not use the variable area Variable types 6 Addresses Communication CompoWay F E5AR ER Operation Microprocessor instruction etc Variable area Read write A variable area is accessed by specifying the position of a variable within the variable area using the variable type and address Variable types in variable areas are as follows Variable Description ype Communication monitor Protect level 6 Setting area 0 during operation Setting area 1 Do Display adjusimentievel during stop os Each variable type has an address Addresses are 2 bytes long and written in hexadecimal Addresses are assigned according to units of access size Each address consists of a channel identifier and an in area address Address 2 bytes o ojojo ojo sj 0 A A A As As Ar Ao oH Channel Address in area 00 to 7F identifier 0 3 128 variables 6 7 6 8 Section 6 Com
340. remote SP mode or manual mode the SP is not written to internal non volatile memory Note that when a change is made by key operation the data is written to non volatile memory Backup mode When the write mode is changed from RAM write mode to Backup mode the setting data of Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting and Approximation setting levels is written to internal non volatile memory Each level is explained in 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 The time required for RAM backup varies depending on the number of settings that were changed in RAM backup mode The more settings that were changed the longer the time required For example if all settings in Operation Adjust ment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting and Approxi mation levels were changed the most time would be required which is about 2 seconds Hesponse M RAM data store Response M Softuvare reset Response 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 H00 H00 H04 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes This writes the setting data of Operation and Adjustment levels to internal non vo
341. resis is set for both heating and cooling control output using the Hysteresis heat and Hysteresis cool settings e For standard control heating or cooling control only the Hysteresis heat setting is used regardless of whether heating or cooling is being performed Hysteresis heat OFF PV SP ON 6 3 position control For heating cooling control an area dead band can be set where the MV is 0 for both heating and cooling This means that 3 position control can be performed Dead band Hysteresis heat ON Heat side Cool side OFF PV A SP Hysteresis cool I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control E Settings To perform ON OFF control the SP Proportional band and Hysteresis heat settings must be configured Setting ON OFF control and an hysteresis heat of 2 0076FS ON OFF control settings Set Proportional band to 0 00 in PID setting level to select ON Proportional band Pz0 00 OFF control 1 Press the key repeatedly less than 1 second each time to move from RUN level to PID setting level 2 Display PID selection appears in PID setting level If a PID Set No will not be used use the initial setting 1 If a PID Set No will be used select the PID Set No for the desired control
342. ress Setting data type Explanation 0000 to 007F 0100 to 017F 2 C5 to CB Setting data of setting area 0 0200 to 027F 0300 to 037F 0000 to 0039 0100 to 0139 CC to Ds Setting data of setti 1 0200 to 0239 etting Gata OT setting area 0300 to 0339 Multiple setting data items can be written by sending a single command Up to 12 items can be written even if the addresses are not contiguous To specify the variable type or address see Appendix Setting list P A 6 Setting data of setting area 1 is written in setting area 1 An error will result if written in setting area O To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Hesponse 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompoWay F To store setting data of Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting or Approximation setting levels in non volatile memory select Backup with the Write mode command If not set to Backup the setting data will not remain in memory when the power is turned off For more information on the above levels see 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 MRC SRC Response code Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 6 Writing to the variable area P 6 10 B Monitor value setting data compound read store write Response Variable MRC SRC Variable ty
343. rol A mz Transfer output upper limit Decimal Setting range lower limit of point Setting ra transfer position output 1 SP Swern 4300 00 06 je Ey SP upper limit input type Pampsp 9r 9e imi 1300 0 200 0 Pependson ku SP upper limit input type Lower limit of sensor setting Upper and range to upper lower limit of Depends on limit of sensor sensor setting input type setting range range temperature 19999 to 99999 Scaling display Dependson EU analog value 2 1 input type Standard 5 0 to Control output heating or 109 0 Heating 100 0 0 0 open cooling 0 0 to 105 0 Control output cooling or 0 0 to 105 0 100 0 0 0 1 close Valve opening 10 0 to 110 0 100 0 0 0 1 Will be initialized if the input type temperature units scaling display value SP upper and lower limit or applicable control transfer output assignment is changed Related information z 5 8 Using transfer output P 5 32 Related setting data Input type Input initial setting level P 8 36 Control Transfer output assignment Control initial setting 2 level P 8 46 8 49 I Section 8 Setting data ili 1 First order lag operation 3 enable LAU First order lag operation 2 enable FE First order lag operation 4 enable L First order lag operation 1 enable if a e Use these settings to enable or disable first order lag operation for each input A Setting range Units Default v
344. roportional control n Setting range Units Default value e Setting Related setting data m Closed Floating Control initial setting level P 8 44 8 79 I Section 8 Setting data CH Disturbance overshoot adjustment function xin hk e This setting is used to enable or disable disturbance overshoot adjustment Units Default value 2 i R m FF Disable aFF Disable Enable Setting 6 Related information 5 2 Control functions lil Disturbance overshoot adjustment P 5 14 8 80 Section 9 User calibration 9 1 Setting data for user Calibration 9 2 92 USBECalIDIall OD vase deo ob ease a am uo ad n 9 4 9 3 Thermocouple input calibration 9 5 9 4 Analog input calibration 9 8 9 5 Resistance temperature input sensor calibration 9 10 9 6 Ouip bealiDFatlObDi u uu uyu u pat Di 9 12 9 7 Inspecting indicator accuracy 9 13 2 T 2 5 o o I Section 9 User calibration 9 1 Setting data for user calibration To perform user calibration enter 1201 in Move to user calibration in Special setting level The controller will enter calibration mode and Ad will appear in the display e f the Move to user calibration setting does not appear set Initial setting
345. roportional control of a ceramic kiln Control initial setting 2 level 2 Press the l twice to move from Input initial setting level to Control initial setting 2 level yn Control Transfer f loutput assignment N e 1 2 3 Press the ce key repeatedly to select nat Travel time Press the A key to set the value to 45 Travel time 2 RUN level 4 Hold down the at least 1 second to return to RUN level PV SP MV Present value PV SP will appear Press the key to set the SP to 250 0 Valve opening n LE LI NI Lut gt m X jue EA ju EA 2 a a jue Lr 5 Press the key less than 1 second to move from HUN level to Adiustment level Press the key to select 5 H SP ramp rise value and press the key to set the value to 10 0 SP ramp rise value E Adjustment To adjust the PID constants run AT For more information see 4 10 Determining the PID constants AT manual settings P 4 19 On the E5AR ER the SP ramp rise va
346. rts to blink after the key is held down for 1 second and after the key is held down for another 2 seconds the display stops blinking and display scan begins e f the key is held down for more than 1 second during display scan display scan will stop e During display scan only the key is enabled To use any other keys display scan must first be stopped with the key e Channel display in manual mode shows the manual operation Screen 5 19 I Section 5 Functions and Operations Example of display scan operation Power on Initial state Present value PV SP Display 1 Normal operaton w w NEED mn w ra ra m ra m a 8 m a m X x 4 4 4 4 r Lar jw Em cH Start using key ee As YTABHs T T A TmO h VA rh Auto startup after power on e Begin display scan after power on is ON e Display scan period is other than 0 s SS uh S Lu i oce ees idee utes Blinks after 1 second Present value PV SP Display 1 X Lum F cH al L A nin ri LI LI L
347. ry e When the write mode is changed from RAM write mode to backup mode the setting data in setting area O is written to internal non volatile memory Setting range Units Default value Backup mode Backup mode RAM write mode 6 Related information 5 9 Using communication functions P 5 34 x iF 8 15 Advanced function setting level i Aa Move to calibration level This setting is used to move to calibration level Use this setting to enter the password to access calibration level 1999 to 9999 Setting range Units Default value s 1 1 o Setting Related information pu Section 9 User calibration P 9 1 8 71 Section 8 Setting data 8 16 Expansion control setting level This level includes advanced control settings such as operation after power ON PID set auto selection and position proportional settings Povver on key key 1 second or 3 seconds more key Less than 1 second Control initial setting level mM key Less than 1 second Control initial setting 2 level key Less than 1 second keyLess than 1 second Alarm setting level key Less than 1 second Display adjustment level 7 H Operation Level Adjustment gt
348. s combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations iii Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or 577 Please knovv and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this Good NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE SELLER S PRODUCT IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM 2 3 Programmable Products Seller shall not be responsible for the user s pro gramming of a programmable Good or any consequence thereof Performance Data Performance data given in this catalog is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of Seller s test conditions and the user must corre late it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the Seller s Warranty and Limitations of Liability Change in Specifications Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons t is our prac tice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifica tions of
349. s set to heating cooling control and instrumentation is as shown in the following example Channel 1 Y 4 Temperature M SK UNS Outer tank Solenoid valve Cold water In addition to control of chemical reactions and other pro cesses that naturally generate heat heating cooling con trol is also being increasingly used to shorten heating and cooling cycles for improved production efficiency in batch process production Example Heating cooling control of a flip chip bonding machine 3 5 I Section 3 Typical Control Examples B Wiring M Settings Input initial setting level 3 6 The input is connected to IN1 according to the input type the heating system is connected to OUT1 and the cooling system is connected to OUT2 Wiring for the 4 is shown at left Chemical reaction device Sensor B c 411 EL oe lom je When the object has different heating and cooling characteristics set the cooling coefficient of heating cooling control to 0 50 Helated setting data and settings are as follows Output type of linear current output 1 1 4 to 20 mA initial setting Output type of linear current output 2 1 4 to 20 mA initial setting Control mode 1 Heating cooling control Action r r Reverse action
350. s wely p0000000 H 21 1e e 2 um s jelu 04402 0000000 H L1 16 e Bues enu 01402 20000000 H L O 1 l A Bues eniur 1ndu 10000000 H 0 440 p lqesidq 00000000 H iz 28S p0000000 H 6 98S 2 20000000 z 295 20000000 1 98S 910 0000000 0 440 00000000 Lt dn of a a ad y 4 a L pejqesip s s one Aejdsiq 0 66 01 0 9000000 H 01 00000000 H DuneoH 9 2 Sull002 AW 90000000 H s O Buiuedo BuneeH AN 50000000 p 1ueuiBes n3001 70000000 H g 1ueuiDeg n3o0c 20000000 z 1ueuibeg n301L 20000000 1 1ueuBeg n3 1 uoneiveq 10000000 H 0 440 00000000 1 AW L0000000 H 0 BuneeH AW 00000000 H SpUO2 S SDUO2 S s AN Appendix EM uonisod enj eA b un 6410 ynejaq 01 0 60000000 9 00000000 1031u0uJ UOHedIUNWUWOD Aq 5 SENjeA de senjeA JojuouJ sen eA 195 ui pa1eolpul H poued ueos Aejdsiq 4001 2000 uo je ueos e dsip ueiS 2001 9000 Buil s uei JOWUOW YOOL poued usejje1 ejdsiq 8001 v000 eun uJnjeJ ojne ejdsiq 9001 2000 wey Aejdsip ude46 jeg poor 2000 uonoejes ejdsip AN ZOOL L000 uouuo uomoejes e dsip dS Ad 0001 0000 di 1ejoeeu senquny eyep 5um s sseuppy sseuppy od aigeven
351. se the product within the following temperature and humidity ranges Temperature 10 to 55 C no icing or condensation Humidity 2596 to 8596 When the product is installed inside a control panel make sure that the temperature around the product not the temperature around the control panel does not exceed 55 C The service life of this product and similar electronic devices is determined not only by the number of switching operations of relays but also by the service life of internal electronic components Component service life is affected by the ambient temperature the higher the temperature becomes the shorter the service life becomes and the lower the temperature becomes the longer the service life becomes Therefore the service life can be extended by lowering the temperature of the product Be sure to install the product according to the specified conditions Otherwise the heat generated by the product will cause the internal temperature to rise short ening the service life If necessary cool the product using fans or other means of air ventilation When providing forced cooling however be careful not to cool down the terminals sections alone to avoid measurement errors Noise Countermeasures To prevent inductive noise separate the wiring for the product s terminal block and connector from high voltage high current power lines Do not run the wiring parallel to or in the same cable as power lines The influence of
352. se unexpected operation resulting in minor or moderate injury or damage to the equipment Ensure safety in the event of product failure by taking safety mea sures such as installing a separate overheating prevention alarm system Product failure may occasionally prevent control or oper ation of alarm outputs resulting in damage to the connected facil ities and equipment Do not use the equipment for measurements within Measurement Categories Il III or IV according to IEC61010 1 Doing so may occasionally cause unexpected operation resulting in minor or moderate injury or damage to the equipment Use the equipment for measurements only within the Measurement Category for which the product is designed The service life of the output relays depends on the switching capacity and switching conditions Consider the actual application conditions and use the product within the rated load and electrical service life Using the product beyond its service life may occa sionally result in contact welding or burning Precautions for Safe Use 1 Use and store the product within the specified ambient temperature and humidity ranges If several products are mounted side by side or arranged in a vertical line the heat dissipation will cause the internal temperature of the products to rise shortening the service life If necessary cool the products using a fan or other cooling method 2 Provide sufficient space around the product for h
353. second Alarm setting level key Less than 1 second than 1 second Display adjustment level Communication setting i L key Less level than 1 second LL Control in progress Display Adjustment level C Control stop SPDR V display screen selection ODSL MV display selection MV heating O MV cooling C O BART Bar graph display item OFF Deviation 1 EU 10 EU 20 EU 100 EU MV heating Valve opening O MV cooling C O RET Display auto return time 0 99 0 Display auto return disabled DREE Display refresh period OFF 0 5 1 2 4 MONL Monitor item level setting x1 SC M Start display scan at power on OFF ON SC T 1 Disabled Input initial setting level Control initial setting level Control initial setting 2 level Alarm setting level Display adjustment level Communication setting level Display scan period 0 99 Advanced function setting level L ADF Expansion control setting level L EXC 8 59 Section 8 Setting data PV SP display screen selection SPP e This setting is used to select the order of display of the PV SP I display screen Operation level Setting range Units Default value 1 Display in the order PV SP Bank PV SP MV Setting Display in the order PV SP MV PV SP Bank Display only PV SP
354. second Bank No ti Bank No 0 ontrol period heat m n ic kl ui 20 5 seconds J Vt Less than 1 second L Aa Display bank selection ti Bank No Bank No 0 alarm value 1 8 85 8 5 0 C Bank No 0 alarm value 2 o 0 200 0 C tz g isplay PID selection PID set No 1 Less than 1 second RUN level Set SP with AI keys Present value PV SP MV 0 20 158 8 150 09 Less than 1 second Bank No L E F U AT run Start operation indicates that the key is pressed several times to switch to desired setting data I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 4 4 Setting the input type Set the input type switch and configure the input type setting according to the sensor used Check the table below and set the correct value for the sensor temperature range to be used When using a multi point input type set input type switches 2 to 4 and configure input type settings 2 to 4 as appropriate for the number of input points B Input type Setting input 1 to Platinum resistance temperature input sensor Pt100 150 0 to 150 0 C Input type SW 1 Make sure that the input 1 type switch is set to TC PT and then turn on the power 2 Hold down the at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Input initial setting level The display will show Input 1 type
355. selected the Transfer output upper limit and Transfer output lower limit will be respectively returned to the upper and lower limits of the setting range f an input error occurs when the transfer output assignment is set to PV the transfer output changes to the upper limit and it changes to the lower limit in the case of reverse scaling y SPlimt O Transfer type scaling range Before change TA SP After upper limit Display characters Change the upper limit value from A to B SP change B V Upper and lower limit value v Upper and lower limit value of transfer type scaling Setting data Level Display 3 name Control Transfer output 1 to 4 assignment Transfer output 1 to 4 upper limit Transfer output 1 to 4 lower limit Specify Control Transfer output Control initial setting 2 t 2 Control initial setting 2 5 2 Transfer output scaling 5 33 i Section 5 Functions and Operations 5 9 Using communication functions M Setting communication parameters Communication parameters are set in the Communications setting level The parameters and settings are shown in the following table Initial settings are highlighted u Setting data name Setting values Description characters PSEL Protocol selecton Eass CompoWay F Modus U Communication unin Ho bes o ten Communication data lerah eto 7805 sb Transmission
356. selling item S Alarm lower limit 3 Configurable Alarm 4 Configurable setting item 4 Alarm upper limit 4 Configurable PF2 Monitor Alarm lower limit 4 Configurable setting item 5 Bank No Configurable 6 Related setting data Reference PF1 setting PF2 setting Advanced function setting level P 8 68 8 69 I Section 8 Setting data Number of enabled channels RAM write mode 8 70 f Setting 7 f a Setting s Lt 91 Multi point input type This setting is used to set the number of enabled channels when using multiple channels on a multi point input type Setting range Units Default value er 5 The default value and setting range vary depending on the control mode setting of the multi point input type 2 input type Proportional control standard control with remote SP heating cooling control with remote SP 1 Other modes 2 4 input type 4 6 Related setting data Begin display scan after power on Display scan period Display adjustment level P 8 62 m Use this setting to select the write mode When writing setting data to setting area O by Backup mode communication the data is also written to internal non volatile memory When writing setting data to setting area O by communication the data is not written to internal RAM write mode non volatile memory Hovvever changes to setting data by key operation are vvritten to non volatile memo
357. setting Action r r Reverse action initial setting SP 115 00 C Control period heat 0 2 The following explains how to set the input type the output type of output 1 the SP and the control period heat and how to check the control mode 1 Before turning on the power check that the input 1 type switch is set to TC PT 2 Turn on the power and then hold down the key at least 3 seconds to move from RUN level to Input initial setting level Input 1 input type will appear Press the key to select the setting 1 Pt100 150 00 to 150 00 C 3 Press the key less than 1 second to move from Input initial setting lhal level to Control initial setting level a Output 1 Output type will appear Check sure that the set value is 0 Pulse voltage output 4 Press the repeatedly to select Aad Control mode Check that the setting is 0 Standard control 5 Hold down the for at least 1 second to return to RUN level PV SP MV will appear Press the key and set the SP to 115 00 3 3 I Section 3 Typical Control Examples Adjustment level 6 Press the key less than 1 second to move from RUN level to Adjustment level m period 7 Press the E l repeatedly to select EP Control
358. sive writing of 2 to 52 items of setting data in contiguous addresses To specify the variable type or address see Appendix Setting list P A 6 Write setting data to setting area 1 from setting area 1 If written from setting area O an error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command To store setting data of Operation and Adjustment setting levels in non volatile memory select Backup with the Write mode command If not set to Backup the setting data will not remain in memory when the power is turned off For more information on Operation and Adjustment levels see 4 1 Setting levels and key operation P 4 2 Slave Function Write start Number of Response address mode address elements CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 6 Writing to the variable area P 7 12 7 20 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus B Write via communication Response Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 oe Hoo lm 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Description Related information VVrite via communication disable H 01 Write via communication enable This command is used to enable or disable Write via communication When sent it changes the set value of Write via communication When Write via communication is dis
359. sponse code Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Instruction Related MRC SRC code information Ce Le Tele This returns all settings to the initial settings This command is used in setting area 1 If used in setting area O an operation error will result To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 6 27 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F MH Cancel latch M SP mode 6 28 Response nstruction Related MRC SRC code information Related informan Ov 1 Cancelalarmiatch Cancel alarm latch This command cancels alarm latch The command is used when the alarm latch function is in use This command can be used in both setting area O and setting area 1 If AT is being run in the specified channel an operation error will result e To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command MRC SRC Response code Hesponse codes The above indicates a normal end For the response codes see 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F P 6 11 Instruction Related MRC SRC code inf
360. ss Operation Level 7 PV manual MV n Position proportional control type 4 PV valve opening O MV monitor heating C O MV monitor coolin PV SP display 1 tor cooling PV 7 SP bank No PV SP display 2 Present SP n MV R S RUN STOP PV SP display 3 n Present SP bank No A M AUTO MANU RSP Remote SP monitor 1 1 In manual mode 2 One of the following is displayed depending on the Display screen selection setting SP M Ramp SP monitor Display 1 Display 2 e Display 2 Display 3 Display 1 only Display 2 only CH Manual MV Manual operation This sets the MV or valve opening during manual operation On a standard type the MV is changed by pressing the AIM keys On a position proportional type the key turns on open and the 4 key turns on close e On a standard type Display 1 shows the PV and Display 2 shows the MV 8 5 I Section 8 Setting data 1 Present value PV na jus m HN LA Manipulated variable MV 4 w 20 P E a MANU lights up When changed with the AIX keys the MV is output once every 50 ms and updated in the system
361. steresis CH CH PV dead band 8 74 Setting By Setting nC ku n P 4 De me mse n This setting is used for automatic selection of the PID set The PID set number to be used is automatically selected based on the value set in PID set automatic selection data The switching range is specified in the PID set automatic select range PID setting level e PID set automatic selection hysteresis is used to prevent chattering when the PID is changed PID set automatic selection P Present value Pu Present data du Deviation value Related information 5 2 Control functions W PID sets P 5 12 Related setting data Bank PID Set No Bank setting level P 8 27 PID Set No Automatic selection range upper limit PID setting level P 8 32 nC Position proportional type i n D This setting is used on a position proportional type to have PV SP when the PV is within the PV dead band e This function prevents unnecessary output when the PV is near the SP PV dead band 0 to 99999 EU o 8 16 Expansion control setting level L Eu 6 Related information 3 3 Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln P 3 9 Reference Related setting data Closed Floating Control initial setting level P 8 44 Motor calibration Control initial setting 2 leve
362. stment level 2 Press the key to set Write via communication to an Setting data can be written 100 000 times If you will be writing setting data frequently select RAM r D write mode Special function setting level 5 35 i Section 5 Functions and Operations G 2 lt 2 S DD 50 LL 5 36 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 1 Communication methoq 6 2 6 2 Frames Communication CompovVVay F 6 4 0 0 RINGS AMNION aa A ado te 6 6 6 4 Variable areas 6 7 6 5 Reading the variable area 6 9 6 6 Writing to the variable area 6 10 6 7 Operation commands Communication CompoWay F 6 11 6 8 Seting Ez da aaa aa s 6 13 6 9 Commands and responses Communication CompovVVay F 6 14 6 10 Program example 6 32 irm Ss i 3a E 58 o Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 1 Communication method E CompoWay F communication protocol CompoWay F is OMRON s unified protocol for general purpose seria
363. t potentiometer input error is OFF an error MV is output at all other times normal operation takes place Normal operation MV at PV error Normal operation Motor calibration 1 Check the wiring to the error potentiometer and valve drive motor and then try motor calibration again Set value Input type switch Set the input type switch for the blinks error input you are using so that it accords with the displayed Input type setting p m PC re he he A kn PR nmn If the system does not operate as expected after configuring settings check the wiring and set values once again If there is still a problem unintended set values may have been accidentally configured in the setting data In this case you can initialize the unit and then re configure your settings Initializing the unit will return all settings to the factory default settings The fac tory default settings may cause unexpected output so disconnect all output A Caution wires and eliminate effects to the system before initializing the unit In addition write down your settings prior to initialization 10 3 I Section 10 Troubleshooting 10 3 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal measured values 6 The measured value is abnormal or measurement is not possible NEN Possible cause Solution 9 The polarity or connections to the temperature sensor are Connect the wires correctly
364. t shift input value 1 The following is an example when the input type is K 1 200 to 1300 C The temperature of the object will be obtained Room temperature When B 25 C the controller reading is A 40 C Temperature near the SP When B 550 C the controller reading is A 500 C In this case the input shift values are obtained as follows Input value for input shift 1 Controller reading A 40 C Input shift 1 Temperature of object B Controller reading A 25 40 15 00 C Input value for input shift 2 Controller reading A 500 C Input shift 2 Temperature of object B Controller reading A 550 500 50 00 C 5 1 Input adjustment functions 1st order lag operation 1 enabled 1st order lag operation 1 time constant FI FI LL a r Lt Lt g RE M Move average Move average operation 1 enabled
365. t types select standard control heating cooling control standard control with remote SP heating cooling control with remote SP proportional control cascade standard control or cascade heating cooling control 8 43 Section 8 Setting data Setting a CH Forward reverse operation gt m Setting dM CH Closed Floating 3 Setting m 8 44 Setting range Units Default value Standard Heating cooling Remote SP standard Remote SP heating cooling Proportional Cascade standard Cascade heating cooling The setting range is O to 1 on a single or 4 input type or O to 6 on a 2 input type Related information Section 3 Typical Control Examples P 3 1 4 6 Selecting the control mode P 4 12 6 Related setting data Manual reset value Adiustment level P 8 15 Hysteresis heat Hysteresis cool Adjustment level P 8 16 Control Transfer output assignment Control initial setting 2 level P 8 46 LIF LL e When direct action is selected the MV is increased when the PV increases When reverse action is selected the MV is increased when the PV decreases Reverse operation d Direct operation Related information 4 7 Setting output parameters W Direct operation cool Reverse operation heat P 4 13 rt Position proportional type r r Use this setting to select the control method for a position pro
366. tL Mo 6 25 SOTUVATETES D uuu a ay R 6 25 Move to seking ared T is s b 6 26 Move to protect level 6 26 Auto Man al Me 6 27 nitialize setiinds aa s A 6 27 CANCE TALC uyu serra ees nb bol beni 6 28 Endo ei eR ae ee ae eee sia l 6 28 Head machine attributes 6 29 Controller status read Communication CompoWay F 6 30 ECO DACK IESE T cR 6 31 6 10 Program example un ce u ua A 6 32 1155050 a b bu DLL T 6 32 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 1 Communication method 7 2 Modbus communication protocol 7 2 Communication specifications 7 2 Transfer protocol Communication Modbus 7 2 Te RAMES ae PETER 7 4 Command Tamer m deco Rue Mr edes 7 4 Response II ING oos bon acide ua a bas lara asi De Ba 7 5 m LASTORTUNNCHONS cn b A baa 7 7 Z 4 S ea aa polad 7 8 7 5 Reading the variable area 7 10 7 6 Writing to the variable area 7 12 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus 7 14 TiS Seting dE s usupa s nsspa R ORA nam e RS 7 16
367. te start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 1 1 2 2 2 bytes Related Description information Selected Bank No 00 to 07 0 to 7 H 10 to 17 2 O to 7 H 30 to 37 0 to 7 H FO to F7 0 to 7 This command is used to change banks there are 8 banks numbered 0 to 7 An SP alarm values and a PID Set No are stored in each bank H 20 to 27 0 to 7 This command can be used in both setting area 0 and setting area 1 An operation error will result if AT is running in the selected channel To use this command Write via communication must be enabled using the Write via communication operation command Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 H00 H00 H02 1 1 2 2 2 bytes The above indicates a normal end For information on error responses see 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus P 7 14 B AT execute M AT cancel Hesponse 7 9 Commands and responses Communication Modbus Slave Function Write start Instruction Related address mode address code information CRC 16 meme Hoo oo 2 2 1 1 2 bytes Related formaten 00 Currently selected PID Set No 01 to 08 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 10 Currently selected PID Set No 11 to 18 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 30 Currently selected PID Set No 31 to 38 Specifies PID Set No 1 to 8 F0 Currently selected PID Set No F1 to F8 Sp
368. temperature sensor was replaced or a switch setting Turn the power off and then on was changed while the power was on Method of use Settings Simple method for checking input Platinum resistance temperature input sensor 1 Connect a 100 Q resistor between input terminals A B and short circuit B B 2 If the measured temperature is approximately 0 0 C or 32 0 F the E5AR ER is operating normally Thermocouple 1 Short circuit the input terminal of the temperature sensor 2 If the temperature close to the terminal plate can be measured the E5AR ER is operating normally Analog input Use a STV to supply the specified current or voltage and verify 10 4 10 4 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal control 10 4 Inferring causes from conditions abnormal control The PV does not rise Abnormal measured value Solve as explained in section 10 3 A load is not connected to the control output Connect a load terminal Incorrect load polarity or incorrect terminal Wire correctly connections The terminal connection screws are loose resulting 1 Tighten the screws securely in a bad connection The heater power is not turned on Turn on the heater power The heater has a broken wire or has deteriorated Replace the heater The heater has a low heat capacity e Change to a heater with a high heat capacity e f using two or more heaters replace any heaters that have broken wires Connections The overheating preventio
369. tes non specific general prohibitions General Caution Indicates non specific general cautions warn ings and dangers Mandatory Caution Precautions A CAUTION Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while power is being supplied Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric shock Do not touch the terminals or electronic components or patterns on the PCB within 1 minute after turning OFF the power Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric shock Do not allow pieces of metal wire clippings or fine metallic shav ings or filings from installation to enter the product Doing so may occasionally result in electric shock fire or malfunction Do not use the product in locations where flammable or explosive gases are present Doing so may occasionally result in minor or moderate explosion causing minor or moderate injury or property damage Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify the product Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric shock Tighten the screws on the terminal block and the connector lock ing screws securely using a tightening torque within the following ranges Loose screws may occasionally cause fire resulting in minor or moderate injury or damage to the equipment Terminal block screws 0 40 to 0 56 N m Perform correct setting of the product according to the application Failure to do so may occasionally cau
370. the Good may be changed without any notice When in doubt special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application Please consult with your Seller s representative at any time to con firm actual specifications of purchased Good Errors and Omissions The information in this catalog has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLA
371. thus it is used in combination with action As time elapses the offset disappears and the controlled temperature and SP equalize D action Control action using output that is proportional to the time derivative of the input P action and action serve to correct the control result and thus respond slowly to sudden temper ature changes D action corrects control by adding an MV that is proportional to the slope of the temperature change Setting data Setting range Units Default value e Proportional band P 0 00 to 999 99 10 00 Setting Integral time I 0 0 to 3999 9 233 0 Derivative time D 0 0 to 3999 9 e For ON OFF control set the proportional band to 0 0 0 0 cannot be selected on a position proportional type For P control or PD control set the integral time to 0 0 0 0 cannot be selected on a position proportional type when performing floating control or when Operation at potentiometer error is set to Continue 6 Related setting data AT Execute Cancel Adjustment level P 8 13 CH PID MV upper limit LH PID MV lower limit 2 1 1 to 8 Advanced PID control Use MV upper limit and MV lower limit to set upper and lower limits for the MV When the unit calculates an MV that is outside of the upper and lower limits the upper or lower limit is output MV upper limit The setting range differs for standard control and heating cooling control The cooling MV of h
372. tion 4 Settings Required for Basic Control 7 Press the key to select 42 Decimal point position Set to 1 with the AI keys 8 Hold down the key for at least 1 second to return to RUN level The scaling setting is configured for each channel Scaling for inputs 1 to 4 of a multi point input type corresponds to channels 1 to 4 Select the channel with the CH key and then configure the setting Setting data name Display Setting range p k ra value Scaling input value 1 H See table below 4 Table below H 19999 to scaling display EU value 2 1 H See table below 20 Table below i Ei H d C Scaling display value 1 C Scaling input value 2 C C Scaling display value 2 Scaling display value 1 1 to 100 EU 99999 poa Decimal point position C Setting range and units for each input type 0 10 10 V Oto 10 4 5 Selecting the temperature units 4 5 Selecting the temperature units When the input type is set to temperature input input from a thermocouple or a platinum resistance temperature input sensor C or F can be selected for the temperature units When using a multi point input type set the temperature units separately for each input 2 to 4 as appro priate for the number of inputs Selecting C 1 Ho
373. to the variable area Response codes Function Error Cause code code Number of elements and number of data items do not agree Variable data error Number of elements x 2 does not agree with byte count Write data exceeds the setting range The operation state does not permit writing The settings for the write data are not permit ted in the current operation mode 6 Write via communication is OFF disabled Attempted to write to setting data of setting Operation error area 1 from setting area O Attempted to write to protect setting data from other than protect level 6 AT is running 6 User calibration in progress Unit error unit change display unit error non volatile memory error 6 Writing non display data It is possible to write to setting data even if it is set to non display or is not displayed due to the model however exercise caution when writing continuously Command response example Writing to SP setting upper limit and SP setting lower limit of control initial setting level of channel 1 Client address H O1 SP setting upper limit of channel 1 Address HOD1E Data written H 00002710 1000 0 C SP setting lower limit of channel 1 Address HOD20 Data written H FFFFFC18 100 0 C Command CRC 16 Response CRC 16 7 13 Section 7 Communication Modbus 7 7 Operation commands Communication Modbus Operation commands are sent using the following command frame
374. tting COM 6 E53 ARCC OUT4 Current output D 2 3 E5AR A4B 500 Event inputs EV1 4 20 mA DC 500 max 0 20 mA DC 500 max Switch using output type setting q OUT3 4 e Current output 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max Switch using output type setting 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 6 G V PT Current Voltage Thermocouple Resistance thermometer Section 2 Preparations E5AR Q43DW FLK 2 loop Control E5AR C43DW FLK 2 loop Control E5AR A4W 500 f ESAR A4VV 500 EBAR A4W 500 EBAR A4W 500 100 240 VAC Auxiliary outputs 100 240 VAC Auxiliary outputs Relay outputs B Relay outputs COM o 1 com A B C ID 2 1 SUB1 na rs 2 T gt SUBI SUB2 2r 4 SUB2 COM L J 4 4 53 H SUB3 S lt gt SUB3 E53 ARCC3 5 4 na 6 6 SUB4 Rs 485 P 7 r 7 bi Event inputs 2 0 rer Event init A H 1 Event inputs D 420mADC 5000max 1 Fair o 0 20 mA DC 500 0 max r 53 EV3 79 2 2 Switch using output 4 4 1 EV3 2 HEH type setting pi tor
375. two groups according to thermocouple type Group 1 input types 2 4 7 8 10 14 and Group 2 input types 3 5 6 9 11 12 13 Do not cover the bottom of the thermocouple during calibration Also do not touch the input terminal or compensation wire Preparations E5AR E5ER Input power supply Cold junction compensator 0 C 32 F Compensating wire For the cold junction compensator use a compensator for calibration of internal thermocouples and set to O C The internal thermocouple should be disabled tip open e STV in the diagram indicates a DC reference current voltage generator e Prepare a compensation wire appropriate for the selected thermo couple For thermocouples R S E B and W a cold junction compensator and compensation wire for thermocouple K can be used junction compensator touched during thermocouple calibration Therefore to connect or disconnect the cold junction compensator short circuit enable or open circuit disable the tip of the thermocouple inside the cold junction compensator while keeping the compensation wire connected as shown in the diagram Connecting the cold A correct input value cannot be obtained if the compensation wire connector is Cold junction compensator Cold junction compensator Short circuit E5AR ER Compensating wire Compensating wire 9 5 I Section 9 User calibration Follow these steps to perform calibration when thermocouple input
376. uence deviation 6 Absolute value lower limit 6 with standby sequence 1 Set values in general 1 4 and 5 allow upper and lower limits of alarm value to be separately set and are indicated by L and H 2 Set value in general 1 Upper and lower limit alarm Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 always ON H lt 0 L lt 0O L H SP SPL H SP L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 Sn Sl 77 IHI ILI IHIsILI H LSP 5 H gt 0 L lt 0O SPH L IHISILI 3 Set value in general 4 Upper and lower limit range Case 3 always OFF Case Case 2 H lt 0 L lt 0 H SP L L H SP SP L H H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L 77 lt 0 L gt gt 0 L lt 0 H LSP IHIZILI 0 SPHL IHISILI 4 Set value in general 5 Alarm with upper and lower limit standby sequence With the above upper and lower limit alarms eln cases 1 and 2 eln case 3 always OFF If hysteresis overlaps at upper and lower limit alvvays OFF 5 Set value in general 5 Alarm with upper and lower limit standby sequence If hysteresis overlaps at upper and lower limit always OFF 6 For information on standby sequences see 5 6 Alarm adjustment functions 4 23 I Section 4 Settings Required for Basic Control When using SP ramp an alarm will activate during RUN with respect to the SP after ramping and during STOP an alarm will activate with respect to the SP Operating point of alarm upper limit alarm SP SP after ramp B Alarm values Alarm values are indicated by X in the a
377. ufreas 666 6 01 666 L 40 20000 01 LE844444 H indino uoneuuxoJdde eui ubreas 666 6 01 666 L 40 20000 01 LE844444 H c indui uogeuuxoadde eur 1ubrens 666 6 01 666 L 40 20000 01 LE844444 H indui uoneuuxoadde eui 1ufrens adh ejqeue en EA 195 spun 1170 eu en eA uoluoul Bumes Joeyoeseyy seinquny ejep uias Sea 1 7 julod jeuroeq ngea Snapo Jj AeModuio5 Goluouu uoneorunuuuoo Aq 1es sen eA eJe senjeA JoyuouJ S NJLA 1es Ul pejeolpul H I A um s uoneuuixoJuddy 1 1 gt Li Li 1 m 1 Dx n gt K Li 41 cn Eri Dx T KPQ y yx T Li q gt K K gt Du QU z p OXA Pe DX Dx so oH oS oH eS eo eS ee cn cn x q gt K Li m Og m AXIR gt Dx Dx 8 LE LC LP LP x X AL ES Cr Eri Eni Eri Eril Eri Eri or l Cr Eni Eni Emi Eril e Eri kuku A En Eri I Eni Eri Eni Emi Evil Emi Eri Eri n c m Emil n En x En n n ym l lt lt T x Jequunu 195 Ald p l l s uone1edo y JOU IIA 3 1nq peBueuo eq ueo siu 6 10 S4 9666666 1 p xil SI 8 ON 18S Ald JO uonoejes oneujojne y Jo jui Jeddn eu 6666
378. unction key the PF2 setting does not appear However the key can be used as a function key if the number of enabled channels is set to 1 wa ju jw K L e values F aF Disabled Does not function as a function key RUN Rn Run currently displayed channel STOP 526 Stop currently displayed channel Run Stop Switch between run and stop for currently displayed channel H Run all Run all channels m 1 rt Stop all Stop all channels AT Execute Cancel Switch between AT execute and AT cancel AT run is executed for the currently selected PID set Bank selection Switch through the bank numbers adds 1 to the current bank number A M R y 00 Switch between auto and manual Monitor Setting item Display monitor setting item Select Monitor Setting item 1 to Monitor Setting item 5 Special function level e Hold down the PF1 or PF2 for at least 1 second to execute the function selected in PF1 setting or PF2 setting If Monitor Setting item is selected the display will scroll through monitor setting items 1 to 5 each time you press the key The initial settings for the function keys are as follows PF1 setting A M a key PF2 setting R S run stop toggle The function keys are only effective in the Operation Adjust
379. ung gt Dx l al 07001 01 070 83600000 01 00000000 0709 01 0 S F3L00000 H 91 26000000 6 6 01 170 9000000H 91 L0000000 H 0 0L 01 170 v9000000 H 01 10000000 H L 21 POIN L0000000H 0 0 PON 00000000 H Du px 1 Ln i qux Lt PEL ng EN al uoieraap juawebpni uoneyaxe V Aresodwa epnyjduue AWN 31949 yw 2261 1100 Ki HO ese V 0221 0100 3 38 HO abet 3000 epouu ywi 0384 eDBueuo AN 0 S0L 01 0 901 VLEOO000 H 01 9384442 H 009 89H 0 901 01 0 S VLP0O000 H 01 30444444 H prepueis 9n E A Jeu AN ENUEN L LINI 4ndino en eA jnejeq L0000000 H PIOY AW 00000000 poul ul indino enuen 1 NO UO 10000000 H 0 440 HO 00000000 H Ad 00 L 01 0070 9000000 01 00000000 o 1 NO 10000000 H 0 4 10 00000000 H L NO 10000000 H 0 4 10 00000000 H 1 NO 10000000 H 0 4 10 00000000 H uonesueduioo uonounf pjoo 1ndu uonesueduioo uonounf pjoo e Indu 30 2000 ad indui o 2 1 NO 10000000 H 0 440 00000000 55555 66666 01 4698 L000 H 01 00000000 H uleis s DunesueduJoo uonounf pjoo z 1ndu mm uonesueduioo uonounf pjoo nd l vOEL 5000 6666 01 0170 40 20000 01 V0000000 H 1 AG 1 0000000 0 Ad 00000000 IE uonisod julod yewioeq en eA ynejeq 1 NO
380. ustment 2 Bank setting PID setting Approximation setting and Monitor item levels Operation Bank setting Setting Adjustment Ale Adiustment 2 Approximation value justme setting Monitor item Can display and change O Can display e x Cannot display or move to level The default value is This setting restricts access to Input initial setting Control initial setting Control initial setting 2 Alarm setting Display adjustment and Communications setting levels Move to Control initial setting Setting Move to input initial Control initial setting 2 Alarm value setting level setting Display adjustment Communications setting level Allowed Displays Move to special func Allowed tion setting level Allowed Does not dis 1 play Move to special Allowed function setting level Prohibited Prohibited e When Initial setting level protect is set to 2 nothing happens when the level key is held down to move to Input initial setting level from Operation Adjustment Adjustment 2 Bank setting PID setting Approximation setting or Monitor item level the blinking display to indicate movement to another level also does not appear Initial setting level protect is initially set to 5 5 Protecting settings Setting change This function prevents use of the AIM keys protect Setting change protect Setting Description value m Keys can be used t
381. ut voltage output current output communi cation are insulated from each other with functional insulation Input event input voltage output current output communication relay output transistor output are insulated from each other with basic insulation If reinforced insulation is required input event input voltage output current output and communication terminals must be connected to a device that have no exposed chargeable parts and whose basic insulation is suitable for the applicable maximum voltage of connected parts Power supply Event input voltage output current output mm Deinforced insulation Relay output Basic insulation Transistor output Functional insulation Section 3 Typical Control Examples 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 Standard control Heating cooling control of a chemical reaction device Position proportional control of a ceramic kiln 3 9 Cascade control of reflow ovens Ratio control of dyeing machines Ie o S lt me O x el I Section 3 Typical Control Examples 3 1 Standard control The following is an example of basic single loop control whereby temperature control of a heater plate for semiconductors is carried out example of combined sensor and heater B Application When controlling a heater plater for semiconductor wafers with the E5AR the control mode is set to standard control and instrumentation is
382. uts Relay outputs COM SUB1 o SUB2 gt COM E53 AR 5 M w SUB3 az BAD RS 485 s SUBA OUT2 AC Q Voltage output 12V 40 mA _ 3 OUT HA Voltage output ZN 12V 40 mA or 5 C O o OOS m E5ER C4B EBER AB 500 24 VAC DC 100 240 VAC gt te Q s m 1 Input power supply depends on the model 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VAC DC no polarity s o o 3 T ro T Jv o Is 53 OUT2 Current output 4 20 mA 500 Q max 1 0 20 mA 500 Q max Switching by output type setting OUT1 Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max 0 20 mA DC 500 Q max SI JO E5ER C43B FLK E5ER AB 500 100 240 VAC 53 4 Relay Auxiliary outputs outputs E5ER AB 500 Event inputs EV1 EV2 oe COM Current Voltage Switch using output type setting A mle lo l olo TC Thermocoup Resistance thermometer Ko E53 ARR4 Auxiliary outputs Relay outputs f E53 ARCC3 B RS 485 OUT2 Asla Current output 4 20 mA DC 500 Q max SX 0 20
383. vative time 8 OL H PID8 MV upper limit MV lower limit 0 1 105 0 8 OL L PID8 MV lower limit 5 0 MV lower limit MV upper limit 0 1 temperature of sensor setting range 3 1 Position proportional type 0 01 999 99 2 Position proportional floating control type 0 1 3999 9 3 Analog type 10 to 110 of scaling display range with a maximum of 19999 to 99999 Communication setting level Setting data list less than 1 second Approximation Setting Level SIE eorr BEI approximation 1 Input 1 1 999 9 999 SI2 1 Straight line approximation 1 Input 2 1 999 9 999 SO1 1 Straight line approximation 1 Output 1 1 999 9 999 SO2 1 Straight line approximation 1 Output 2 1 999 9 999 SI1 2 Straight line approximation 2 Input 1 1 999 9 999 SI2 2 Straight line approximation 2 Input 2 1 999 9 999 01 2 Straight line approximation 2 Output 1 1 999 9 999 02 2 Straight line approximation 2 Output 2 1 999 9 999 FIO1 1 Broken line approximation 1 Input 1 1 999 9 999 FI20 1 Broken line approximation 1 Input 20 1 999 9 999 FO01 1 Broken line approximation 1 Output 1 1 999 9 999 FO20 1 Broken line approximation 1 Output 20 1 999 9 999 A 31 Appendix v Tkey 3 seconds or more Control stops less than 1 second less
384. vel key Less level EJE key Less level key Less level than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second than 1 second key less than 1 second C Control in progress C Control stop Control initial setting level O1 T Output 1 type Pulse voltage output O Linear current output 1 Jie x _ O3 T Output 3 type Li al Puise voltage output O Linear current output 1 CO1 T Linear current output 1 type 0 20mA 0 4 20mA 1 MODE Control mode EO CO2 T Linear current output 2 type 0 20mA 0 4 20mA 1 OREV Forvvard reverse operation Reverse OR R Forvard OR D CO3 T Linear current output 3 type 0 20mA 0 4 20mA 1 CLFL Closed Floating Floating FLOAT Closed CLOSE CO4 T Linear current output 4 type 0 20mA 0 4 20mA 1 Temperature SP lower limit 1 to upper limit of sensor setting range SP lower limit 1 to lesser of 99999 or display value equivalent of input upper limit Temperature Lower limit of sensor setting range to SP upper limit 1 Larger of 19999 and display value equivalent of input lower value to SP upper limit 1 Standard 0 heating or cooling 1 Standard 0 heating or cooling 1 Standard with remote SP 2 Heating or cooling 3 with remote SP Proportion 4 Cascade standard 5 Cascade heating or co
385. wait time 0 to 99 ms Protocol selections 522 The communication protocol can be set to CompoWay F Omron s unified protocol for general purpose serial communication or Modbus based on RTU Mode of Modbus Protocol Specifications PI MBUS 300 Rev l of Modicon Inc Communication Unit No L When performing communication with a host computer a unit number must be set in each controller to allow the host computer to recognize it Any number from O to 99 can be set The unit number is initially set to 1 When using multiple controllers make sure that no units have the same unit number or communication will not take place correctly After setting a unit number turn off the power and then turn it on again to make the new unit number take effect Communications speed 575 Set the communications speed for communication with a host computer The following speeds are available 9 6 9 600 bit s 19 2 19 200 bit s 38 4 38 400 bit s After setting the speed turn off the power and then turn it on again to make the new speed setting take effect Communication data length L The communication data length can set to 7 bits or 8 bits Communication stop bit 55 The communication stop bit can be set to 1 or 2 Communication parity 7 55 The communication parity can be set to None nan Even EuEn or Odd add Transmission wait time 55 After changing the transmission wait time perform a software reset or turn th
386. will be read as H 0000041A 105 0 1050 H 0000041A 6 5 Reading the variable area 6 5 Reading the variable area The data area is read by setting the required data in the following FINS mini command text format FINS mini command text Variable MRC SRC type Read start address Bit position Number of elements Pe ed 2 2 2 4 2 0001 to 0019 Data name Explanation Specifies the FINS mini monitor value setting data MRC SRC read command Variable type Specify a variable type First address of read Specify the address for the beginning of the read Not used on the E5AR ER Specify 00 Number of elements Specifies the number of variables to read max of 25 H 19 Not needed for a compound read FINS mini response text Response code MR MRES SRES Data to be read C SRC MRES SRES Data tobe ml EN 2 2 4 Number of elements x 8 bytes for compound read number of elements x 10 bytes Response codes code 1001 Command length too long The command is too long i Command length too The command is too short 1998 short 1101 Area type error Incorrect variable type 110B 1 Response length too long Number of elements gt 25 H 0019 Specified bit position is other than 00 Operation error Unit error unit change display unit 2203 error internal non volatile memory error Ses 6 9 Section 6 Communication CompoWay F 6 6 Writing to the variable
387. xpansion control setting level less than 1 second BankSetting Level Display bank selection Bank 0 7 L 7 LSP Bank 7 LSP SP lower limit SP upper limit 7 PID Bank 7 PID set nunmer 0 8 els lt A 4j 7 AL 1 Bank 7 Alarm value 1 19999 99999 E E 4 E 7 AL1H Bank 7 Alarm upper limit 1 19999 99999 4 Caz Ez g 4 7 AL1L Bank 7 Alarm lower limit 1 19999 99999 4 mm o pu az t O pe FH lt A 2 Ex 7 ALAL Bank 7 Alarm lower limit 4 19999 99999 A lkey 1 second or more Control starts Bank setting level Alarm setting level __ less than 1 second gt PID Setting PID setting level Display adjustment level __ less than 1 second Level CHIT pi PID1 PID2 PID3 y ri E 4 Display PID selection 8 P PID8 Proportional band 0 00 999 99 standard 1 0 0 3999 9 standard 33 4 position proportional closed control 2 Deri
388. y AOQE SE ulES AOQE SE UOUJUJO7 UOHneoo 2 jndino Kaei ixny 630 LLOO 9 01 06 PHO v2000000 H 01 Q1000000 H 6z 01 2 EHO 11000000 H O 000000 Ape IUIS 91000000 Lz 10416 Indu 49 ZHO 81000000 H oz 10116 1ndu ZHO 77 L000000 H 6L v wely ZHO 61000000 81 wely 2 2L000000 H ZL z wely ZHO LL000000 H 91 L wely ZHO 01000000 H 40000000 indino HO 4019 Indul 49 sjeuueu iv 30000000H EL ndino YO joue Indu sjeuueuo 400000001H ZL nd no HO t uuejy sjeuueu V 20000000 H LL 1ndino HO wey sjeuueu V 80000000 01 1ndino HO Z wely sjeuueu Iv v0000000 H 6 1ndino HO 1 wey sjeuueuo V 60000000 H 8 W1v n 80000000 0000000 9 10119 3ndu dSH VHO 90000000 H S 104149 1ndu LHO 50000000 iz v wely LHO 70000000 H g wely LHO 0000000 H z z wely LHO 20000000 H L wely LHO L0000000 H L 0 p lqesiq 00000000 H UOUUJO uoneooje 1ndino 0230 0100 JO uonisod en eA SseJppy SSeJppy adh ejqeueA A 20 si 1ndino JoJsueJ o 33u09 BuipuodsaJJoo ay UBYM pezi eniui jui 1e wojueddn dS pue anea ejdsip Sulleos syun sunyesodwia ed 1ndu 9u L 0 0 07001 07011 01 0701 27700000H 01 06444444 H Duiuedo A BA epis pesojo JO epis 1002 0 0 07001 0 901 01 070 VI700000H 01 00000000 H ndino 140 0 901 01 00 Y
389. y for multi channel control For 1 point input types the key acts as a function key that activates the function set in PF2 setting when pressed Function key 2 When used as a channel key channel key Switches channels on models with a multi channel configuration The channel switching sequence is as follows CH1 CH2 Highest channel set in Enabled channel setting 2 CH Functions as a start key for the displayed scan 1 6 1 3 Input output Configuration and Main Functions 1 3 Input output Configuration and Main Functions B input output configuration The input output configuration of the E5AR ER and internal setting item are shown in the following diagram Input type switch Input type Temperature units Scaling Extraction of Extraction of tion of square root 1 square root 2 root 3 2775 i I st order lag operation 1 Control mode is controliwith remote SP Broken ine approximation 1 I Channel 1 Remote SP Standard control Local SP BankNo0 I BNK2 1 R 5 k Standard control with remote SP b ocal SP Alarm value P D set Local SP 1 1 2 Bank NO Heating cooling control with remote SP BNKO 1 i Local SP Alarm value PID set SP mode ENDS MV change rate limiter put nput error MV limiter AUMA Remote SP input error Event input assignment Potentiometer input error u aaa

USER MANUAL E5AR E5ER Digital Controller

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents